US20230008169A1 - A Robotic Mower with Integrated Assemblies - Google Patents
A Robotic Mower with Integrated Assemblies Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20230008169A1 US20230008169A1 US17/948,249 US202217948249A US2023008169A1 US 20230008169 A1 US20230008169 A1 US 20230008169A1 US 202217948249 A US202217948249 A US 202217948249A US 2023008169 A1 US2023008169 A1 US 2023008169A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- wheel
- mower
- assembly
- charging
- robotic mower
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
- 230000000712 assembly Effects 0.000 title description 4
- 238000000429 assembly Methods 0.000 title description 4
- 238000003825 pressing Methods 0.000 claims description 43
- 238000000465 moulding Methods 0.000 abstract description 2
- 235000014676 Phragmites communis Nutrition 0.000 description 60
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 59
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 56
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 48
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 48
- 238000005520 cutting process Methods 0.000 description 46
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 42
- 239000000725 suspension Substances 0.000 description 42
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 30
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 28
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 27
- 239000006096 absorbing agent Substances 0.000 description 25
- 230000035939 shock Effects 0.000 description 25
- 238000007789 sealing Methods 0.000 description 24
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 23
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 description 15
- 244000025254 Cannabis sativa Species 0.000 description 14
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 14
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 12
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 11
- 230000008093 supporting effect Effects 0.000 description 11
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 10
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 10
- 230000013011 mating Effects 0.000 description 9
- 238000003032 molecular docking Methods 0.000 description 9
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000009423 ventilation Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000006378 damage Effects 0.000 description 6
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000000149 penetrating effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000003014 reinforcing effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000001681 protective effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 244000273256 Phragmites communis Species 0.000 description 4
- 230000004913 activation Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000006835 compression Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000001965 increasing effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000001939 inductive effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000004308 accommodation Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000004140 cleaning Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000013016 damping Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000001976 improved effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000002689 soil Substances 0.000 description 3
- XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N Iron Chemical compound [Fe] XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000004020 conductor Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000008602 contraction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000005489 elastic deformation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000005389 magnetism Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000008439 repair process Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000005096 rolling process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000004575 stone Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000013585 weight reducing agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000005355 Hall effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000027418 Wounds and injury Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000002159 abnormal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000032683 aging Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013473 artificial intelligence Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003796 beauty Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002485 combustion reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005336 cracking Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000013013 elastic material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002708 enhancing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006698 induction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000014674 injury Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011900 installation process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052742 iron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007769 metal material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013021 overheating Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004417 polycarbonate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000515 polycarbonate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000004663 powder metallurgy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000717 retained effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000035882 stress Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012780 transparent material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001960 triggered effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004078 waterproofing Methods 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B60—VEHICLES IN GENERAL
- B60L—PROPULSION OF ELECTRICALLY-PROPELLED VEHICLES; SUPPLYING ELECTRIC POWER FOR AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT OF ELECTRICALLY-PROPELLED VEHICLES; ELECTRODYNAMIC BRAKE SYSTEMS FOR VEHICLES IN GENERAL; MAGNETIC SUSPENSION OR LEVITATION FOR VEHICLES; MONITORING OPERATING VARIABLES OF ELECTRICALLY-PROPELLED VEHICLES; ELECTRIC SAFETY DEVICES FOR ELECTRICALLY-PROPELLED VEHICLES
- B60L53/00—Methods of charging batteries, specially adapted for electric vehicles; Charging stations or on-board charging equipment therefor; Exchange of energy storage elements in electric vehicles
- B60L53/10—Methods of charging batteries, specially adapted for electric vehicles; Charging stations or on-board charging equipment therefor; Exchange of energy storage elements in electric vehicles characterised by the energy transfer between the charging station and the vehicle
- B60L53/14—Conductive energy transfer
- B60L53/16—Connectors, e.g. plugs or sockets, specially adapted for charging electric vehicles
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A01—AGRICULTURE; FORESTRY; ANIMAL HUSBANDRY; HUNTING; TRAPPING; FISHING
- A01D—HARVESTING; MOWING
- A01D34/00—Mowers; Mowing apparatus of harvesters
- A01D34/006—Control or measuring arrangements
- A01D34/008—Control or measuring arrangements for automated or remotely controlled operation
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A01—AGRICULTURE; FORESTRY; ANIMAL HUSBANDRY; HUNTING; TRAPPING; FISHING
- A01D—HARVESTING; MOWING
- A01D69/00—Driving mechanisms or parts thereof for harvesters or mowers
- A01D69/02—Driving mechanisms or parts thereof for harvesters or mowers electric
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H02—GENERATION; CONVERSION OR DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
- H02J—CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS OR SYSTEMS FOR SUPPLYING OR DISTRIBUTING ELECTRIC POWER; SYSTEMS FOR STORING ELECTRIC ENERGY
- H02J7/00—Circuit arrangements for charging or depolarising batteries or for supplying loads from batteries
- H02J7/0042—Circuit arrangements for charging or depolarising batteries or for supplying loads from batteries characterised by the mechanical construction
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H02—GENERATION; CONVERSION OR DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
- H02J—CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS OR SYSTEMS FOR SUPPLYING OR DISTRIBUTING ELECTRIC POWER; SYSTEMS FOR STORING ELECTRIC ENERGY
- H02J7/00—Circuit arrangements for charging or depolarising batteries or for supplying loads from batteries
- H02J7/0042—Circuit arrangements for charging or depolarising batteries or for supplying loads from batteries characterised by the mechanical construction
- H02J7/0045—Circuit arrangements for charging or depolarising batteries or for supplying loads from batteries characterised by the mechanical construction concerning the insertion or the connection of the batteries
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A01—AGRICULTURE; FORESTRY; ANIMAL HUSBANDRY; HUNTING; TRAPPING; FISHING
- A01D—HARVESTING; MOWING
- A01D2101/00—Lawn-mowers
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A01—AGRICULTURE; FORESTRY; ANIMAL HUSBANDRY; HUNTING; TRAPPING; FISHING
- A01D—HARVESTING; MOWING
- A01D34/00—Mowers; Mowing apparatus of harvesters
- A01D34/01—Mowers; Mowing apparatus of harvesters characterised by features relating to the type of cutting apparatus
- A01D34/412—Mowers; Mowing apparatus of harvesters characterised by features relating to the type of cutting apparatus having rotating cutters
- A01D34/63—Mowers; Mowing apparatus of harvesters characterised by features relating to the type of cutting apparatus having rotating cutters having cutters rotating about a vertical axis
- A01D34/76—Driving mechanisms for the cutters
- A01D34/78—Driving mechanisms for the cutters electric
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A01—AGRICULTURE; FORESTRY; ANIMAL HUSBANDRY; HUNTING; TRAPPING; FISHING
- A01D—HARVESTING; MOWING
- A01D34/00—Mowers; Mowing apparatus of harvesters
- A01D34/01—Mowers; Mowing apparatus of harvesters characterised by features relating to the type of cutting apparatus
- A01D34/412—Mowers; Mowing apparatus of harvesters characterised by features relating to the type of cutting apparatus having rotating cutters
- A01D34/63—Mowers; Mowing apparatus of harvesters characterised by features relating to the type of cutting apparatus having rotating cutters having cutters rotating about a vertical axis
- A01D34/81—Casings; Housings
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B60—VEHICLES IN GENERAL
- B60B—VEHICLE WHEELS; CASTORS; AXLES FOR WHEELS OR CASTORS; INCREASING WHEEL ADHESION
- B60B7/00—Wheel cover discs, rings, or the like, for ornamenting, protecting, venting, or obscuring, wholly or in part, the wheel body, rim, hub, or tyre sidewall, e.g. wheel cover discs, wheel cover discs with cooling fins
- B60B7/04—Wheel cover discs, rings, or the like, for ornamenting, protecting, venting, or obscuring, wholly or in part, the wheel body, rim, hub, or tyre sidewall, e.g. wheel cover discs, wheel cover discs with cooling fins built-up of several main parts
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B60—VEHICLES IN GENERAL
- B60B—VEHICLE WHEELS; CASTORS; AXLES FOR WHEELS OR CASTORS; INCREASING WHEEL ADHESION
- B60B7/00—Wheel cover discs, rings, or the like, for ornamenting, protecting, venting, or obscuring, wholly or in part, the wheel body, rim, hub, or tyre sidewall, e.g. wheel cover discs, wheel cover discs with cooling fins
- B60B7/18—Wheel cover discs, rings, or the like, for ornamenting, protecting, venting, or obscuring, wholly or in part, the wheel body, rim, hub, or tyre sidewall, e.g. wheel cover discs, wheel cover discs with cooling fins simulating spoked or wire wheel
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01V—GEOPHYSICS; GRAVITATIONAL MEASUREMENTS; DETECTING MASSES OR OBJECTS; TAGS
- G01V3/00—Electric or magnetic prospecting or detecting; Measuring magnetic field characteristics of the earth, e.g. declination, deviation
- G01V3/02—Electric or magnetic prospecting or detecting; Measuring magnetic field characteristics of the earth, e.g. declination, deviation operating with propagation of electric current
Definitions
- the disclosure relates to a robotic mower.
- a mower which may be a mechanical tool used for mowing lawns, vegetation, etc., may use an engine to rotate blades at a high speed, thereby increasing the efficiency of mowing and greatly reducing the working time and cost of a worker.
- An intelligent mower may bring the advantages of artificial intelligence and modernization into lawn mowing, and can be environmental-friendly and free-up worker’s hands. Therefore, Intelligent mowers become more and more favored by the market and consumers. However, when a conventional intelligent lawn mower is in use, its tires may slip very easily, resulting in the mower fails to work properly.
- An object of the disclosure is to provide a mower including a housing; a movable upper cover, arranged on the housing; and a cutting mechanism, disposed on the housing.
- the mower provided by the disclosure may be an intelligent/smart/robotic mower, which can automatically carry out a mowing operation, so that the user can be far away from a working/operation site, and therefore the harm to the user may be reduced, and the mowing efficiency can be improved.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a mower observed at a top viewing angle according to the disclosure.
- FIG. 2 is a schematic perspective view of the mower observed at a bottom viewing angle.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic side view of the mower after removing a main body flip cover and a movable upper cover.
- FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A of FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 5 is a schematic exploded view of an assisted height-adjustment assembly for blade carrier disc.
- FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the assisted height-adjustment assembly for blade carrier disc.
- FIG. 7 is a schematic top view of the assisted height-adjustment assembly for blade carrier disc.
- FIG. 8 is a schematic perspective view of the assisted height-adjustment assembly for blade carrier disc observed at a bottom viewing angle.
- FIG. 9 a is a schematic view of the assisted height-adjustment assembly for blade carrier disc in a state of lowering the blade carrier disc.
- FIG. 9 b is a schematic view of the assisted height-adjustment assembly for blade carrier disc in a state of lifting the blade carrier disc.
- FIG. 10 a is a schematic perspective view of a first blade carrier disc connector observed at a top viewing angle.
- FIG. 10 b is a schematic perspective view of the first blade carrier disc connector observed at a bottom viewing angle.
- FIG. 11 a is a schematic perspective view of a second blade carrier disc connector observed at a top viewing angle.
- FIG. 11 b is a schematic perspective view of the second blade carrier disc connector observed at a bottom viewing angle.
- FIG. 12 a is a schematic perspective view of a third blade carrier disc connector observed at a top viewing angle.
- FIG. 12 b is a schematic perspective view of the third blade carrier disc connector observed at a bottom viewing angle.
- FIG. 13 is a schematic perspective view of an assisted height-adjustment rod observed at a bottom viewing angle.
- FIG. 14 is a schematic enlarged view of the portion D in FIG. 4 .
- FIG. 15 a is a schematic view of lowering the height of the blade carrier disc in the mower.
- FIG. 15 b is a schematic view of adjusting the height of the blade carrier disc in the mower.
- FIG. 15 c is a schematic view of lifting the height of the blade carrier disc in the mower.
- FIG. 16 is a schematic perspective view of a suspension-lift detection assembly.
- FIG. 17 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the suspension-lift detection assembly.
- FIG. 18 is a schematic enlarged view of the portion B in FIG. 4 .
- FIG. 19 is a schematic enlarged view of the portion C in FIG. 4 .
- FIG. 20 is a schematic perspective view of an air filter hood.
- FIG. 21 is a schematic top view of the air filter hood.
- FIG. 22 is a schematic bottom view of the air filter hood.
- FIG. 23 is a schematic front view of the air filter hood.
- FIG. 24 is a schematic perspective view of an airtight nozzle.
- FIG. 25 is a schematic top view of the airtight nozzle.
- FIG. 26 is a schematic bottom view of the airtight nozzle.
- FIG. 27 is a schematic front view of the airtight nozzle.
- FIG. 28 is a schematic perspective view of the mower in which a walking wheel is exploded/disassembled.
- FIG. 29 is a schematic exploded view of the walking wheel.
- FIG. 30 is a schematic perspective view of a wheel cover trim observed at a front viewing angle.
- FIG. 31 is a schematic front view of a rear side of the wheel cover trim.
- FIG. 32 is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E in FIG. 31 .
- FIG. 33 is a schematic perspective view of an inner side of a wheel cover.
- FIG. 34 is a schematic front view of an outer side of the wheel cover.
- FIG. 35 is a schematic perspective view of an inner side of a wheel hub.
- FIG. 36 is a schematic perspective view of an outer side of the wheel hub.
- FIG. 37 is a schematic front view of the outer side of the wheel hub.
- FIG. 38 is a schematic assembling diagram of a fastening member.
- FIG. 39 is a schematic assembling diagram of a positioning member.
- FIG. 40 is a schematic perspective view of a lower casing and a combination device of the mower of the disclosure.
- FIG. 41 is a schematic exploded view of the lower casing and the combination device in FIG. 40 .
- FIG. 42 is a schematic enlarged view of the circle portion in FIG. 41 .
- FIG. 43 is a schematic perspective view of the lower casing in FIG. 41 .
- FIG. 44 is a schematic perspective view of the combination device in FIG. 41 .
- FIG. 45 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the combination device in FIG. 44 after removing a support wheel.
- FIG. 46 is a schematic bottom view of a charging interface assembly and a support wheel mounting seat in FIG. 44 .
- FIG. 47 is a schematic perspective view of the charging interface assembly and the support wheel mounting seat in FIG. 44 .
- FIG. 48 is a schematic perspective view of a wheel assembly of the discourse after removing the support wheel mounting seat.
- FIG. 49 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the wheel assembly in FIG. 48 after removing the support wheel mounting seat.
- FIG. 50 is a schematic perspective view of a first half-wheel in FIG. 49 .
- FIG. 51 is a schematic perspective view of a second half-wheel in FIG. 49 .
- FIG. 52 is a schematic structural view of an embodiment of a planetary gearbox of the disclosure.
- FIG. 53 is a schematic structural exploded view of the planetary gearbox in FIG. 52 .
- FIG. 54 is a schematic partial structural view of the planetary gearbox in FIG. 53 .
- FIG. 55 is a schematic perspective view of a blade carrier disc assembly of the disclosure.
- FIG. 56 is a schematic perspective view of the blade carrier disc assembly in FIG. 55 from another viewing angle.
- FIG. 57 is a schematic perspective view of the blade carrier disc.
- FIG. 58 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the blade carrier disc assembly in FIG. 56 .
- FIG. 59 is a schematic plan view of a cross-section of the blade carrier disc assembly in FIG. 58 .
- FIG. 60 is a schematic perspective view of a housing and a height-adjustment mechanism of the mower of the disclosure.
- FIG. 61 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the height-adjustment mechanism and the housing in FIG. 60 .
- FIG. 62 is a schematic top view of the housing of the mower.
- FIG. 63 is a schematic top view of the mower of the disclosure after removing an upper casing and an upper cover.
- FIG. 64 is a schematic partial enlarged view of the circle portion in FIG. 63 .
- FIG. 65 is a schematic perspective structural view of bases and an adjusting mechanism after being assembled.
- FIG. 66 is a schematic perspective structural view of a lower base and the adjusting mechanism after being assembled.
- FIG. 67 is a schematic perspective view of the adjusting mechanism and the cutting mechanism after being assembled.
- FIG. 68 is a schematic perspective structural view of a resilient guide member.
- FIG. 69 is a schematic perspective structural view of the resilient guide member in FIG. 68 from another viewing angle.
- FIG. 70 is a schematic cut-away view of the resilient guide member in FIG. 68 .
- FIG. 71 is a schematic perspective structural view of a second embodiment of a resilient guide member.
- FIG. 72 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a mower employing the resilient guide member in FIG. 71 .
- FIG. 73 is a schematic structural view of a first charging assembly of the disclosure.
- FIG. 74 is a schematic structural view of a first resilient terminal of the disclosure.
- FIG. 75 is a schematic structural view of a second charging assembly of the disclosure.
- FIG. 76 is a schematic structural view of a third resilient terminal of the disclosure.
- FIG. 77 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second charging assembly of the disclosure.
- FIG. 78 is a schematic structural view of a first fixing buckle of the disclosure.
- FIG. 79 is a schematic first process diagram of using the first charging assembly and the second charging assembly of the disclosure.
- FIG. 80 is a schematic second process diagram of using the first charging assembly and the second charging assembly of the disclosure.
- FIG. 81 is a schematic perspective exploded view of a mower.
- FIG. 82 is a cut-away view of the mower.
- FIG. 83 is a cut-away view of the mower from another viewing angle.
- FIG. 84 is a schematic perspective structural view of a support column.
- FIG. 85 is a schematic perspective exploded view of the support column in FIG. 84 .
- FIG. 86 is a schematic structural view of a mower.
- FIG. 87 is a schematic front view of a first casing.
- FIG. 88 a is a schematic perspective structural view of the first casing.
- FIG. 88 b is a schematic perspective structural view of the first casing from another viewing angle.
- FIG. 89 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first casing in FIG. 88 b taken along the direction of A-A.
- FIG. 90 is a schematic structural view of a second casing.
- FIG. 91 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second casing in FIG. 90 taken along the direction of B-B.
- FIG. 92 is a schematic perspective partial view of a housing of the disclosure.
- FIG. 93 is a schematic enlarged view of the portion A in FIG. 92 .
- FIG. 94 is a schematic partial enlarged view of a main body of the disclosure.
- FIG. 95 is a schematic partial enlarged view of a rear cover of the disclosure.
- FIG. 96 is a schematic perspective view of a shaft pin of the disclosure.
- FIG. 97 is a schematic structural view of lifting detection device of a mower of the disclosure, wherein the lifting detection device is located between a main body and a chassis.
- FIG. 98 is a schematic perspective exploded view of the lifting detection device of the mower of the disclosure.
- FIG. 99 is a schematic perspective exploded view of the lifting detection device of the mower of the disclosure from another viewing angle.
- FIG. 100 is a schematic cross-sectional structural view of the lifting detection device of the mower in a normal working state of the disclosure.
- FIG. 101 is a schematic cross-sectional structural view of the lifting detection device of the mower in a lifted state of the disclosure.
- FIG. 102 is a schematic cut-away structural view of the mower of the disclosure.
- FIG. 103 is a schematic perspective view of a suspension device in FIG. 102 .
- FIG. 104 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the suspension device in FIG. 103 taken along the direction of A-A.
- FIG. 105 is a schematic perspective partial structural view of the suspension device in FIG. 103 .
- FIG. 106 is a schematic exploded view of FIG. 105 .
- FIG. 107 is a schematic perspective view of a first support column in FIG. 106 .
- FIG. 108 is a schematic perspective view of a fixing frame of the suspension device in FIG. 103 .
- FIG. 109 is a schematic perspective view of the fixing frame in FIG. 108 from another viewing angel.
- FIG. 110 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the fixing frame in FIG. 108 .
- FIG. 111 is a schematic view of the mower from another viewing angle.
- FIG. 112 is a schematic exploded view of a magnet fixing structure of the disclosure.
- FIG. 113 is a schematic cross-sectional structural view of a housing of the mower.
- FIG. 114 is a schematic partial enlarged view of the portion A in FIG. 113 .
- FIG. 115 is a schematic structural view of a collision sensor of the disclosure.
- FIG. 116 is a schematic perspective view of an intelligent mower according to an embodiment of the disclosure.
- FIG. 117 is a schematic perspective view of a connection device of the intelligent mower according to the embodiment of the disclosure.
- FIG. 118 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the connection device in FIG. 117 , wherein a locking member of the connection device is at a releasing position.
- FIG. 119 is similar to FIG. 118 , but the locking member is at a locking position.
- FIG. 120 is a schematic perspective view of a mounting base of the connection device.
- FIG. 121 is another schematic perspective view of the mounting base, showing a structure of its bottom.
- FIG. 122 is a schematic perspective view of the locking member of the connection device.
- FIG. 123 is another schematic perspective view of the locking member, showing a structure of its bottom.
- FIG. 124 is a schematic perspective view of a bottom plate of the connection device.
- FIG. 125 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the bottom plate.
- FIG. 126 is a schematic structural view of a switch of the disclosure in a switched-on state.
- FIG. 127 is a schematic cross-sectional structural view of the switch of the disclosure taken along the line A-A in FIG. 126 .
- FIG. 128 is a schematic structural view of the switch of the disclosure in a switched-off state.
- FIG. 129 is a schematic cross-sectional structural view of the switch of the disclosure taken along the line A-A in FIG. 128 .
- FIG. 130 is a schematic perspective assembled view of a charging station system according to an embodiment of the disclosure.
- FIG. 131 is another schematic perspective view of the charging station system in FIG. 10 , wherein a charging station and a ceiling are separated from each other.
- FIG. 132 is a schematic perspective exploded view of the ceiling of the charging station system in FIG. 131 .
- FIG. 133 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the charging station system of the disclosure taken along the direction A-A in FIG. 130 .
- FIG. 134 is a schematic perspective assembled view of the charging station system in FIG. 130 from another viewing angle, wherein the ceiling is in an opened state.
- FIG. 135 is a schematic exploded view of a safety switch of the disclosure in a first position.
- FIG. 136 is a schematic top view of the safety switch of the disclosure.
- FIG. 137 is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along the direction A-A in FIG. 136 .
- FIG. 138 is a schematic top view of the safety switch of the disclosure in a second position.
- FIG. 139 is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along the direction B-B in FIG. 138 .
- FIG. 140 is a schematic perspective structural view of a light guide member of the disclosure.
- FIG. 141 is a schematic perspective structural view of the light guide member in FIG. 140 from another viewing angle.
- FIG. 142 is a schematic exploded structural view of the light guide member in FIG. 140 .
- FIG. 143 is a schematic structural dissembled view of the garden tool.
- FIG. 144 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of a light guide post installed on the base.
- FIG. 145 is a schematic structural view of an upper casing in FIG. 144 .
- FIG. 146 is a schematic partial enlarged view of the upper casing in FIG. 144 from another viewing angle.
- FIG. 147 is a schematic perspective structural view of a light guide member of the disclosure.
- FIG. 148 is a schematic perspective structural view of the light guide member in FIG. 148 from another viewing angle.
- FIG. 149 is a schematic perspective structural view of a charging device of the disclosure.
- FIG. 150 is a schematic exploded view of the light guide member and a charging part.
- FIG. 151 is a schematic perspective structural view of the charging part.
- FIG. 152 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the light guide member being installed on the charging part.
- an intelligent mower (“mower”) is provided.
- the mower can include, among other parts and components, a housing 1 , a movable upper cover 2 positioned above the housing 1 , and a control assembly disposed within the housing 1 .
- the movable upper cover 2 can include, among other parts and components, a main body flip cover 4 disposed thereon.
- the control assembly may be configured (i.e., structured and arranged) to control the mower during operation.
- the control assembly may include, among other components, a single-chip microcomputer or a processor module, and can perform various functionalities with corresponding driving circuits.
- the mower can include a cutting mechanism 3 for cutting grass.
- the cutting mechanism 3 can include a prime mover (also referred to as prime motor) 36 , a blade carrier disc 5 , and an assisted height-adjustment assembly 37 for the blade carrier disc 5 .
- the prime mover 36 is disposed in the housing 1 and configured for driving the rotation of the blade carrier disc 5 .
- the blade carrier disc 5 is disposed at the bottom of the assisted height-adjustment assembly 37 and configured for mounting/installing blades 6 (i.e., having blade mounting positions).
- the assisted height-adjustment assembly 37 is configured for adjusting a height of the blade carrier disc 5 .
- the assisted height-adjustment assembly 37 for the blade carrier disc is, without limitation, tightly installed on an output shaft of the prime mover 36 .
- a bottom surface of the assisted height-adjustment assembly 37 can be attached to the blade carrier disk 5 , which may be fitted with at least one blade 6 for cutting grass.
- the number/amount of the blades 6 may be three, and the three blades 6 may be evenly arranged/distributed on a circumference of the blade carrier disc 5 . In other embodiments, the number of the blades 6 may be adjusted as required.
- a protective cover 58 can be arranged under the blade carrier disc 5 to prevent accidental touching of the blades 6 .
- the assisted height-adjustment assembly 37 for the blade carrier disc can include an adjusting element 50 and at least two blade carrier disc connectors, each of which can be sequentially and movably sleeved on and off a shaft.
- a first blade carrier disc connector 47 is located at the inner side and can be fixedly installed on the output shaft of the prime mover 36 .
- a second blade carrier disc connector 57 is located at the outer side and configured for connecting to the blade carrier disc 5 .
- An adjusting element 50 is configured for moving the second blade carrier disc connector 57 to along a surface of the first blade carrier disc connector 47 when adjusting the height of the blade carrier disc 5 .
- the number/amount of the blade carrier disc connectors may be at least two.
- the second blade carrier dis connector 57 is directly moving along the sleeve (or the outer surface) of the first blade carrier disc connector 47 .
- the additional blade carrier disc connector(s) e.g., a third blade carrier disc connector, can be located between the first blade carrier disc connector and the second blade carrier disc connector, and can move along the sleeves (inner or outer surfaces) of the two connectors.
- FIG. 7 an embodiment with three blade carrier disc connectors is illustrated, while the number of the blade carrier disc connectors is not limiting.
- the first blade carrier disc connector 47 can include a hollow first body 61 , and at least one first guide groove 62 on the outer side surface of the first body 61 .
- the first body 61 is closely attached to the output shaft of the prime mover 36 , so that power from the prime mover 36 can be transferred to other blade carrier disc connector(s) adjacent to the first blade carrier disk connector 47 via the at least one first guide groove 62 .
- the first body 61 can be hollow-in-the-center and cylindrical, with openings both ends to allow the output shaft of the prime mover 36 to be inserted.
- the first body 61 may also be equipped with an assisted height-adjustment rod.
- the illustrated first guide grooves 62 are evenly distributed on the outer surface of the first body 61 , each of the first guide grooves 62 each may have the same height as the first body 61 , meaning the first guide grooves 62 are full grooves.
- one end of the first body 61 may have at least one first mounting hole 63 , and the at least one first mounting hole 63 is configured for mounting a first stopper 55 .
- the first stopper 55 may be, without limitation, a screw or a bolt, and may be mounted/installed into the first mounting hole 63 by threads.
- One end (wider head) of the first stopper 55 may be wider than the other end, and may extend out of the edge of the first guide groove to limit/restrict another blade carrier disc connector from sliding out. That is, the wider end of the first stopper 55 may prevent the blade carrier disc connector adjacent to the first blade carrier disc connector from detaching or sliding away from the first blade carrier disc connector.
- the wide head of the first stopper 55 when there are two blade carrier disc connectors, the wide head of the first stopper 55 is configured to limit/align two end surfaces of the second blade carrier disc connector and the first blade carrier disc connector; when there are at least three blade carrier disc connectors, the wide head of the first stopper 55 is configured to limit/align the end surfaces of the third blade carrier disc connector from and the first blade carrier disc connector 47 .
- the second blade carrier disc connector 57 can include a hollow second body 64 and at least one protruded second guide portion 65 on the inner side surface of the second body 64 .
- An open end 68 is located at one end of the second body 64 and configured for inserting an inner blade carrier disc connector into.
- a closed end 69 is located at the other end of the second body 64 and configured for mounting an adjusting element 50 .
- the second guide portions 65 as illustrated are matched with the guide grooves of the inner blade carrier disc connector, so the second blade carrier disc connector 57 can slide along the inserted inner blade carrier disc connector.
- the second body 64 may be hollow and cylindrical, with one of its ends opened (i.e., open end 68 ), so as to act as a sleeve to allow another blade carrier disc connector (e.g., the first blade carrier disc connector or the third blade carrier disc connector) to be inserted into.
- the other end of the second body 64 is partially closed (i.e., closed end 69 ), and configured for mounting the blade carrier disc and an adjustment end of the assisted height-adjustment rod.
- the second guide portions 65 as illustrated are evenly distributed on the inner surface of the second body 64 .
- the second guide portions 65 include at least one second long-protrusion 66 and at least one short-protrusion 67 in an alternately arranged manner.
- a height of the second long-protrusion 66 is substantially equal to that of the second body 64 .
- the second short-protrusion 67 can include a height smaller than that of the second body 64 , and is disposed near the open end 68 of the second body 64 .
- the second short-protrusion 67 may operate with the corresponding stopper to prevent the second blade carrier disc connector from detaching away from the third blade carrier disc connector or the first blade carrier disc connector.
- the closed end of the second body 64 is disposed with at least one blade carrier disc mounting hole 60 for attaching the blade carrier disc 5 via at least one fastener.
- the at least one blade carrier disc mounting hole 60 is located at or near the bottom of the second long-protrusions 66 .
- At least one third blade carrier disc connector 48 may be inserted between the first blade carrier disc connector 47 and the second blade carrier disc connector 57 .
- the number of the blade carrier disc connectors in the assisted height-adjustment assembly for the blade carrier disc is three.
- the number of the blade carrier disc connectors in the assisted height-adjustment assembly for the blade carrier disc becomes four, and the third blade carrier disc connectors may have the same structure but different dimensions, so as to be sequentially and movably inserted-onto one another from inside to outside.
- the third blade carrier disc connector 48 can include a hollow third body 72 a and at least one protruded third guide portion 74 which is disposed on the inner side surface of the third body 72 a and matched with the guide groove(s) of the internally adjacent blade carrier disc connector.
- the third blade carrier disk connector may also have at least one third guide groove 72 that is disposed on the outer side of the third body 72 a and matched with the guide portion(s) of the externally adjacent blade carrier disc connector.
- the third body 72 a is hollow and cylindrical, with its two ends opened so as to allow the inner blade carrier disc connector to be inserted.
- the third guide grooves 72 as illustrated are evenly distributed on the external side surface of the third body 72 a , and each may have a height same as that of the third body 72 a (i.e., the third guide grooves 72 are through grooves).
- the third guide portions 74 as illustrated are evenly distributed on the inner side surface of the third body 72 a .
- the third guide portions 74 may include at least one third long-protrusion 76 and at least one third short-protrusion 75 in an alternately arranged manner.
- the at least one third long-protrusion 76 each can include a height substantially the same as that of the third body 72 a .
- the at least one third short-protrusion 75 each can include a height smaller than that of the third body 72 a and is located near the bottom end of the third body 72 a , so it can operate with a corresponding stopper(s) to prevent the second blade carrier disc connector or other third blade carrier disc connector from detaching away from the third blade carrier disc connector.
- the at least one third guide portion and the at least one third guide groove may correspond to each other one to one, and are oppositely arranged on the inner and outer side surfaces of the third body.
- the at least one third guide portion and the at least one third guide groove can also be arranged staggered, as long as the assembling requirement is met.
- a lower end of the third body 72 a is provided with at least one third mounting hole 73 for mounting with a third stopper(s) 58 .
- the third mounting holes 73 as illustrated are located at the bottom of the third long-protrusions 75 .
- the third stopper 58 may be, without limiting, a screw or a bolt, can include a structure similar to or different from that of the first stopper, and can be installed into the third mounting hole 73 via threads.
- a wide head 59 of the third stopper 58 is protruded into the groove end of the third guide groove 72 , so as to restrict the guide portion of the adjacent blade carrier disc connector from sliding out, i.e., restricting the blade carrier disc connector externally adjacent to the third blade carrier disc connector from detaching away.
- the wide head 56 of the first stopper 55 is configured to prevent the first blade carrier disc connector 47 from detaching from the third blade carrier disc connector 48 .
- the wide head 59 of the third stopper 58 is configured to prevent the second blade carrier disc connector 57 from detaching away from the third blade carrier disc connector 48 .
- the wide head 59 of the third stopper 58 is configured to revent the blade carrier disc connector located at the outer side of the third blade carrier disc connector from detaching away from the third blade carrier disc connector.
- the adjusting element 50 can include an assisted height-adjustment rod 51 , an install end connecting to the output shaft of the prime mover 36 , and an adjust end 53 passing through the blade carrier disc connectors threadedly connected with the blade carrier disc 5 .
- the blade carrier disc 5 drives the second blade carrier disc connector 57 to rotate.
- the closed end 69 of the second body may include a through hole 70 to allow the blade carrier disc connector suitable for the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 to pass therethrough.
- the closed end 69 of the second body may be formed with other structural holes 71 for assembling, observation or weight reduction.
- the install end 52 of the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 is snap-fitted into the first body 61 using the first stoppers 55 .
- the adjust end 53 of the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 is formed with an adjust groove 54 .
- the blade carrier disc 5 is provided with a threaded through hole 58 suitable for movement via the adjust end 53 .
- a spring washer 49 may be added between the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 and the output shaft of the prime mover 36 .
- a process to adjust the height of the blade carrier disc by the assisted height-adjustment assembly for the blade carrier disc can be summarized in the following two cases.
- Other possible implementations of adjusting the height of the blade carrier disc by the assisted height-adjustment assembly for the blade carrier disc should also be within the protection scope of the application.
- Step 1 The process of adjusting the height of the blade carrier disc with two blade carrier disc connectors is as follows: manually or by other means (such as using a screwdriver or other tool) to snap into the adjust groove 54 , and rotate the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 so that the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 drives the blade carrier disc to up or down.
- the blade carrier disc drives the second blade carrier disc connector to move along the first blade carrier disc connector, thereby achieving the height adjustment action of the blade carrier disc. Since the adjustment process of the blade carrier disc and the movement process of the blade carrier disc connectors are relatively simple, they are not illustrated in the drawings.
- Step 2 The process of adjusting the height of the blade carrier disc with three or more blade carrier disc connectors are similar. Taking three blade carrier disc connectors as an example, to perform the height adjustment action of the blade carrier disc, a specific adjustment process is illustrated in FIG. 10 and FIG. 10 b , or FIG. 15 a through FIG. 15 c . In this process, the first blade carrier disc connector 47 , the third blade carrier disc connector 48 , and the second blade carrier disc connector 57 are attached in the above order from inside to outside. To adjust the height of the blade carrier disc, in the first operation (1), first assuming that the cutter head 5 is initially at the lowest possible height (as shown in FIG.
- the first stoppers 55 are mounted into the first mounting holes 63 , the wide heads 56 of the first stoppers 55 protrude into the first guide grooves 62 and touch against the bottoms of the third short-protrusions 75 so as to prevent the third blade carrier disc connector from detaching away from the first blade carrier disc connector.
- the wide heads 56 of the first stoppers 55 also protrude into the hollow portion of the first body 61 and touch against the bottom of the install end 52 of the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 so as to prevent the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 from detaching away from the first blade carrier disc connector 47 .
- the third stoppers 58 are installed into the third mounting holes 73 , and the wide heads 59 of the third stoppers 58 protrude into the third guide grooves 72 and touch against the bottoms of the second short-protrusions 67 so as to prevent the second blade carrier disc connector 57 from detaching away from the third blade carrier disc connector 48 .
- the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 is rotated in a manner similar to the above-mentioned way, and the rotation of the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 drives the blade carrier disc 5 to move upward.
- the blade carrier disc 5 pushes the second blade carrier disc connector 57 to move along the side surface of the third blade carrier disc connector, so as to increase the height of the blade carrier disc from the ground.
- the second blade carrier disc connector 57 substantially contains the third blade carrier disc connector 48 .
- the second blade carrier disc connector 57 continues to move upwardly, the third blade carrier disc connector 48 is pushed by the second blade carrier disc connector 57 to move along the side surface of the first blade carrier disc connector 47 (as shown in FIG. 15 b ), so that the height of the blade carrier disc from the ground is further increased until the third blade carrier disc connector 48 is substantially contain the first blade carrier disc connector 47 .
- the first blade carrier disc connector 47 , the third blade carrier disc connector 48 , and the second blade carrier disc connector 57 are completely sleeved one after another in this order from inside to outside, with the closed end of the second blade carrier disc connector 57 touching against the bottom of the first blade carrier disc connector 47 , and the blade carrier disc 5 being adjusted to the highest position.
- the mower can further include a detecting mechanism arranged between the housing 1 and the movable upper cover 2 and configured for detecting a relative displacement between the movable upper cover 2 and the housing 1 .
- the control assembly is suitable for adjusting the working state of the mower based on the above detecting mechanism.
- the detecting mechanism can include at least one suspension-lift detection assembly 20 disposed on the housing 1 and configured for detecting a relative displacement between the movable upper cover 2 and the housing 1 in the vertical direction, and at least one collision detection assembly 93 disposed on the housing 1 and configured for detecting a relative displacement between the movable upper cover 2 and the housing in the horizontal direction.
- the control assembly is suitable for adjusting the working state of the mower according to detection signals of the at least one suspension-lift detection assembly 20 and the at least one collision detection assembly 93 .
- the control assembly may include a processor, various control circuits, sensing units, and corresponding driving circuits, etc., can detect changes in current signals, and can control shutdown or operation of the mower.
- the mower may include two suspension-lift detection assemblies 20 respectively arranged at the first mounting locations 16 of the movable upper cover 2 in diagonal positions of the housing 1 .
- the mover may include four suspension-lift detection assemblies 20 that are respectively arranged at the first mounting locations of the movable upper cover 2 in corners of the housing 1 .
- the mover may include two collision detection assemblies 93 respectively arranged at the second mounting locations 17 of the movable upper cover 2 in two ends of the housing 1 .
- the number of the suspension-lift detection assembly and the number of the collision detection assembly can also be adjusted according to machine models and structural requirements, and at the same time, their installation positions on the housing can be changed correspondingly.
- the suspension-lift detection assembly 20 can include a suspension ball head 80 fixed on the movable upper cover of the mower; a lifting stopper 86 , arranged below and separated from the suspension ball head 80 ; a suspension spring 87 with two ends thereof fixedly connected to the suspension ball head 80 and the lifting stopper 86 respectively; and a signal trigger module 88 arranged at the bottom of the lifting stopper 86 .
- the suspension ball head 80 occurs/generates an upward displacement
- the suspension spring 87 pulls the lifting stopper 86 to move upward, causing the signal trigger module 88 to send/issue a detection signal.
- a side surface of the suspension ball head 80 is disposed with a ball joint 89 , thereby allowing the suspension ball head 80 to be fixed onto the movable upper cover 2 of the mower by a snap-fit structure.
- the two ends of the suspension spring 87 are respectively connected with the suspension ball head 80 and the lifting stopper 86 through threads.
- the suspension ball head 80 is driven to move upward together.
- the suspension spring 87 would pull the lifting stopper 86 to move upward, causing the signal trigger module 88 to issue a detection signal.
- a limiting groove 90 is provided at the top of the suspension ball head 80 and used in conjunction with a limiting post on the movable upper cover, so as to avoid horizontal shaking between the suspension ball head and the movable upper cover.
- the suspension spring is a spring with relatively high rigidity, that cannot easily be deformed in the vertical direction. It can not only meet the requirement of the suspension spring 87 pulling the lifting stopper 86 to move upward, but also make the suspension spring to play a role of horizontal damping as well as allow a certain relative displacement between the suspension ball head and the lifting stopper in the horizontal direction. In this way the suspension-lift detection assembly will not be damaged or generate a false alarm when the mower collides.
- the suspension spring may be fixedly connected to the suspension ball head by means of buckle or pin lock.
- the signal trigger module 88 can include a first magnetic block 88 a fixed on the lower end of the lifting stopper 86 , a first lifting detection board 88 b located below the lifting stopper 86 , and a first reed switch 91 disposed on the first lifting detection board 88 b .
- the lifting stopper 86 moves upward, the first magnetic block 88 a leaves away from the first reed switch 91 , the first reed switch 91 is opened or closed to change the current signal on the first lifting detection board 88 b , and the changed current signal may trigger the sending of the detection signal.
- the first lifting detection board and a second lifting detection board are, without limiting, Hall boards, and are electrically connected to the control assembly.
- the first reed switch 91 is located directly below the first magnetic block 88 a .
- the suspension-lift detection assembly can further include a suspension-fixing corrugated sleeve 81 sleeved onto the outer side of the suspension spring 87 .
- a suspension-fixing corrugated sleeve 81 sleeved onto the outer side of the suspension spring 87 .
- One end of the suspension-fixing corrugated sleeve 81 is snapped to the suspension ball head 80 , and the other end is fixedly installed onto the housing 1 of the mower by a suspension fixing frame 82 .
- the suspension-fixing corrugated sleeve 81 is stretched, which can not only produce a restoring tension, but also play the role of sealing protection.
- the suspension-lift detection assembly 20 of the mower can further include a suspension restoring spring 84 sleeved on the outer side of the lifting stopper 86 .
- Two ends of the suspension restoring spring 84 respectively touch against the bottoms of the suspension fixing frame 82 and the lifting stopper 86 .
- the lifting stopper 86 may be hollow rod-shaped, with its sides having an engaging groove 83 .
- the signal trigger module 88 can further include a magnet bracket 92 located in the hollow interior of the lifting stopper 86 .
- the magnet bracket 92 is suspended in the engaging groove 83 of the lifting stopper.
- the first magnetic block 88 a is fixed on the bottom of the magnet bracket 92 , so as to ensure that it is also fixed at the hollow bottom end of the lifting stopper 86 .
- the bottom of the lifting stopper 86 is disposed with an outwardly extending lifting stopper flange 85 , and an outer diameter of the lifting stopper flange 85 is greater than an inner diameter of the suspension fixing frame 82 , so that the lifting stopper flange 85 can limit a vertical stroke of the first magnetic block 88 a , thereby ensuring the overall stability of the suspension-lift detection assembly.
- the collision detection assembly 93 can include a second magnetic block 94 arranged on the movable upper cover 2 ; a second reed switch 95 arranged on the housing 1 and below the second magnetic block 94 ; and a second lifting detection board 96 arranged between the second magnetic block 94 and the second reed switch 95 .
- the second magnetic block 94 approaches or leaves away from the second reed switch 95 .
- the second lifting detection board 96 is electrically connected to the control assembly and sends the current signal to the control assembly as a detection signal.
- the second reed switch 95 is arranged just below the second magnetic block 94 .
- the collision detection assembly 93 can further include a magnetic-block support 97 fixed on the movable upper cover 2 .
- the magnetic-block support 97 is magnetic sheet, such as an iron sheet for attracting the second magnetic block 94 , so as to leave a certain gap between the second magnetic block 94 and the second reed switch 95 .
- the housing 1 can further include an internally sealed case 18 ; a function hole or a function mounting location (covered by an air filter hood 19 , not shown) formed on the case 18 and interconnecting the interior and exterior of the case 18 ; and a functional module selectively detachably mounted on the function hole to detect a sealing state of the casing or maintain a balance of air pressure between inside and outside of the casing.
- the air filter hood 19 can include a ventilation base 98 mounted at the function hole for ventilation, and can include air filter hood mounting portions 100 extending outwardly from the ventilation base 98 .
- the ventilation base 98 is disposed with corresponding vent holes 99 and may be made of a breathable material to achieve the purpose of breathability.
- the air filter hood mounting portions 100 may be two air filter hood mounting portions 100 respectively extend from the ventilation base 98 in two opposing directions, and thus symmetrically arranged at two sides of the ventilation base 98 .
- the air filter hood mounting portions 100 are mechanically fixed onto the case 18 through fasteners.
- the fasteners can be suitable parts such as, without limiting, screws, bolts or engaging members.
- the air filter hood mounting portions 100 are provided with corresponding air filter hood mounting holes 750 , so that the air filter hood mounting portions 100 are mechanically fixed onto the case 18 by screws.
- an inner side of the air filter hood 19 (i.e., a side near the casing) is further provided with raised columns 102 .
- the raised columns 102 are located at edges of the air filter hood mounting portions 100 and matched with holes on the casing so as to positionally restrict the air filter hood 19 during installation.
- Each of the air filter hood mounting portions 100 is provided with a slope on the outside of the air filter hood 19 (i.e., the side facing away from the casing). After the air filter hood 19 is installed, the ventilation base 98 gradually protrudes from the casing.
- the airtight nozzle 108 can include a body part 109 installed at the function hole and mounting parts 110 extending outwards from the body part 109 .
- Two mounting parts 110 may respectively extend from the body part 109 in two opposing directions and thus are symmetrically arranged on two sides of the body part.
- an outer side (i.e., a side facing away from the casing) of the body part 109 is provided with a conduct pipe 111 protrudes outwardly, and the conduct pipe 111 is suitable for connecting with the barometer to detect air tightness of the mower. Extending directions of the mounting parts 110 are perpendicular to an extending direction of the conduct pipe 111 .
- the mounting parts 110 and the case 18 are mechanically fixed by fasteners (not shown), and the fasteners may be suitable parts such as, without limiting, screws or bolts.
- the mounting parts 110 are provided with corresponding mounting holes 112 , and the mounting parts 110 and mechanically fixed onto the case 18 by screws.
- the outer side (i.e., a side facing away from the casing) of each of the mounting parts 110 is provided with a slope, and after the airtight nozzle 108 is installed, the body part 109 gradually protrudes from the casing.
- different functional modules can be installed at the function hole manually or by other means to facilitate the detection of the sealing state or the air pressure balance inside and outside of the case 18 , for meeting the functional requirements of the mower in different working conditions.
- the mower uses the air filter hood 19 to balance the air pressure inside and outside of the case 18 of the mower.
- the air filter hood 19 may be replaced by the airtight nozzle 108 , a rubber sleeve is sheathed on the conduct pipe 111 of the airtight nozzle 108 , and a barometer is used to check whether an upper limit of inflation air pressure and a pressure holding capacity meet the standards, thus reliability of the seal is checked.
- the mower can further include a walking/travelling assembly 8 configured for driving the mower to move forward.
- the walking assembly 8 may include at least one walking wheel 9 (i.e., driving wheel) disposed on the housing 1 ; and at least one universal wheel 10 disposed on the housing 1 .
- the walking wheel 9 can include a wheel hub 178 , a wheel cover 202 disposed on the wheel hub 178 , and a wheel cover trim 203 detachably mounted on the wheel cover 202 .
- the wheel cover 202 and the wheel hub 178 are detachably assembled, and the wheel cover trim 203 is interposed between the wheel hub 178 and the wheel cover 202 .
- the wheel cover trim 203 is replaced, the wheel cover 202 is firstly removed from the wheel hub 178 , then a new wheel cover trim 203 is assembled on the wheel cover 202 . Finally, the wheel cover 202 and the wheel hub 178 are assembled together.
- the changing of the color of the walking wheel can be realized by replacing the wheel cover trim.
- the wheel cover trim 203 can include a middle portion 204 with multiple (i.e., more than one) protrusions 205 extending outward in the circumferential direction from the middle portion 204 .
- the protrusions 205 are embedded in corresponding wheel cover mounting holes 210 .
- the middle portion 204 has a ring-shaped body and coaxial with the wheel hub 178 and the wheel cover 202 .
- the protrusions 25 can include a decorative block 206 adapted to the wheel cover mounting hole 210 , and a flange 207 located on one side of the decorative block 206 and protruding from the decorative block 206 .
- the decorative block 206 is fitted into the corresponding wheel cover mounting hole 210 and exposed from the outer side of the wheel cover 201 .
- the flange 207 may touch against the periphery of the wheel cover mounting hole 210 .
- the rear side (i.e., a side near the wheel hub) of the wheel cover trim 203 is plane-shaped, and the front side (i.e., the side near the wheel cover) of the wheel cover trim 203 is protruded through the decorative block 206 so as to fit into the wheel cover mounting hole.
- the rear side of the decorative block 206 is formed with a weight reduction groove 208 .
- the front side of the decorative block 206 is provided with a color-setting groove, and the groove bottom of the color-setting groove is provided with a corresponding color plate 209 . Therefore, the color plate can be recessed in the color-setting groove to prevent the color plate from being worn and faded, thereby protecting the color plate.
- the color plate can be designed separately, or integrated with the color-setting groove to ensure consistence of color.
- multiple wheel cover mounting holes 210 are arranged in the circumferential direction of the wheel cover 202 and used to engage with the protrusions 205 of the wheel cover trim 203 .
- An edge of the inner protrusion 211 is disposed with a fitting head 212 for engaging with the wheel hub 178 .
- the inner protrusions 211 and the outer grooves 214 can adopt the same shape and structure design, or be designed with different shapes and structures, but they should not form through-holes, so as to ensure that the wheel cover is covered on the outer side of the walking wheel, and the internal structure of the walking wheel is sealed.
- the inner side (i.e., the side close to the housing) of the wheel hub 178 is flat to meet the overall assembling requirement of the mower.
- the outer side of the wheel hub 178 i.e., the side close to the wheel cover trim
- a wheel cover mounting location 217 for installing the wheel cover.
- multiple wheel hub fitting grooves 215 are provided in the wheel cover mounting location 217 .
- the wheel hub fitting grooves 215 are evenly distributed on the circumference of the wheel hub 178 and form fastening members together with the fitting heads 212 of the wheel cover 202 , so as to detachably install the wheel cover onto the wheel hub by the fastening members.
- the wheel cover 202 and the wheel hub 178 are positioned and installed by at least two asymmetrically arranged positioning members.
- the positioning members can include a positioning rod 213 arranged on the circumference of the wheel cover 202 , and include a wheel hub positioning hole 216 arranged on the circumference of the wheel hub 178 and matched with the positioning rod 213 .
- the machine body is provided with two walking wheels 9 located at two sides of the machine body respectively.
- the walking wheels 9 generally are arranged at the front of the machine body.
- the two walking wheels 9 are respectively driven by two drive motors. If rotation speeds of the drive motors are different, the mower may turn toward one direction; if the rotation speeds of the drive motors are the same, the mower may travel in a straight line; and if the rotation speeds of the drive motors are opposite, the mower may perform a turn-around at the same position.
- the disclosure provides a combination structure (or combination device).
- the combination structure can include a charging interface assembly 501 and a wheel assembly 502 .
- the charging interface assembly 501 is electrically connected to a charging circuit, and the wheel assembly 502 and the charging interface assembly 501 form an integrated molding structure.
- the case 18 is provided with a cover 503 covering the charging interface assembly 501 , and the cover 503 is matched with an outer contour of the charging interface assembly 501 .
- the case 18 is provided with a receiving part 504 for accommodating the combination structure, and the receiving part 504 is arranged at the front or bottom of the case 18 .
- the cover 503 is formed on the case 18 , and the receiving part 504 is below the cover 503 .
- the receiving part 504 is provided with a charging opening 505 and a mounting opening 506 at the front and bottom of the case 18 respectively, so as to facilitate the installation of the charging interface assembly 501 and the using of a charging connector to mate with the charging interface assembly 501 from the front.
- the case 18 is provided with a pair of first guiding pieces 507 located on both sides of the charging opening 505 in an oblique manner.
- the cover 503 is provided with a cylindrical first wire-through portion 508 .
- the charging interface assembly 501 can include a charging socket 509 , a charging interface 510 disposed on the charging socket 509 , charging terminals 511 , and a charging seal 512 .
- the charging terminals 511 include at least a pair of guiding pieces electrically connected to a charging circuit.
- the charging terminals 511 are installed on two sides of the charging socket 509 and extend into the charging interface 510 .
- the charging socket 509 can include a top wall 513 , opposite first and second side walls 514 , 515 , and a third side wall connecting the first and second side walls 514 , 515 .
- the first side wall 514 , the second side wall 515 , the third side wall 516 , and the top wall 513 together define the charging interface 510 .
- the charging terminals 511 are fixed on the charging socket 509 .
- Each of the charging terminals 511 include a connecting end 517 connected to a charging cable and a charging end 518 in contact with a charging connector.
- the charging interface 510 is arranged at the rear of the charging opening 505 .
- the charging socket 509 is disposed with a pair of second guiding pieces 519 located at the rear of the first guiding pieces 507 and arranged obliquely to guide the charging connector to connect into the charging interface 510 .
- a second wire-through portion 520 corresponding to the first wire-through portion 508 is disposed at the top of the charging socket 509 and connects with the charging interface 510 .
- the charging socket 509 is further disposed with a wire positioning groove 521 for connecting with the second wire-through portion 520 .
- the second wire-through portion 520 and the wire positioning groove 521 are illustratively located on the top wall 513 .
- the second wire-through portion 520 is cylindrical, and a notch 522 is formed on the second wire-through portion 520 .
- the wire positioning groove 521 connects with the second wire-through portion 520 through the notch 522 .
- the wire positioning groove 521 first extends to both sides of the charging socket 509 , and then extends a distance downward to connect with the charging interface 510 .
- the charging interface assembly 501 is provided with retainers 523 for fixing with the case 18 , and the retainers 523 are disposed on the charging socket 509 .
- the retainers 523 are a pair of resilient sheets respectively arranged at two sides of the charging socket 509 . Upper ends of the resilient sheets are connected with the charging socket 509 , and lower ends of the resilient sheets are free ends.
- the receiving part 504 is provided with sliding grooves 524 for receiving the resilient sheets, and bottoms of the sliding grooves 524 are provided with protrusions 525 that engage with the lower ends of the resilient sheets.
- the charging socket 509 When assembling, the charging socket 509 may be put upwards into the receiving part 504 along the sliding grooves 524 , and the resilient sheets may be resiliently deformed downwards in the process of extending. When being installed in place, the resilient sheets will restore and snap into the two protrusions 525 to prevent the charging socket 509 from moving downwards.
- the charging seal 512 are matched with both the second wire-through portion 520 and the first wire-through portion 508 , so as to lead the charging cable into the case 18 in a sealed manner.
- a part of the charging seal 512 matched with the first wire-through portion 508 is a threaded structure, another part of the charging seal 512 matched with the second wire-through portion 520 is formed with notches 526 .
- the charging seal 512 can include a hollow cylindrical shape.
- the charging seal 512 can include a first fixing part 527 installed on the second wire-through portion 520 , a second fixing part 528 fixed to the first wire-through portion 508 , and a connecting part 529 connecting the first fixing part 527 and the second fixing part 528 .
- An outer diameter of the connecting part 529 is greater than the outer diameters of the first fixing part 527 and the second fixing part 528 .
- the connecting part 529 is located between the second wire-through portion 520 and the first wire-through portion 508 and acts as a buffer. Two notches 530 are defined at the lower end of the first fixing part 527 .
- the notches 522 and the notches 530 are aligned with each other.
- An outer side of the second fixing part 527 is provided with threads to increase friction between the charging seal 512 and the case 18 .
- a top end of the second fixing part 527 is provided with two wire-through holes 531 for allowing the charging cable to pass through.
- One end of the charging cable is welded to the connecting end 517 .
- the other end of the charging cable enters the charging seal 512 through the wire positioning groove 521 , sequentially passes through the notches 522 and the notches 530 , and finally passes through the wire-through holes 531 and enters into the case 18 .
- the opening size of the wire-through hole 531 is set to be slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the charging cable, so that the charging cable fits tightly with the charging seal 512 in the wire-through hole 531 .
- the wheel assembly 502 can include, among other components, a wheel shaft 534 which the universal wheel 10 mounted to, a wheel shaft positioning assembly 535 , a sealing assembly 536 , and a support wheel mounting seat 537 .
- the support wheel mounting seat 537 and the charging interface assembly 501 form an integrated structure.
- the support wheel mounting base 537 and the charging socket 509 are an integrally-constructed structure (also referred to as one-piece structure). Please also refer to FIG.
- the support wheel mounting seat 537 is arranged behind the third side wall 516 , the support wheel mounting seat 537 is provided with a mounting hole 538 extending from top to bottom, and the wheel shaft 534 is fixed in the mounting hole 538 .
- the wheel shaft 534 extends upward into the mounting hole 538 and is fixed in the mounting hole 538 by two shaft sleeves 539 and fasteners 540 .
- the universal wheel 10 can include a first half-wheel 541 and a second half-wheel 542 .
- the first half-wheel 541 and the second half-wheel 542 are engaged with each other to form an accommodating cavity 543 .
- the wheel shaft 534 passes through the first half-wheel 541 and enters the accommodating cavity 543 .
- the accommodating cavity 543 can include a first fitting gap formed by the first half wheel 541 and the wheel shaft 534 , and a second fitting gap formed by the first half wheel 541 and the second half wheel 542 .
- the first fitting gap and the second fitting gap are respectively located on two sides of the accommodating cavity 543 .
- the first half-wheel 541 and the second half-wheel 542 are disk-shaped respectively.
- the first half-wheel 541 is provided with a first cylindrical portion 544 protruding toward the second half-wheel 542 , and one side of the first cylindrical portion 544 is provided with a through-hole 545 allowing the wheel shaft 534 to pass through.
- the second half-wheel 542 is provided with a second cylindrical portion 546 and a third cylindrical portion 547 protruding toward the first half-wheel 541 , and a ring groove (not labelled) is formed between the second cylindrical portion 546 and the third cylindrical portion 547 .
- the first cylindrical portion 544 When the first half wheel 541 and the second half wheel 542 are engaged, the first cylindrical portion 544 extends into the ring groove. The first cylindrical portion 544 and the second cylindrical portion 546 together form the accommodating cavity 543 . Since the two half-wheels are assembled with each other, two fitting gaps will be generated to affect the overall sealing of the accommodating cavity 543 . One of them is the first fitting gap formed between the through hole 545 and the first half wheel 541 , and the other is the second fitting gap formed between the first cylindrical portion 544 and the second cylindrical portion 546 .
- the first half wheel 541 is provided with multiple mounting holes 548
- the second half wheel 542 is provided with multiple mounting posts 549 corresponding to the mounting holes 548
- the second half-wheel 542 is provided with multiple engaging members 550 in the circumferential direction.
- Each of the engaging members 550 are provided with an engaging opening 551 .
- the first half-wheel 541 is provided with a locking block 552 which is matched with a corresponding engaging member 550 , and the locking block 552 is capable of being snapped into a corresponding engaging opening 551 .
- each of the first half-wheel 541 and the second half-wheel 542 are provided with a number of reinforcing ribs (not labeled).
- the wheel shaft 534 can include a horizontal support portion 554 mounted on the support wheel 553 , a vertical mounting portion 555 mounted on the support wheel mounting seat 537 , and a connecting portion 556 connecting the support portion 554 and the mounting portion 555 .
- the wheel shaft 534 extends via the through hole 545 into the accommodating cavity 543 , and its end is located in the third cylindrical portion 547 of the second half-wheel 542 .
- the wheel shaft positioning assembly 535 can include, sequentially arranged on the wheel shaft 534 , a bearing 557 , a bearing pressing block 558 , a washer 559 , a bearing clamp 560 , and a washer 561 located outside the first half-wheel 541 .
- the wheel shaft positioning assembly 535 can be used to rotatably install the universal wheel 10 on the wheel shaft 534 .
- the bearing 557 , the bearing pressing block 558 , the washer 559 , the washer 561 , and the bearing clamp 560 are all arranged on the support portion 554 .
- the first half wheel 541 is provided with a ring portion 562 near the through hole 545 , and the ring portion 562 and the washer 561 cooperatively limit the position of a first seal 563 .
- the sealing assembly 536 can include the first seal 563 for sealing the first fitting gap and a second seal 564 for sealing the second fitting gap, so as to protect the wheel shaft 534 and the wheel shaft positioning assembly 535 in the accommodating cavity 543 .
- the first seal 563 is an oil seal
- the second seal 564 is an O-ring gasket
- the second seal 564 is located in the ring groove and touches against the first cylindrical portion 544 .
- the combination device when assembling, the combination device is first assembled into one unit, and the charging cable, the charging terminals 511 and the charging seal 512 are then assembled onto the charging socket 509 .
- One end of the charging cable is welded to the charging terminals, and the other end passes through the charging seal 512 .
- the combination device as a whole is assembled into the receiving part 504 of the case 18 from below the mounting opening 506 , the charging cable is inserted into the first wire-through portion 508 , the lower part of the charging seal 512 and the charging socket 509 are tightly sealed, and the upper part of the charging seal 512 is tightly sealed with the case 18 .
- the electric equipment of the disclosure is not only compact in structure, but can effectively reduce the overall volume. Sine the above two components are integrated and then fastened to the casing, it makes the assembling of the whole machine convenient.
- a charging seal is provided at the connection between the charging interface unit and the inside of the casing.
- the charging seal allows the charging cable to pass through while isolating inside and outside of the casing and keeping the inside of the casing to be sealed.
- the first seal and the second seal are arranged on both sides of the accommodating cavity, so that the accommodating cavity can provide good sealing performance, so as to protect metal parts such as the bearing therein and seal the key parts of the wheel shaft.
- a planetary gearbox can include a housing 408 having an upper cover 413 , an internal ring gear 414 , and a bottom casing 415 .
- a planetary gear device 414 is arranged in the housing 408 and is connected with an output shaft 578 to output power.
- the planetary gear device 414 can include at least a first planetary gear assembly 409 .
- the first planetary gear assembly 409 can include a planet carrier 416 , a sun gear 417 , and multiple planet gears 418 .
- the planet gears 418 mesh with the sun gear 417 and the planet carrier 416 respectively.
- the sun gear 417 and the planet carrier 416 are separated structures, and the sun gear 417 and the planet gears 418 are installed on the planet carrier 416 in coordination.
- the sun gear 417 and the planet carrier 416 are separately manufactured and then assembled.
- the gears and the planet carrier 416 are precision manufactured to improve the accuracy of the gears.
- the precision level of powder metallurgy parts generally should be level 7, while the precision of the finished gears is level 4-6, so it can significantly improve the degree of fit and reduce noise.
- the teeth profile of the sun gear can be implemented using involute spline teeth. Compared with rectangular splines, the involute splines have the advantages of more teeth, thicker teeth ends and roots, stronger load-bearing capacity, easier self-centering and higher installation accuracy. When used in garden tools such as an intelligent mower (robotic mower), the involute spline teeth profile can achieve better noise reduction and higher precise control effects.
- a washer 419 is arranged between the planet carrier 416 and the sun gear 417 to avoid overheating friction between the sun gear 417 and the planet carrier 416 .
- the sun gear 417 is equipped with a rolling pin shaft 420 , and the usage of the rolling pin shaft 20 can reduce the friction area, reduce the noise, and improve the transmission efficiency of the gearbox.
- the planetary gears 418 of the first planetary gear assembly 409 may be plastic gears.
- the sun gear 417 and the internal ring gear 414 may be metal gears.
- plastic planetary gears mesh with metal gears noise can be effectively reduced due to the elastic cushioning effect of plastics.
- the planetary gear device 414 can include a first planetary gear assembly 409 and a second planetary gear assembly 410 .
- the second planetary gear assembly 410 is disposed above the first planetary gear assembly 409 and connected to the output shaft.
- the planet gears 418 of the first planetary gear assembly 409 are plastic gears, while the sun gear 417 and the internal ring gear 414 are metal gears.
- the planet gears 418 , the sun gear 417 , and the internal ring gear 414 of the second planetary gear assembly 410 are metal gears.
- the planet gears 418 of the first planetary gear assembly 409 and the second planetary gear assembly 410 are plastic gears, and the sun gears 417 and the internal ring gears 414 are metal gears.
- the planetary gear device 414 can include a first planetary gear assembly 409 , a second planetary gear assembly 410 , and a third planetary gear assembly 411 .
- the first planetary gear assembly 409 , the second planetary gear assembly 410 , and the third planetary gear assembly 411 are sequentially arranged from bottom to top, with the third planetary gear assembly 411 being connected to the output shaft.
- the planet gears 418 of the first planetary gear assembly may be plastic gears, the sun gear 417 and the internal ring gear 414 may be metal gears.
- the planet gears 418 , the sun gears 417 and the internal ring gears of the second planetary gear assembly 410 , and the third planetary gear assembly 411 may be metal gears. Since the second planetary gear assembly 410 and the third planetary gear assembly 411 have low gear speeds and large transmission torques, the gears made of metal materials can support a large transmission ratio.
- the planet gears 418 of the first planetary gear assembly 409 , the second planetary gear assembly 410 , and the third planetary gear assembly 411 may be plastic gears, and the sun gears 417 and the internal ring gears 414 may be metal gears.
- the second planetary gear assembly 410 and the third planetary gear assembly 411 may also use plastic planetary gears.
- a transmission ratio of the first planetary gear assembly 409 may be about 6.3
- a transmission ratio of the second planetary gear assembly 410 may be about 3.79
- a transmission ratio of the third planetary gear assembly 411 may be about 3.79
- the total transmission ratio may be about 90.3.
- the planetary gearbox provided by the disclosure can reduce the noise generated in the transmission process, with more stable transmission torque, and high degree of coordination.
- the disclosure also provides a blade carrier disc assembly 218 for mowing lawns and other similar operations.
- the blade carrier disc assembly 218 can include a blade carrier disc 5 and blades 6 mounted on the blade carrier disc 5 .
- the blade carrier disc assembly 218 can include a disc body 219 , with blade mounting grooves 220 recessed inwardly from the edge of the disc body 219 along an axial direction of the disc body 219 .
- the disk body 219 may be circular. In other embodiments, the disk body 219 can also be set in other shapes as needed, such as a regular polygon.
- the disc body 219 is provided with guide platforms 221 on the side facing the lawn. An axle sleeve 230 and reinforcing ribs 231 are provided on the side of the disc body 219 facing away from the lawn.
- Each the guide platform 221 is provided by protruding outward from the side of the disc body 219 facing the lawn.
- the guide platform 221 is adjacent to the blade mounting groove 220 and is located on the first grass-incoming side of the blade mounting groove 220 .
- the first grass-incoming side of the blade mounting groove 220 may be deemed the first side 222
- a secondary grass-incoming side may be deemed the second side 223
- the first grass-incoming side may be deemed the second side 223
- the secondary grass-incoming side may be deemed the first side 222 .
- the guide platform 221 can touch the grass before the blade mounting groove 220 , so that the guide platform 221 first straightens and cleans the long grass on the lawn before the blade 6 cuts the grass, thereby preventing long grass, long vines, etc. from being entangled on the blade 6 .
- a guiding wall 224 is provided on the side of the guide platform 221 facing away from the rotation direction of the disk body 219 .
- each blade mounting groove 220 corresponds to one guide platform 221
- the guide platform 221 is located on the first grass-incoming side of the blade mounting groove 220 .
- the first grass-incoming side of the blade mounting groove 220 may be provided with multiple guide platforms 221 as required, or the guide platforms 221 may be provided on both the first grass-incoming grass side and the secondary grass-incoming side of the blade mounting groove 220 .
- the side of the guide platform 221 facing away from the disc body 219 is a smooth protrusion.
- the side of the guide platform 221 facing away from the disc body 219 can be provided cutting edges (not shown) so as to enhance the ability of the guide platform 221 to straighten out and clean up long grass and long vines.
- the guide platform 221 is in the shape of an arc. In other embodiments, the guide platform 221 may also be configured in other shapes, such as a V-shape.
- the axle sleeve 230 is located at a center of the side of the disc body 219 facing away from the lawn.
- the axle sleeve 230 is used to operate with an output shaft of a power mechanism, so that the blade carrier disc assembly 218 rotates under the power from the output shaft.
- the reinforcing ribs 231 are arranged along the radial direction of the disc body 219 and are evenly distributed around the axle sleeve 230 along the circumference of the disc body 219 .
- the side of the disc body 219 facing away from the lawn can further include secondary reinforcing ribs 232 arranged in the circumferential direction, so as to further enhance the strength of the disc body 219 .
- each blade mounting groove 220 is formed by recessing inward from the side of the disc body 219 facing toward the lawn, and located between the adjacent two reinforcing ribs 231 .
- the blade 6 is installed in the blade mounting groove 220 by a fastener 226 and arranged as such that in the axial direction of the disc body 219 , the blade 6 and the fastener 226 do not protrude out of the blade mounting groove 220 .
- the blade 6 can be hidden in the blade mounting groove 220 , so as to prevent the blade 6 and the fastener 226 from colliding with hard objects on the lawn, and prevent the fastener 226 from being removed.
- such arrangement can also prevent the blade 6 from directly contacting broken grass and soil on the lawn, thereby effectively preventing the broken grass from being entangled on the blade 6 , and preventing the soil from entering between the blade 6 and the fastener 226 .
- the blade mounting groove 220 can include a groove bottom wall 227 and groove side walls 225 located on both sides of the groove bottom wall 227 .
- the groove bottom wall 227 is provided with a boss 233 and a mounting hole 234 recessed inward from the boss 233 .
- the blade 6 is detachably mounted on the boss 233 through the fastener 226 and the mounting hole 234 .
- Such configuration can effectively reduce the friction between the blade 6 and the disc body 219 , thereby avoiding disadvantageous large friction from blades being conventionally and directly mounted on the disc body 219 , and improving the working efficiency of the blade carrier disc assembly 218 .
- the angle between the groove bottom wall 227 and the groove side wall 225 is an obtuse angle, and a chamfer 229 is provided at the intersection of the groove side wall 225 and the disc body 219 ; such configuration can effectively reduce the friction between the disc body 219 and the lawn, thereby effectively improving the working efficiency of the blade carrier disc assembly 218 .
- the side of the blade mounting groove 220 near the axis of the disc 219 is also provided with a through groove 123 , so as to facilitate the passing through of blade 6 , grass, stones, etc.
- the guide platforms 221 and the fasteners 226 are in a circle.
- the fastener 226 may be, without limiting, a screw or other parts.
- the blade mounting groove 220 may also be provided with a groove cover (not shown) disposed opposite to the groove bottom wall 227 to prevent grass, vines and soil from jamming the blade 6 .
- the groove cover and the blade mounting groove 220 may be integrally constructed, or may be separately manufactured.
- the blade carrier disc assembly 218 of the disclosure installs the blades 6 in the respective blade mounting grooves 220 of the blade carrier disc 5 , so that the blades 6 are hidden in the blade carrier disc 5 , thereby avoiding the blades 6 from grass or mud jamming and improving the working efficiency of the blade carrier disc assembly 218 .
- the mower can include a height-adjustment mechanism 565 arranged in the case 18 .
- the rotating of the height-adjustment mechanism 565 drives the cutting mechanism 3 to move up and down relative to the housing 1 , in order to change the cutting height of the cutting mechanism 3 .
- a multi-thread mating structure (not labeled) is provided between the height-adjustment mechanism 565 and the cutting mechanism 3 .
- the multi-thread mating structure can include a first threaded portion 569 provided on the height-adjustment mechanism 565 and a second threaded portion 580 provided on the cutting mechanism 3 .
- Both the first threaded portion 569 and the second threaded portion 580 are provided with multi-screw threads.
- the height-adjustment mechanism 565 can include the first threaded portion 569 , a limiting portion 570 , a locking portion 566 , a connecting portion 568 , and a knob sequentially arranged from bottom to top in that order.
- the height-adjustment mechanism 565 may be integrally manufactured, or may be an assembled structure.
- the cutting mechanism 3 can include a housing 574 , a motor (not shown) disposed on the housing 574 , and a cutting assembly (not shown) disposed on an output shaft of the motor for cutting grass.
- the second threaded portion 580 is disposed on the housing 574 .
- the housing 574 can include a bottom wall 573 a and another bottom wall 573 b .
- the bottom wall 573 a and the bottom wall 573 b form a receiving cavity 576 for accommodating the motor.
- the bottom wall 573 b protrudes outward to form a protruding portion 572 .
- the protruding portion 572 is provided with a through hole 571 penetrating therethrough, and the second threaded portion 580 is provided on the inner wall of the through hole 571 .
- the first threaded portion 569 may be a male thread
- the second threaded portion 580 may be a female thread
- the first threaded portion 569 may be a female thread
- the second threaded portion 580 may be a male thread.
- the multi-thread mating structure can include different thread thicknesses.
- the multi-thread mating structure may be a three-threaded thread, in which the two threads 577 , 578 of the first thread portion 569 have the same thread thickness, and a thread thickness of the third thread 579 is smaller than the thread thickness of the threads 577 and 578 .
- the screw-in direction of the first threaded portion 569 is unique, thereby restricting the height-adjustment mechanism 565 to be assembled to the cutting mechanism 3 from a specific direction. With this setting, there is no need to provide a sign or other auxiliary device to guide the operator to install, and the installation becomes convenient. In addition, since there are three stress points at the connection during connecting multi-screw threads, the first threaded portion 569 and the second threaded portion 580 are not easy to jam during the mating. Therefore, the multi-threaded design of different thicknesses plays a good role in foolproof. As illustrated in FIG. 60 through FIG.
- the thread thicknesses of two threads can be made equal, and the thread thickness of the third thread 579 is greater than the thread thicknesses of the two threads.
- the thread thicknesses of the three threads are set to be different from one another, which can also restrict the height-adjustment mechanism 565 to be assembled to the cutting mechanism 3 from a specific direction.
- the limiting portion 570 is used to limit a rotation angle of the height-adjustment mechanism 565 .
- the housing 1 is provided with a protrusion (not shown) that cooperates with the limiting portion 570 .
- the limiting portion 570 and the protrusion block each other to limit rotation positions of the height-adjustment mechanism 565 in two directions, thereby restricting the highest position and the lowest position achieved by the rotations of the height-adjustment mechanism 565 . Due to the mutual blocking between the limiting portion 570 and the protrusion, a rotation angle of the height-adjustment mechanism 565 is less than 360°.
- the locking portion 566 is used to lock the height-adjusting mechanism 565 after the height-adjustment mechanism 565 completes height-adjustment, so as to avoid an unexpected change in the cutting height.
- the housing 1 is fixed with a resilient member 582 that cooperates with the locking portion 566 .
- the locking portion 566 may be a gear structure, and the resilient member 582 is locked with a tooth groove of the gear structure to lock the height-adjustment mechanism 565 .
- the resilient member 582 can include a top end 581 that matches the shape of the tooth groove of the gear structure, and the top end 581 is snapped in the tooth groove to prevent the height-adjustment mechanism 565 from rotating. When the height-adjusting mechanism 565 is manually rotated, the gear structure rotates accordingly, and the resilient member 582 is elastically deformed and snapped into next tooth groove.
- the connecting portion 568 is used as the adjusting knob, and the adjusting of the height-adjustment mechanism 565 is achieved by manually rotating the knob.
- the knob can also use a gear structure linked with an output shaft of another motor through a transmission gear, so as to realize electric drive rotation, thereby further improving the experience of the operator.
- the case 18 can include an upper base 583 and a lower base 584 that is matched with the upper base 583 .
- the lower base 584 is provided with a sliding passage 587 penetrating through the lower base 584 .
- the cutting mechanism 3 can slide in the sliding passage 587 , and at least partially protrude from the sliding passage 587 in a direction facing away from the bottom surface of the lower base 584 , thereby allowing the cutting mechanism 3 to cut lawns, vegetation and so on.
- the casing includes two parts such as the upper base 583 and the lower base 584 , and the sliding passage 587 only penetrates the lower base 584 .
- the case 18 can also be made of one or more than two parts, and the sliding passage 587 can penetrate through the case 18 .
- the cutting mechanism 3 is arranged in the sliding passage 587 and used for cutting lawns, vegetation and so on.
- the cutting mechanism 3 can include a base 595 , a prime mover (e.g., a motor) 598 mounted on the base 595 , and a cutting assembly 592 mounted on the output shaft of the prime mover 598 .
- the base 595 can include a first side wall 594 , a second side wall opposite to the first side wall 594 , a third side wall 596 perpendicular to the first side wall 594 , and a fourth side wall opposite to the third side wall 596 .
- the first side wall 594 protrudes toward an adjusting mechanism 585 to form a protruding portion 589 .
- the protruding portion 589 is provided with a threaded hole penetrating through the protruding portion 589 , and an internal thread is provided in the threaded hole.
- the prime mover 598 may be an electric motor. In other embodiments, the prime mover 598 may also be a gasoline engine.
- the cutting assembly 592 can include a blade carrier disc 5 installed on the output shaft of the prime mover 598 and blades 6 installed on the blade carrier disc 5 .
- the output shaft of the prime mover 598 rotates at a high speed, which drives the blade carrier disc 5 and the blades 6 to rotate at a high speed, which is beneficial for the blades 6 to cut lawn, vegetation, etc.
- the adjusting mechanism 585 is used to adjust a cutting height of the cutting mechanism 3 .
- the adjusting mechanism 585 can include an adjusting member 588 and a driving member 590 rotating with the adjusting member 588 .
- the adjusting member 588 is a knob
- the driving member 590 is a screw rod provided with an external thread.
- the driving member 590 cooperates with the internal thread of the protruding portion 589 through the external thread, and drives the base 595 to move up and down in the sliding passage 587 , which may in turn adjust a length that is from the cutting assembly 592 protruded out an end of the sliding passage 587 facing away from the casing 1 , thereby achieving the purpose of adjusting the cutting height of the cutting mechanism 3 .
- the screw rod is provided with multiple threads.
- the screw rod is provided with at least three threads
- the adjustment member 588 is a knob, and the adjustment is achieved by manually rotating the knob.
- the knob is provided with an indicator label
- the housing 1 is provided with level/grade labels matched with the indicator label.
- the indicator label can point to different level labels, so that the operator can easily and quickly know the mowing height.
- the adjusting member 588 may also be a gear, and rotate with a motor output shaft through a transmission gear, thereby accomplishing electric-driven rotation and further improving the user experience.
- the driving member 590 Since the protruding portion 589 protrudes from the first side wall 594 , the driving member 590 is biased to one side of the base 595 . With this arrangement, the overall height of the cutting mechanism 3 and the adjusting mechanism 585 after being assembled together can be reduced, thereby lowering the center of gravity, so that the mower can run more stably.
- a guiding mechanism 586 can include a resilient guide member 586 a and a guide groove 586 d .
- the guide groove 586 d and the resilient guide member 586 a can slide relatively.
- One of the guide groove 586 d and the resilient guide member 586 a is provided on the case 18 , and the other is provided on the base 595 .
- the guide groove 586 d is provided on the base 595
- the resilient guide member 586 a is fixedly installed on the case 18 .
- there are two guide grooves 586 d which are respectively located on the third side wall 596 and the fourth side wall.
- one guide groove 586 d may be arranged on the second side wall.
- One end of the resilient guide member 586 a is provided with a positioning hole 603 , and the other end is provided with a positioning groove 602 .
- the resilient guide member 586 a is matched with corresponding fixing structures (not shown) on the case 18 through the positioning hole 603 and the positioning groove 602 , so that the resilient guide member 586 a is fixedly installed on the case 18 .
- the guide groove 586 d can include a groove bottom wall 586 c and a pair of groove side walls 586 b .
- the resilient guide member 586 a is located between the pair of groove side walls 586 b .
- the groove bottom wall 586 c is further provided with a guide rail 597 .
- the resilient guide member 586 a can include a base body 600 and a cantilever 601 protruding from the base body 600 toward the groove bottom wall 586 c .
- the cantilever 601 elastically touches against the groove bottom wall 586 c to limit the base 595 .
- the base 600 is provided with a slot 605 along a direction perpendicular to the groove bottom wall 586 c , and the cantilever 601 goes across the slot 605 .
- the slot 605 penetrates through the base body 600 .
- the slot 605 may be a blind slot.
- the base body 600 may not be provided with the slot 605 .
- a cross section of the cantilever 601 in the transverse direction is arc-shaped.
- the cantilever 601 spans the slot 605 in a direction perpendicular to the groove side wall 586 b .
- the cantilever 601 can include a first end 606 and a second end 604 located on both sides of the slot 605 .
- the first end 606 is fixedly connected to the base body 600 , and the second end 604 is separated from the base body 600 .
- the cantilever 601 is further provided with a guide groove 607 penetrating the cantilever 601 along the sliding direction of the base 595 , and the guide groove 607 is located between the first end 606 and the second end 604 .
- the guide groove 607 cooperates with the guide rail 597 to facilitate alignment during installation.
- An end of the guide groove 607 is trumpet-shaped/horn-shaped.
- FIG. 71 shows a resilient guide member 608 according to another embodiment.
- the resilient guide member 608 can include a base body 609 and cantilevers 610 protruding outward from the base body 609 .
- the base body 609 is provided with slots 611 along a direction perpendicular to the groove bottom wall 586 c .
- the slot 611 penetrates through the base body 609 .
- the slot 611 may be a blind slot.
- the base body 609 may not be provided with the slot 611 .
- Resilient arms 612 are provided on the side of the base body 609 opposite to the groove side wall 586 b , and the resilient arm 612 and the base body 609 together may form an O-shape structure.
- the adjusting member 588 may be adjusted so that the driving member 590 may rotate, thereby driving the base 595 to slide along the sliding passage 587 , and achieving the adjusting of the mowing height of the cutting mechanism 3 .
- the cantilever arm 601 may moderately touch against the side wall of the base 595 to limit the base 595 in a direction perpendicular to the groove bottom wall 586 c .
- the base body 600 and the resilient arms 612 appropriately touch against the groove side wall 586 b to limit the base 595 in a direction perpendicular to the groove side wall 586 b , so as to avoid problems such as bending of the sliding path of the base 595 and tilting of the base 595 , and thereby ensure that the base 595 will not get stuck.
- the guiding mechanism 586 it can avoid the problems such as the bending of the sliding path of the prime mover and the tilting of the prime mover during the process of adjusting the mowing height of the mower, thereby effectively improving the user experience.
- an embodiment of the disclosure further provides a charging device.
- the charging device can include a first charging assembly 459 and a second charging assembly 475 corresponding with the first charging assembly 459 .
- the first charging assembly 459 can include a symmetrical structure and is provided with a receiving cavity 460 inside.
- the receiving cavity 460 is provided with a first resilient terminal assembly 461 and a second resilient terminal assembly 464 .
- the first resilient terminal assembly 461 can include a first groove 462 and a first resilient terminal 463 .
- the first groove 462 is located in the receiving cavity 460
- the first resilient terminal 463 is fixed in the first groove 462 .
- the second resilient terminal assembly 464 can include a second groove 465 and a second resilient terminal 466 .
- the second groove 465 is located in the receiving cavity 460 , and the second resilient terminal 466 is fixed in the second groove 465 .
- An embedded space 467 is formed between the first resilient terminal 463 and the second resilient terminal 466 .
- One side of the first charging assembly 459 is provided with a tapered opening 468 , and the tapered opening 468 connects with the embedded space 467 .
- An end of the first charging assembly 459 opposite to the tapered opening 468 is provided with a first mounting portion 469 .
- the first resilient terminal 463 can include a first fixing part 470 and a first contact part 471 .
- the first contact part 471 can include a first initial contact portion 472 and a first charging contact portion 473 .
- the first charging contact portion 473 is connected to the first fixing portion 470 by the first initial contact portion 472 .
- the first fixing part 470 is fixed in the first groove 462 .
- the first contact part 471 can further include a first bend tail portion 474 , and the first bent tail portion 474 is connected to the first charging contact portion 473 .
- the first fixing part 470 and the first initial contact portion 472 may form a first rounded corner (not shown in the drawings), and an angle of the first rounded corner may be less than 90 degrees.
- the first initial contact portion 472 and the first charging contact portion 473 may form a second rounded corner (not labelled in the drawings), and an angle of the second rounded corner may be greater than 90 degrees and less than 180 degrees.
- the first bent tail portion 474 faces away from the embedded space 467 .
- the angle of the rounded corner should be understood as an intersection angle of extension lines of two sides of the rounded corner.
- the second resilient terminal 466 and the first resilient terminal 463 may have similar structure.
- the second charging assembly 475 can include a symmetrical structure.
- One side of the second charging assembly 475 is provided with a protruding portion 476
- the other side of the second charging assembly 475 opposite to the protruding part 476 is provided with a second mounting portion 477 .
- the protruding portion 476 is connected to the second mounting portion 477 through a tapered portion 478 .
- the protruding portion 476 is provided with a third resilient terminal 479 and a fourth resilient terminal 480 .
- FIG. 76 is a schematic structural view of the third resilient terminal 479 in an embodiment of the disclosure.
- the third resilient terminal 479 may have a shape similar to a fishhook.
- the third resilient terminal 479 can include a third fixing part 481 and a first hook part 482 .
- the third fixing part 481 is provided with a first bump 483 and a first fitting opening 484 .
- the first bump 483 is located at an end of the third fixing part 481 connected to the first hook part 482
- the first bump 483 is located at a side of the third fixing part 481 facing away from the first hook part 482 .
- the first fitting opening 484 is located at an end of the third fixing part 481 away from the first hook part 482 .
- the structure of the fourth resilient terminal 480 is similar to the structure of the third resilient terminal 479 .
- FIG. 77 is a cross-sectional view of the second charging assembly described in an embodiment of the disclosure.
- the protruding portion 476 can include a terminal fixing assembly 485 of protruding portion, a lower cover plate 492 , and an upper cover plate (not shown in the drawings).
- the terminal fixing assembly 485 is disposed between the lower cover plate 492 and the upper cover plate (not shown).
- the terminal fixing assembly 485 can include a first fixing plate 486 , a second fixing plate 487 , and a built-in plate 488 .
- the first fixing plate 486 and the second fixing plate 487 are arranged on each side of the built-in plate 488 .
- a first embedded groove 489 is provided between the first fixing plate 486 and the built-in plate 488 .
- a first fixing buckle 490 is provided on the side of the first fixing plate 486 facing away from the built-in plate 488 .
- the first hook part 482 is embedded in the first embedded groove 489 .
- the first fitting opening 484 is detachably connected to the first fixing buckle 490 .
- a second embedded groove 491 is provided between the second fixing plate 487 and the built-in plates 488 .
- a second fixing buckle (not labelled in the drawings) is provided on the side of the second fixing plate 487 facing away from the built-in plate 488 .
- the second hook part (not labelled in the drawings) is embedded in the second embedded groove 491 .
- the second fitting opening (not labelled in the drawings) and the second fixing buckle (not labelled in the drawings) are detachably connected with each other.
- the first hook part 482 is provided with a first block opening
- the first embedded groove 489 is provided with a first block plate therein
- the first block plate is embedded in the first block opening so as to prevent the first hook part 482 from moving up and down.
- the second hook part is provided with a second block opening
- the second embedded groove 491 is provided with a second block plate therein
- the second block plate is embedded in the second block opening so as to prevent the second hook part from moving up and down.
- FIG. 78 is a schematic structural view of the first fixing buckle 490 in an embodiment of the disclosure.
- the structure of the second fixing buckle is similar to the structure of the first fixing buckle 490 .
- the first fixing buckle 490 can include an inclined surface 493 and a perpendicular surface 494 .
- the inclined surface 493 and the perpendicular surface 494 are located on opposite sides of the first fixing buckle 490 , and the inclined surface 493 faces toward the first hook part (not labelled in the drawings).
- the inclined surface 493 facilitates the first fixing buckle 490 to be inserted into the first fitting opening 484 .
- the perpendicular surface 494 prevents the first fixing buckle 490 from being separated from the first fitting opening 484 .
- FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram of a first process of using the first charging assembly 459 and the second charging assembly 475 in an embodiment of the disclosure.
- a distance between the first charging contact portion 473 and the second charging contact portion 497 is smaller than a distance between the third resilient terminal 479 and the fourth resilient terminal 480 .
- the second charging assembly 475 is inserted into the first charging assembly 459 along the X direction.
- the third resilient terminal 479 is in resilient contact with the first initial contact portion 472
- the fourth resilient terminal 480 is in resilient contact with the second initial contact portion 498 .
- the opening size of the tapered opening (also referred to as tapered port) 468 is relatively large, the protruding portion 476 is easy to be inserted into the tapered opening 468 .
- the side walls of the tapered opening 468 can play a role of guiding the insertion direction of the protruding portion 476 , and under the guiding of the side walls, the protruding portion 476 slides into the embedded space 467 along the side walls.
- FIG. 80 is a schematic diagram of a second process of using the first charging assembly 459 and the second charging assembly 475 in an embodiment of the disclosure.
- the second charging assembly 475 is inserted into the first charging assembly 459 along the X direction.
- the protruding portion 476 is inserted into the embedded space (not labelled in the drawings), a connection between the first initial contact portion 472 and the first charging contact portion 473 is in resilient contact with the third fixing part 481 , the first charging contact portion 473 is in resilient contact with the first bump 483 .
- a connection between the second initial contact portion 498 and the second charging contact portion 497 is in resilient contact with the fourth fixing portion 499
- the second charging contact portion 497 is in resilient contact with the second bump 500
- shapes of the tapered portion 478 and the tapered port 468 correspond with each other, and the tapered portion 478 can fully fill the tapered port 468 .
- the first elastic terminal 463 and the third elastic terminal 479 are in resilient contact with each other, and there are two contact points between the first resilient terminal 463 and the third resilient terminal 479 .
- the connection between the first initial contact portion 472 and the first charging contact portion 473 may touch against the first bump.
- the second resilient terminal 466 and the fourth resilient terminal 480 are in resilient contact with each other, there are two contact points between the second resilient terminal 466 and the fourth resilient terminals 480 , and the connection between the second initial contact portion and the second charging contact portion 498 may touch against the second bump.
- Such arrangement not only ensures the stability of contact, but also prevents the second charging assembly 475 from detaching from the first charging assembly 459 .
- the first resilient terminal 463 , the second resilient terminal 466 , the third resilient terminal 479 , and the fourth resilient terminal 480 may be constructed using bent metal sheets.
- the upper base 583 and the lower base 584 of the case 18 jointly form a receiving cavity 613 for receiving a control circuit board 618 .
- the control circuit board 618 is installed on the lower base 584 .
- the mower may further include a battery pack (not shown) for supplying power to the motor.
- the battery pack and the motor 637 are installed on the lower base 584 .
- Combination device as provided is used to directly or indirectly control the mower to perform a certain action, and include a first device installed on the upper base 583 and a second device installed on the lower base 584 .
- the first device and the second device are not electrically connected.
- Such arrangement can effectively avoid an electrical connection between the components arranged in the upper base 583 and the components arranged in the lower base 584 which causes inconvenience to the replacement of the upper base 583 .
- the first device regardless of whether the devices are working or not working, the first device will not be energized. That is, no operating current may passes through the first device when the second device is energized (i.e., there is an operating current passing through the second device).
- the combination device controls the mower to perform a corresponding action.
- the first device and the second device are contactless or non-connected electrically. That is, there is no cable connecting between the first device and the second device, for example, the first device and the second device are induced by magnetic component or optical component.
- This arrangement can not only control the mower directly or indirectly by the non-contact cooperation of the first device and the second device, but also avoid the disadvantage in the prior art, in which components installed on the upper base 583 and components installed on the lower base 584 need to be electrically connected through wired lines or conductive terminals. Thus, this arrangement reduces the difficulty of assembling the upper base 583 and the lower base 584 .
- the operator can directly disassemble and replace the upper base 583 conveniently and quickly without arranging the wires or re-plugging the conductive terminals, thereby improving the working efficiency of the operator.
- the first device is mounted on the upper base 583
- the second device is mounted on the lower base 584 , and the first device and the second device are in contactless cooperation, the second device and the lower base 584 can be packaged as a whole, thereby enhancing the waterproof performance of the mower.
- the second device is integrated on the control circuit board 618 .
- the combination device may be a lifting sensor 632 that detects whether the mower is lifted, a collision sensor 639 that detects whether the mower collides with an obstacle, a safety switch 620 that controls power on or off of the mower, and/or a safety lock 622 that controls whether the mower is in an active state.
- the second device may include other electrical components, such as a circuit board, a battery pack, a motor 637 and so on. Details of the lifting sensor 632 , the collision sensor 639 , the safety switch 620 , and the safety lock 622 may be further described below.
- the upper base 583 is provided with support columns 614 with a top cover 615 mounted on the support columns 614 .
- the support column 614 can include a mounting plate 628 fixedly mounted on the upper base 583 , an elastic element 629 mounted on the mounting plate 628 , a damper 631 at one end of the elastic element 629 away from the mounting plate 628 , and a protective sleeve 630 sheathed around the elastic element 629 .
- the elastic element 629 is a spring
- the protective sleeve 630 is a bellows.
- the top cover 615 is mounted on the damper 631 , and a handle 619 is provided thereon.
- the elastic element 629 undergoes an elastic deformation, and the top cover 615 moves in a direction away from the upper base 583 .
- the top cover 615 continues to move for a certain distance along an original forward direction of the mower under the action of inertia. In this case, the elastic element 629 undergoes an elastic deformation.
- the lifting sensor 632 is used to detect up and down relative motions between the top cover 615 and the case 18 .
- the lifting sensor 632 can include a metal plate (not shown) installed on the support column 614 and a first Hall sensor 633 installed on the lower base 584 .
- the first device can include a control component, and the control component is the metal plate.
- the second component is the first Hall sensor 633 .
- the control component is not electrically connected to the second device and is used to control the second device. When the mower is lifted, the metal plate is moved away from the first hall sensor 633 under the action of the support column 614 , which causes a signal change of the first hall sensor 633 .
- the first Hall sensor 633 controls the mower to stop working, so as to prevent the cutting assembly 616 from hurting people.
- the first Hall sensor 633 may send a corresponding signal to the control circuit board 618 , so that the control circuit board 618 controls the cutting assembly 616 to stop working.
- the first device of the lifting sensor 632 is a metal plate, and the second device is a Hall sensor.
- the first device of the lifting sensor 632 may be a magnet, and the second device may be a reed switch; or, the first device of the lift sensor 632 may be an armature, and the second device may be an inductive sensor.
- the first device of the lift sensor 632 is installed on the support column 614 .
- the first device of the lifting sensor 632 may be installed on the top cover 615 instead.
- the first device is a metal plate, and the second device is a Hall sensor.
- the first device may be a Hall sensor, and the second device is a metal plate.
- the collision sensor 639 is used to detect a horizontal movement of the top cover 615 .
- the collision sensor 639 can include a third magnet 640 installed on the top cover 615 and a third Hall sensor 641 installed on the lower base 584 .
- the third magnet 640 is a control component of the first device, and the third Hall sensor 641 is the second device.
- the top cover 615 will continue to move forward for a certain distance along an original forward direction of the mower under the action of inertia, so that the magnet 640 and the third Hall sensor 641 produce a relative displacement, causing a signal change of the third Hall sensor 641 .
- the third Hall sensor 641 controls the mower to reverse for a certain distance so as to make the mower avoid the obstacle.
- the third Hall sensor 641 directly controls the retreat of the mower.
- the third Hall sensor 641 may send a corresponding signal to the control circuit board 618 , and the mower is controlled to retreat through the control circuit board 618 .
- the collision sensors 639 are provided at the front and rear of the mower.
- the first device of the collision sensor 639 may be an armature
- the second device may be an inductive sensor.
- the upper base 583 is provided with a first switch
- the lower base 584 is provided with a second switch.
- the first switch is electrically disconnected from the second switch.
- the first switch controls the second switch to be on or off.
- the safety switch 620 is used to control the power on or off of the mower.
- the safety switch 620 can include a button 621 installed on the upper base 583 , a first magnet 624 (i.e., first device or first switch) installed on the button 621 , and a first reed switch 625 (i.e., second device or second switch) installed on the lower base 584 .
- the button 621 is pivotally mounted on the upper base 583 via a pivot, and the button 621 can include a first end 626 and a second end 627 arranged at two sides of the pivot.
- the first magnet 624 is installed on the first end 626 . When the first end 626 is pressed, the first magnet 624 closes to the first reed switch 625 . In this case, the first reed switch 625 is in the on-state, and the mower is in an energized state. When the second end 627 is pressed, the first magnet 624 is away from the first reed switch 625 . In this case, the first reed switch 625 is in the off-state, and the mower is in a switched-off state.
- the safety lock 622 is used to control whether the mower is in an activated state (also referred to as active state). When the mower is in the activated state, the mower can be started. When the mower is in an inactive state or in a locked state, the mower cannot be started.
- the safety lock 622 can include a safety key 623 , a motor lock body 634 installed on the upper base 583 corresponding with the safety key 623 , and a second reed switch 635 (i.e., second device) installed on the lower base 584 or the lock body 634 .
- a second magnet 636 i.e., first device
- the second reed switch 635 When the safety key 623 is inserted into the lock body 634 and the safety key 623 is rotated to make the second magnet 636 closing to the second reed switch 635 , the second reed switch 635 is in an on-state, and the mower is in the activated state correspondingly.
- the safety key 623 is pulled out from the lock body 634 or the safety key 623 is rotated to make the second magnet 636 away from the second reed switch 635 , the second magnetic reed switch 635 is in an off-state, and the mower is in a locked state at this time.
- a main body 644 of the mower at least can include a battery assembly (not shown) for power supply, and at least two drive motors (not shown) for driving the cutting assembly and the walking assembly 8 .
- the main body 644 of the mower should also include other components used to control and drive the operation of the mower.
- the main body 644 can further include charging terminals 645 for electrically connecting an external charging post to charge the battery assembly.
- a casing assembly 640 is used for supporting the cutting assembly and the walking assembly 8 accommodated in the main body 644 .
- the casing assembly 640 can include a first casing 641 and a second casing 642 that are buckled/engaged with each other, and the main body 644 is received between the first casing 641 and the second casing 642 to prevent the main body 644 from being affected by the external environment during use and thereby ensure the normal operation of the main body 644 .
- the first casing 641 is hollow, the second casing 642 is generally plate-shaped.
- the first casing 641 is fastened onto an edge of the second casing 642 by a fastening structure, and a projection of the first casing 641 on a horizontal plane covers a projection of the second casing 642 on the horizontal plane.
- the fastening structure is a snap-fit structure.
- the fastening structure may also be, without limiting, a threaded structure, as long as the detachable connection between the first housing 641 and the second housing 642 is ensured.
- the first casing 641 and the second casing 642 are respectively formed with a first handle structure 643 and a second handle structure 654 for carrying the casing assembly 640 or the mower.
- the casing assembly 640 is defined to have a first end and an opposite second end
- the first handle structure 643 is located at the first end of the first casing 641
- the second handle structure 654 is located at the second end of the second casing 642 . Projections of the first handle structure 643 and the second handle structure 654 on the horizontal plane are staggered arranged.
- the first handle structure 643 and the universal wheel 10 are both located at the first end of the casing assembly 640 ; and the second handle structure 654 , the walking wheel 9 , and a third walking wheel are all located at the second end of the casing assembly 640 .
- the second handle structure 654 , the walking wheel 9 , and a third walking wheel are all located at the second end of the casing assembly 640 .
- the first handle structure 643 is recessed from outside to inside of the first casing 641 , and the first handle structure 643 penetrates through the first casing 641 and forms at least a gripping portion 652 along an edge of the penetrating position.
- the first end of the first casing 641 in the illustrated embodiment can include a first protrusion 646 protruding outward along the horizontal plane and a second protrusion 647 that is vertically offset from the first protrusion 646 .
- the first handle structure 643 is located between the first protrusion 646 and the second protrusion 647 .
- the positions and orientations of the user hands when transporting the casing assembly 640 or the mower together may constitute gripping positions during transporting.
- the first handle structure 643 and the second handle structure 654 each can provide gripping portions 652 corresponding to at least two gripping positions.
- the gripping portions 652 provided on the first handle structure 643 can include a first gripping portion 648 , a second gripping portion 649 , and a through hole 605 between the first gripping portion 648 and the second gripping portion 649 .
- the gripping positions of the first gripping portion 648 and the second gripping portion are arranged up and down in a staggered manner.
- a distance between the through hole 650 and the main body 644 is about 5-10 cm, so as to facilitate the user to extend his hand into the first handle structure 643 to achieve the transporting of the casing assembly 640 or the mower.
- both the first gripping portion 648 and the second gripping portion 649 are arranged obliquely, an inclination degree of the first gripping portion 648 is greater than an inclination degree of the second gripping portion 649 , and the charging terminals 645 are arranged toward the through hole 650 .
- Such an arrangement allows the external charging device to be directly and electrically connected to the charging terminals 645 through the through hole 650 , which further improves the practicability of the mower.
- the gripping portion 652 can further include a first gripping space 653 recessed from an edge of the first gripping portion 648 into the interior of the first casing 641 , and a second gripping space 651 recessed from an edge of the second gripping portion 649 into the interior of the first casing 641 .
- a projection of the first gripping space 653 on the horizontal plane covers a projection of the second gripping space 651 on the horizontal plane.
- the first gripping space 653 is formed on the first protrusion 646
- the second gripping space 651 is formed on the second protrusion 647 .
- the second handle structure 654 is arranged in a groove shape.
- the second handle structure 654 is formed by recessing from a bottom of the second casing 642 toward the interior of the casing assembly 640 , and an edge of the second handle structure 654 forms at least one gripping portion 652 .
- the gripping portion 652 formed on the second casing 642 can include a third gripping portion 658 and a third gripping space 657 corresponding to the third gripping portion 658 .
- the third gripping portion 658 extends along a surface of the second casing 642 toward the center of the third gripping portion 658 .
- the second handle structure 654 can further include an inclined guiding surface 656 opposite to the third gripping portion 658 , and such arrangement can facilitate the user to extend the fingers into the third gripping space 657 and hold onto the third gripping portion 658 , thus achieving the transportation of the casing assembly 640 or the mower.
- the parts used for griping and inclined to the housing assembly 640 /mower in the first grip portion 648 , the second grip portion 649 , and the third grip portion 658 are all set to rounded corners. Such arrangement can effectively reduce the tightening feeling of the grip part 652 and effectively improve the use-friendliness of the housing assembly 640 and the mower.
- the first handle structure 643 has the first gripping portion 648 and the second gripping part 649 and the second handle structure 654 has the third gripping portion 658 .
- the first handle structure 643 and the second handle structure 654 each can be provided with multiple gripping structures. That is, the number and structure of the gripping portion(s) 652 corresponding to each handle structure can be configured according to actual needs, without being limited herein.
- the casing assembly 640 when the casing assembly 640 is provided with the first handle structure 643 and the second handle structure 654 , the casing assembly 640 can include gripping portions 652 with at least two gripping ways, and the user can choose different gripping positions of the gripping portions 652 according to his/her own physical condition and needs. First it can effectively reduce the accumulated fatigue when the user grasps the casing assembly 640 ; and second, it can prevent the user’s fingers being laborious or strangled by the gripping portion. Meanwhile, the mower with the casing assembly 640 can be easily carried/transported, which effectively improves the practicability of the mower.
- an embodiment of the disclosure provides a connection structure, which can be used as a connection method on the housing 1 of the mower and used for the installation between a main body 661 and a rear cover 662 of the housing 1 .
- the connection structure can include a mounting portion 664 provided on the main body 661 and a fixing portion 665 provided on the rear cover 662 .
- the mounting portion 664 and the fixing portion 665 are disposed opposite to each other. Specifically, the mounting portion 664 is located in an opening 666 on a side of the main body 661 , and the fixing portion 665 is located at an edge 669 on a side of the rear cover 662 .
- the mounting portion 664 is rotatably connected with the fixing portion 665 in the opening 666 through a shaft pin 663 .
- Such a connection mechanism is simple in structure and convenient to operate.
- the mounting portion 664 can include two mounting holes 667
- the fixing portion 665 can include two mounting holes 670
- the two mounting holes 667 are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with the two mounting holes 670 on the fixing portion 665 .
- the mounting portion 664 is provided with a shaft pin receiving groove 668 .
- the shaft pin 663 can be pre-placed in the shaft pin receiving groove 668 and fixed to the mounting portion 664 and the fixing portion 665 , and the installation of the main body 661 and the rear cover 662 is completed consequently.
- the shaft pin receiving groove 668 may be disposed on the fixing portion 665 .
- the shaft pin receiving groove 668 is located between the two mounting holes 667 .
- the mounting holes 667 and the shaft pin receiving groove 668 connect with each other and are located on the same straight line.
- a length of the shaft pin receiving groove 668 is greater than a length of the shaft pin 663 , thereby facilitating the shaft pin 663 to slide along the pin receiving groove 668 and then pass through the mounting holes 667 and the mounting holes 670 .
- the length of the shaft pin receiving groove 668 is slightly greater than twice the length of the shaft pin 663 . In this way, two shaft pins can be placed in the shaft pin receiving groove 668 at the same time.
- the shaft pin receiving groove 668 may be located on both sides of the mounting hole 667 .
- the mounting portion 664 and the fixing portion 665 can be arranged alternately.
- the shaft pin 663 can include a body portion 671 , a head portion 672 at one end of the body portion 671 , and a tail portion 673 at the other end of the body portion 671 .
- the body portion 671 , the head portion 672 , and the tail portion 673 can be integrally constructed, without being limited herein.
- the shaft pin 663 is provided with a penetrating opening 674 from the middle of the body portion 671 to the tail portion 673 .
- the tail portion 673 is cone-shaped, and is made of an elastic material. A diameter of one end of the tail portion 673 near the body portion 671 is larger than that of the other end.
- the opening 674 can be opened and closed according to the force applied onto the tail portion 673 , and the opening 674 can be elastically deformed, thereby can change the diameter of the tail portion 673 .
- the diameters of the head portion 672 and the tail portion 673 are both larger than a diameter of the body portion 671 .
- the mounting holes 667 and the mounting holes 670 can be interposed between the head portion 672 and the tail portion 673 .
- a diameter of the shaft pin receiving groove 668 is not less than the diameters of the head portion 672 and the tail portion 673 , so as to prevent the shaft pin 663 from sliding out of the shaft pin receiving groove 668 when the shaft pin 663 slides along the shaft pin receiving groove 668 .
- Opening diameters of the mounting holes 670 and the mounting holes 667 each are smaller than the diameter of the tail portion 673 .
- the opening diameters of the mounting holes 670 and the mounting holes 667 each are larger than the diameter of the body portion 671 .
- Step 1 placing the shaft pin 663 in the shaft pin receiving groove 668 in advance, and aligning the mounting holes 667 on the main body 661 with the mounting holes 670 on the rear cover 662 one by one.
- Step 2 pushing the shaft pin 663 into the mounting holes 667 and the mounting holes 670 along the shaft pin receiving groove 668 .
- the tail portion 673 of the shaft pin 663 is squeezed by the mounting hole 667 and the mounting hole 670 , and the opening 674 is closed, resulting the tail portion 673 and the main body 671 sequentially passing through the mounting hole 667 and the mounting hole 670 .
- Step 3 pushing the tail portion 673 completely out of the mounting hole 667 and the mounting hole 670 .
- the tail portion 673 of the shaft pin 663 is not pressed by the mounting hole 667 and the mounting hole 670 , and the opening 674 is opened.
- the tail portion 673 exposes from the mounting hole 670 , the body portion 671 is accommodated in the mounting hole 667 and the mounting hole 670 , and the head portion 672 is exposed from the mounting hole 667 and is accommodated in the shaft pin accommodating groove 668 , thereby the installation of the shaft pin 663 at one side is completed.
- Step 4 repeating the above steps to install the shaft pin 663 at the other side, until all installation tasks are completed.
- the connection structure includes the mounting portion 664 and the fixing portion 665 disposed opposite to the mounting portion 664 , and the mounting portion 664 is connected to the fixing portion 665 through the shaft pins 663 .
- the shaft pin accommodating groove 668 is provided on the mounting portion 664 , and the shaft pin 663 is placed in the shaft pin accommodating groove 668 in advance, so that the installation is completed only by sliding the shaft pin 663 along the shaft pin receiving groove 668 to fix onto the mounting portion 664 and the fixing portion 665 .
- the above structure is simple and the above operation is convenient.
- a lifting detection device 267 of a mower is used to detect a lifting displacement of a main body 265 of the mower relative to a chassis 266 of the mower.
- the main body 265 is located directly above the chassis 266 , and the main body 265 can be lifted upwards and is displaced in the vertical direction relative to the chassis 266 .
- the lifting detection device 267 of the mower can include a shock absorber 261 connected with the main body 265 , a sliding member 262 connected with the shock absorber 261 , a metal plate 278 arranged at the bottom of the sliding member 262 , a sensor 281 arranged on a printed circuit board (PCB) in the chassis 266 , and a connector 268 connecting the main body 265 and the shock absorber 261 .
- a shock absorber 261 connected with the main body 265
- a sliding member 262 connected with the shock absorber 261
- a metal plate 278 arranged at the bottom of the sliding member 262
- a sensor 281 arranged on a printed circuit board (PCB) in the chassis 266
- a connector 268 connecting the main body 265 and the shock absorber 261 .
- the metal plate 278 can be buckled or fixed by screws to the bottom of the sliding member 262 .
- the sensor 281 is used to detect a distance D between the chassis 266 and the metal plate 278 in the vertical direction. When the main body 265 is lifted relative to the chassis 266 , the metal plate 278 moves upward correspondingly. When the distance between the metal plate 278 and the chassis 266 in the vertical direction exceeds a preset value, the sensor 281 sends a trigger signal to a control device of the mower (not shown) to control the mower to stop working, so as to prevent the mower from injuring the operator.
- a material of the shock absorber 261 may be rubber.
- the shock absorber 261 can include a first connecting end 269 facing toward the main body 265 and a second connecting end 270 facing toward the sliding member 262 .
- the connector 268 can include a receiving groove 285 with an opening facing toward the shock absorber 261 , the receiving groove 285 is used for receiving the first connecting end 269 .
- the connection method of the connector 268 and the shock absorber 261 is not limited herein, and it can be realized by bolt connection, or by snap connection, or other commonly used connection method, as long as the two can be tightly connected.
- the sliding member 262 is fixedly connected to the shock absorber 261 . That is, the movement states of the sliding member 262 and the shock absorber 261 are consistent.
- a material of the sliding member 262 may be plastic.
- the sliding member 262 can include a connecting portion 276 extending in the vertical direction and a fixing portion 277 perpendicular to the connecting portion 276 .
- the connecting portion 276 is connected to the second connecting end 270 of the shock absorber 261 .
- the fixing portion 277 is located at the bottom and protrudes toward the periphery relative to the connecting portion 276 to form an enlarged end.
- the metal plate 278 is fixed on the bottom surface of the fixing portion 277 .
- the lifting detection device 267 of the mower can further include a connecting plate 274 fixed on the chassis 266 .
- the connecting plate 274 can include a mounting plate 283 provided with a through hole, a sleeve 284 fixed in the through hole, and a sealing ring 275 between the mounting plate 283 and the sleeve 284 .
- the connecting portion 276 of the sliding member 262 passes upward through the sleeve 284 and is slidably arranged.
- the mounting plate 283 is fixed to the chassis 266 by fastening devices 273 .
- the fastening device 273 may be a screw or other commonly used connectors.
- the lifting detection device 267 of the mower can further include a first spring 264 and a second spring 271 .
- the first spring 264 is sleeved between the sleeve 284 and the fixing portion 277 of the sliding member 262 , and the first spring 264 is sleeved on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 276 of the sliding member 262 . Since the sleeve 284 is fixed, when the sliding member 262 moves upward with the main body 265 , the first spring 264 is compressed.
- the second spring 271 is disposed between the shock absorber 261 and the sliding member 262 .
- Both the shock absorber 261 and the sliding member 262 are made of plastic.
- An upper end of the second spring 271 is threadedly connected to a lower end of the shock absorber 261 .
- a lower end of the second spring 271 is threadedly connected to a top end of the connecting portion 276 of the sliding member 262 .
- the shock absorber 261 provides a stable zero position by using the second spring 271 , which makes it easy to install the main body 265 . This is because the second spring 271 is fixed by the shock absorber 261 in an initial position, and the second spring 271 is not easy to deform.
- a plane where the mower collides with an obstacle is defined as a collision plane.
- a deflection elastic force of the second spring 271 may resist the horizontal movement.
- the shock absorber 261 can be used to reduce a vertical displacement caused by a displacement of the main body 265 relative to the chassis 266 on the collision plane. Therefore, it is ensured that the main body 265 of the mower will not move upward when a collision with the obstacle occurs, thereby avoiding the situation that the mower stops working due to the vertical displacement caused by the collision with the obstacle. That is, the shock absorber 261 allows the main body 265 to move only in the vertical direction relative to the chassis 266 during the collision of the mower robot.
- the collision plane is approximately parallel to a mowing plane, that is, roughly a horizontal plane.
- the sliding member 262 when the mower is in a normal working state, the first spring 264 is in a freely extended state, and the sliding member 262 needs to overcome the elastic force of the first spring 264 to move the main body 265 forward, which is to move away from the chassis 266 .
- the sliding member 262 receives less force than the elastic force of the first spring 264 , the sliding member 262 will not move in the vertical direction, thereby avoiding the sliding member 262 moving upward due to slight turbulence which may cause the sensor 281 erroring or cause the mower to stop working. As a result, the working stability of the mower is improved consequently.
- the lifting detection device 267 of the mower can further include a protective cover 272 covering the outer periphery of the shock absorber 261 .
- the protective cover 272 is a bellows. One end of the bellows 13 is connected with the shock absorber 261 , and the other end is connected with the mounting plate 283 of the connecting plate 274 . This arrangement prevents the shock absorber 261 from being contaminated and damaged, and prolongs the service life of the shock absorber 261 .
- a material of the metal plate 278 may be aluminum.
- the sensor 281 may be a Hall sensor, an inductive sensor, or a magnetic sensor.
- the chassis 266 can include a lower base 282 and an upper base 279 .
- the sensor 281 is disposed on the lower base 282 and is tightly attached to a bottom surface of the upper base 279 .
- the connecting plate 274 is fixed on the upper base 279 by the fastening devices 273 .
- the upper base 279 is further provided with a receiving cavity 280 for receiving and supporting the bottom of the sliding member 262 .
- the metal plate 278 touches against the bottom surface of the receiving cavity 280 .
- the first spring 264 when the mower is in a normal working state, the first spring 264 is in a naturally extended state, and the metal plate 278 is positionally close to the sensor 281 .
- the main body 265 moves upward, the shock absorber 261 and the sliding member 262 are driven to move upward relative to the chassis 266 , as shown in FIG. 101 .
- the first spring 264 is in a compressed state
- the metal plate 278 located at the bottom of the sliding member 262 moves upward
- the sensor 281 detects the distance D between the metal plate 278 and the sensor 281 .
- the sensor 281 sends a trigger signal to the control device of the mower to control the blades of the mower to stop rotating, so as to prevent the operator from being injured.
- the shock absorber 261 , the first spring 264 , and the second spring 271 can play a role in damping vibration, so that the sliding member 262 will not move upward. That is, the positions of the metal plate 278 and the sensor 281 are kept close to each other, which prevents the sliding member 262 from moving upward due to slight bumps which may cause the sensor 281 erroring and thereby cause the mower to stop working. As a result, the working stability of the mower is improved consequently.
- the sensor 281 is installed in the chassis 266 to detect the distance between the metal plate 278 provided on the sliding member 262 and the chassis 266 , and to determine the distance between the main body 265 of the mower and the chassis 266 .
- the lifting detection device 267 of the mower can include a simple structure and the space of the mower is saved. There is no need to construct a hole on the chassis 266 for the wire connecting the lifting detection device and the chassis to pass through, and thus the waterproof performance is preserved.
- the shock absorber 261 can reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the mower is mistakenly stop working due to the displacement in the vertical direction caused by the collision with obstacles, and thus improves the stability of the mower.
- an intelligent/smart/robotic mower can automatically work on a grassland.
- the mower can include a body 286 , a casing 287 covering the body 286 , and a suspension device 288 movably connecting the body 286 and the casing 287 .
- the body 286 is provided with a walking wheel(s) (not shown) for moving the mower, a driving motor (not shown) for driving the walking wheel, a cutting assembly/tool for mowing (not shown), a control assembly (not shown) for controlling operations of the driving motor and the cutting assembly, and a battery pack for providing power to the mower.
- a walking wheel(s) for moving the mower
- a driving motor for driving the walking wheel
- a cutting assembly/tool for mowing not shown
- a control assembly (not shown) for controlling operations of the driving motor and the cutting assembly
- a battery pack for providing power to the mower.
- the casing 287 which covers the outside of the body 286 can protect the body 286 as well as the operator. For example, it can provide dustproof and waterproof to protect the structures such as the driving motor, the cutting assembly, the control assembly and the battery pack, and can prolong the service life of each of the structures. Meanwhile, it can also prevent the operator from accidents when using the mower, thereby improving the safety factor of the mower consequently.
- the suspension device 288 can include a first support column 294 connected to the casing 287 , a second support column 295 connected to the body 286 , and a flexible connecting member 299 connecting the first support column 294 and the second support column 295 .
- one end of the flexible connecting member 299 is connected to the first support column 294
- the other end is connected to the second support column 295 , so that the casing 287 can move relative to the body 286 in a direction perpendicular to the body 286 and/or in a horizontal direction.
- the first support column 294 is opposite to the second support column 295 , and the first support column 294 is located above the second support column 295 .
- the horizontal direction is a direction parallel to the ground
- the direction perpendicular to the body 286 is a direction perpendicular to the ground and shall be referred to as the vertical direction.
- the first support column 294 is provided with a connecting portion 302
- the casing 287 is correspondingly provided with a receiving portion 90
- the connecting portion 302 is received in the receiving portion 90 .
- the first support column 294 is roughly a columnar structure
- the connecting portion 302 is provided on the top of the first support column 294 and can include a spherical structure.
- the casing 287 is correspondingly provided with a rubber cap 291 , the rubber cap 291 is fixedly connected to the casing 287 , the receiving portion 90 is a spherical receiving cavity formed in the rubber cap 291 , and the spherical connecting portion 302 is received in the spherical receiving cavity so as to achieve a fixed connection between the first support column 294 and the casing 287 .
- the first support column 294 will be driven to move correspondingly.
- the first support post 294 and the housing 287 can be connected by other structures, as long as the first support column 294 and the casing 287 can be fixedly connected, without being limited herein.
- the first support column 294 is further provided with a groove 303 surrounding an axial direction thereof, and the groove 303 is approximately located at a middle position of the first support column 294 .
- the flexible connecting member 299 can include a spring.
- One end of the first support column 294 is provided with a first thread 305 matching the spring, and one end of the second support column 295 is provided with a second thread 306 matching the spring.
- One end of the spring is threadedly connected with the first support column 294 , and the other end is threadedly connected with the second support column 295 .
- the first thread 305 is provided on the bottom of the first support column 294
- the second thread 306 is provided on the top of the second support column 295 .
- a pitch H of the first thread 305 gradually increases from bottom to top.
- the spring will gradually tighten to increase a pressure between the spring and the first support.
- the increasing the friction between the spring and the first support column 294 makes the spring difficult to escape.
- a pitch of the second thread 306 is correspondingly set to gradually increase from top to bottom.
- the flexible connecting member 299 can further include a rope (not shown). Both ends of the rope are provided with spherical fixing members.
- the first support column 294 and the second support column 295 are respectively provided with spherical grooves 304 for correspondingly accommodating the spherical fixing members.
- the spherical groove 304 on the first support column 294 is recessed inwardly from an inner side wall of the groove 303
- the spherical groove 304 on the second support column 295 is recessed on the second thread 306 and close to the top of the second support column 295 .
- the flexible connecting member 299 can include a spring and a rope, and a length of the rope is greater than a length of the spring. This arrangement can ensure that the mower stops working when the mower is lifted in case the spring is failed.
- the flexible connecting member 299 may have other structures, as long as it can achieve the effect of stopping the mower when it is lifted, without being limited herein.
- the suspension device 288 can further include a fixing frame 296 fixedly connected to the body 286 .
- the fixing frame 296 is provided with a through hole 311 .
- the top of the second support column 295 penetrates the fixing frame 296 via the through hole 311 .
- the fixing frame 296 can include a cylindrical structure, and the through hole 311 is formed at the center of the fixing frame 296 .
- the fixing frame 296 can include a first fixing portion 307 and a second fixing portion 308 .
- a diameter of the first fixing portion 307 is smaller than a diameter of the second fixing portion 308 .
- the through hole 311 penetrates through the first fixing portion 307 and the second fixing portion 308 in the vertical direction.
- the through hole 311 can include a first through hole 315 formed on the first fixing portion 307 and a second through hole 313 formed on the second fixing portion 308 , and a diameter of the first through hole 315 is smaller than a diameter of the second through hole 313 .
- the top of the first fixing portion 307 is slightly recessed downwardly so as to accommodate one end of the spring 299 and to positionally limit one end of the spring 299 .
- An annular groove 314 is recessed at the bottom of the second fixing portion 308 .
- the annular groove 314 is located at the periphery of the second through hole 313 and used for accommodating a sealing ring 301 .
- the sealing ring 301 (also referred to as gasket) is used to strengthen waterproof performance of the body 286 .
- the fixing frame 296 is fixed on the body 286 , an annular protrusion (not labelled) protrudes from a position of the body 286 corresponding to the annular groove 314 , so that the annular protrusion, the annular groove 314 and the sealing ring 301 are mutually cooperated, which not only enables the fixing frame 296 to be closely integrated with the body 286 , but also can provide good waterproof performance.
- the fixing frame 296 is installed and fixed on the fuselage 286 by screws 292 .
- the second fixing portion 308 is provided with two lugs 309 , and each lug 309 is provided with an opening 312 .
- the two lugs 309 are arranged opposite to each other.
- the screws 292 pass through the openings 312 to fix the fixing frame 296 on the body 286 .
- the fixing frame 296 can be installed and fixed on the body 286 in other ways, such as snap-fit, hard interference, etc., without limiting herein.
- the bottom of the second support column 295 is provided with a fixing head 298 , and a metal sheet 300 is installed on the fixing head 298 .
- a displacement sensor 289 is provided in the body 286 .
- the displacement sensor 289 is located under the metal sheet 300 and used to detect a displacement of the second support column 295 .
- the suspension device 288 can further include a compression spring 293 arranged between the fixing frame 296 and the fixing head 298 . One end of the compression spring 293 is received in the second through hole 313 and touches against an inner wall surface of the second fixing portion 308 , and the other end touches against an upper surface of the fixing head 298 .
- the casing 287 can drive the first support column 294 , the flexible connecting member 299 , and the second support column 295 to move upward.
- the compression spring 293 is compressed. If the displacement sensor 289 detects the second support column 295 is displaced and the detected displacement exceeds a preset value, an induction signal is sent to the control assembly, and the control assembly then sends a control signal to the cutting assembly to stop the mower. When the external force disappears, a restoring force of the compression spring 293 can prompt the second support column 295 , the flexible connecting member 299 , and the first support column 294 to return to the initial position. In this case, the mower can resume its work.
- the suspension device 288 can further include a dust-proof rubber sleeve 297 covering the first support column 294 , a flexible connecting member 299 , and a second support column 295 .
- An open end at one side of the dustproof rubber sleeve 297 is positioned in the groove 303 , and another open end at the other side is positioned in the fixing frame 296 .
- a limiting space 310 is provided between the first fixing portion 307 and the second fixing portion 308 of the fixing frame 296 .
- the dust-proof rubber sleeve 297 is substantially in a column shape.
- the top open end of the dust-proof rubber sleeve 297 is positioned in the groove 303 , and the bottom open end is positioned in the limiting space 310 , so as to protect the flexible connecting member 299 , a connecting position of the flexible connecting member 299 and the first support column 294 , and a connecting position of the flexible connecting member 299 and the second support column 295 .
- suspension devices 288 are respectively arranged at the four corners of the body 286 .
- the number and positions of the suspension devices 288 can be changed, without being limited herein.
- the casing 287 cannot move disorderly.
- the casing 287 may stop while the body 286 may continue to move forward, which may cause a relative displacement between the body 286 and the casing 287 .
- the collision sensor on the body 286 (not shown) sends a collision signal to the control assembly, and the control assembly then controls the mower to reverse or retreat.
- the rubber cap 291 since the rubber cap 291 is fixed on the casing 287 , the rubber cap 291 may drive the first support column 294 to deflect. Since the second support column 295 is housed in a cylindrical hole of the body 286 , a horizontal degree of free-space is small, and therefore the rubber cap 291 may drive the spring 299 to deflect at the same time.
- the spring 299 may not directly return to its original state, but may continue to vibrate/shake.
- both the spring 299 and the rubber cap 291 can be deformed.
- the rubber cap 291 can include a damping effect and can offset vibration. Therefore, the rubber cap 291 can be used to absorb/offset part of the vibration to prevent the body 286 from cracking, thereby greatly extending the service life of the mower and reducing the use cost.
- the suspension device 288 is configured to include the first support column 294 , the second support column 295 , and the flexible connecting member 299 connecting the first support column 294 and the second support column 295 .
- the first support column 294 is connected to the casing 287
- the second support column 295 is connected to the body 286 , so that the casing 287 cannot move disorderly during normal operation.
- the casing 287 can flexibly move relative to the body 286 in the direction perpendicular to the body 286 and/or in the horizontal direction when it collides with an obstacle.
- an embodiment of the disclosure can include a collision sensor 677 for detecting collisions.
- the collision sensor 677 can include a magnet fixing structure 674 .
- the collision sensor 677 can include a magnet 675 , the magnet fixing structure 674 , and a Hall sensor 678 corresponding to the magnet fixing structure 674 .
- the magnet fixing structure 674 and the Hall sensor 678 are respectively and fixedly arranged on the housing 1 and a mower body (including the cutting assembly 616 , the walking assembly 8 and the battery pack assembly).
- the mower body is provided with a circuit board 679
- the Hall sensor 678 is electrically connected to the circuit board 679
- the Hall sensor 678 is correspondingly disposed directly under the magnet fixing structure 674 .
- the collision sensor 677 can be used to detect collision.
- the number of Hall sensors 678 can be more.
- the mower may control the walking assembly 8 to retreat in the collision direction, so as to avoid a possible subsequent collision.
- the magnet fixing structure 674 can include a first cavity and a second cavity.
- the first cavity extends in the vertical direction, the first cavity is cylindrical, and the second cavity extends in the horizontal direction and is arranged above the first cavity.
- the first cavity is provided with the columnar magnet 675
- the second cavity is provided with a metal sheet 676 for the magnet 675 to pull, so as to fix the magnet 675 in the first cavity.
- the magnet fixing structure 674 may vibrate, so that the magnet 675 is displaced in the first cavity.
- the Hall sensor 678 may generate a corresponding Hall voltage to determine that the mower encountered a collision.
- the first cavity may have other regular shapes, and the magnet 675 is correspondingly set in the first cavity to have a corresponding shape including but not limited to a cube and other shapes, without being limited herein.
- the first cavity is provided with a hole with an opening facing downward, and the hole is used for fixing the magnet 675 to pull toward the metal sheet 676 , particularly pulling into contact with the metal sheet 676 arranged in the second cavity above the first cavity.
- the hole is circular in shape, and a diameter of the hole is larger than a diameter of the magnet 675 , so that the magnet 675 and the metal sheet 676 can be magnetically connected.
- the hole may also be formed on a side surface of the first cavity, and the magnet 675 may be correspondingly inserted through the hole on the sidewall of the first cavity.
- the magnet 675 can be enclosed in the first cavity, without being limited herein.
- the magnet 675 is a permanent magnet, so that the magnet 675 can be pulled toward the metal sheet 676 .
- the magnet 675 may be an electromagnet or an electro-permanent magnet.
- a blocking structure (not shown) is correspondingly provided at the hole at the lower end of the first cavity, so as to prevent the electromagnet from being disengaged after the mower is powered off.
- the magnet 675 is the electro-permanent magnet, the magnet 675 can also be constantly pulled toward the metal sheet 676 . Meanwhile, a magnetic field of the electro-permanent magnet can be controlled by adjusting the current magnitude.
- a spacing/distance between the magnet fixing structure 674 and the Hall sensor 678 in the vertical direction may be less than 10 mm. That is, a vertical distance between the magnet fixing structure 674 and the Hall sensor 678 may be less than 10 mm.
- the distance between the magnet fixing structure 674 and the Hall sensor 678 in the vertical direction can be 1 mm, 5 mm, or 9 mm.
- the distance can also be adjusted according to specific conditions. For example, when the magnet 675 includes a large magnetism, the distance can be increased accordingly; when the magnetism of the magnet 675 is relatively small, the distance can be reduced accordingly to ensure detection accuracy.
- a diameter of the first cavity is larger than a diameter of the magnet 675 , so that the magnet 675 can be displaced in the first cavity.
- the diameter of the first cavity should not be set excessively large, so as to prevent the magnet 675 from deviating from an upright position after displacement, which may cause a decrease in detection accuracy and prevent the magnet 675 from shaking or even falling off when encountering accidentally violent collision.
- the first cavity may also be provided with a reset structure (not shown) for resetting the magnet 675 after displacement, and the reset structure can include, without limitation, a spring, and can be set according to actual needs without being limited herein.
- the first cavity and the second cavity are connected with each other.
- the magnet 675 is magnetically connected to the metal sheet 676 .
- the metal sheet 676 may be fixedly arranged in the second cavity. In this case, the magnet 675 will be relatively displaced with the metal sheet 676 after the mower collides.
- the metal sheet 676 can also be movably arranged in the second cavity instead.
- the second cavity is correspondingly provided with a limiting structure to prevent the metal sheet 676 from being separated. The magnet 675 would bring the metal sheet 676 to move synchronously after the mower collides.
- the first cavity and the second cavity are not connected with each other, and correspondingly, the magnet 675 is magnetically attracted to the metal sheet 676 but is not directly contacted with the metal sheet 676 . After the mower collides, the magnet 675 moves closer to the bottom surface of the second cavity along the first cavity.
- the collision sensor 677 may further include a magnetic reed switch (not shown) for detecting a relative movement of the casing 1 and the mower body in the vertical direction. That is, when the magnet 675 moves in the vertical direction, it controls the reed switch to be on or off, which may control the cutting assembly and walking assembly 8 of the mower to stop working in the case of the casing 1 being disassembled or accidental damage occurred, thereby preventing injury, etc.
- the reed switch can include other forms such as a relay or an inductive sensor, without being limited herein.
- the magnet fixing structure 674 provided by the disclosure is convenient to install and disassemble, which may reduce the production cost.
- an automatic working device may be an intelligent/smart/robotic mower, a vacuum cleaner, etc.
- the intelligent mower is taken as an example for description.
- the intelligent mower can include, without limitation, a housing 1 and a movable upper cover 2 .
- a walking wheel 9 is installed on the housing 1
- a control circuit is installed inside the housing 1
- a manipulation area 369 is provided on the top of the housing 1 .
- the movable upper cover 2 is installed above the casing 1 .
- the movable upper cover 2 can include an outer contour larger than that of the housing 1 , and an opening 20 is provided to expose the manipulation area 369 and convenient for consumers to control the intelligent mower.
- a collision detector is provided between the movable upper cover 2 and the housing 1 , such as a displacement sensor having a Hall sensor and a magnet.
- a collision occurs causing a relative displacement between the movable upper cover 2 and the housing 1
- a change of relative position between the magnet and the Hall sensor brings about a change of magnetic field.
- the Hall sensor may sense the change of magnetic field and output a signal to the control circuit, which may control the intelligent mower to change its moving direction and avoid collisions.
- a connection device is further provided.
- multiple manipulation areas 368 are movably connected between the movable upper cover 2 and the housing 1 of the intelligent mower, so as to allow the movable upper cover 2 to be displaced relative to the housing 1 .
- there may be three manipulation areas 368 two of them are located at the rear of the intelligent mower, and the other one is located at the front of the intelligent mower.
- the manipulation areas 368 of the disclosure greatly facilitates the removal the upper cover and avoids the problem of the upper cover easily falling off.
- the manipulation area 368 of the disclosure can include a connecting rod 371 and a connecting base.
- the connecting rod 371 is fixed on the housing 1
- the connecting base is fixed on the movable upper cover 2 .
- the connecting rod 371 can include a connecting head 378 .
- the connecting head 378 is movably arranged inside the connecting base so that the housing 1 and the movable upper cover 2 are movably connected.
- the connecting base can include a mounting base 372 , a locking member 373 , and a bottom plate 374 .
- the bottom plate 374 is located on the bottom side of the mounting base 372
- the locking member 373 is located between the mounting base 372 and the bottom plate 374 .
- the mounting base 372 is provided with a cavity 379 , the locking member 373 is contained in the cavity 379 and the top thereof is exposed for operation by the operator.
- the locking member 373 is provided with an annular cavity 380 , and an inner wall of the annular cavity 380 is provided with an internal thread 404 .
- the locking member 373 is further provided with a recessed cavity 381 located in the annular cavity 380 .
- the recessed cavity 381 is formed by multiple elastic connecting walls 385 .
- Each of the elastic connecting walls 385 may have a certain elasticity and can be deformed appropriately to allow the connecting head 378 in the recessed cavity 381 to be detached from the recessed cavity 381 .
- the connecting head 378 may be spherical, and the recessed cavity 381 may be a spherical recessed cavity.
- the bottom plate 374 is fixed on the mounting base 372 and the bottom plate 374 is provided with a protruding post 386 .
- An outer side of the protruding post 386 is provided with an external thread 405 , which can be threadedly connected with the internal thread 404 of the annular cavity 380 .
- the protruding post 386 is a hollow structure, and the inner of the protruding post 386 has an adjustment cavity 388 that penetrates up and down.
- the locking member 373 and the bottom plate 374 are assembled from the bottom side of the mounting base 372 . In particular, the locking member 373 and the bottom plate 374 may first be screwed together, and then assembled together on the mounting base 372 .
- the annular cavity 380 of the locking member 373 is located in the cavity 379 , the protruding post 386 of the bottom plate 374 extends into the annular cavity 380 , the external thread 405 matches with the internal thread 404 of the annular cavity 380 , and the recessed cavity 381 of the locking member 373 is located inside the adjustment cavity 388 of the protruding post 386 .
- the connecting head 378 of the connecting rod 371 passes through the bottom plate 374 and is movably received in the recessed cavity 381 .
- the bottom plate 374 is locked onto the bottom side of the mounting base 372 by screws 375 , and its position remains unchanged relative to the mounting base 372 .
- the threaded connection between the locking member 373 and the bottom plate 374 enables the locking member 373 to rotate and move up and down, which in turn drives the elastic connecting walls 385 to move up and down in the adjustment cavity 388 .
- the adjustment cavity 388 may be substantially cylindrical with a stepped inner wall and a diameter of the adjustment cavity 388 near the bottom is smaller.
- the connecting head 378 may be detached from the recessed cavity 381 and separated from the movable upper cover 2 , so that the movable upper cover 2 and the casing 1 can be separated.
- the inner wall surface of the adjustment cavity 388 restricts an outward deformation of the elastic connecting walls 385 , thereby restricting the connecting head 378 in the cavity 381 and keeping the movable upper cover 2 connected to the housing 1 .
- the above restriction can be that the inner wall surface of the adjustment cavity 388 touches against the elastic connecting walls 385 , or the inner wall surface of the adjustment cavity 388 is very close to the elastic connecting walls 385 .
- the elastic connecting walls 385 can be slightly expanded and deformed, the degree of deformation is insufficient to make the connecting head 378 being detached from the recessed cavity 381 .
- the locking member 373 can include a releasing position and a locking position.
- the elastic connecting walls 385 can expand and deform outward, allowing the connecting head 378 to be detached from the recessed cavity 381 , and the connecting base and the connecting rod 371 to be separated from each other.
- the elastic connecting walls 385 are restricted by the inner wall surface of the adjustment cavity 388 and cannot expand outwards and deform enough, so that the connecting head 378 is restricted in the recessed cavity 381 , and the connecting base and the connecting rod 371 are connected with each other. Therefore, the releasing position and the locking position of the locking member 373 can meet different usage requirements of the manipulation area 368 .
- the locking member 373 when the intelligent mower with the manipulation area 368 is in normal use, the locking member 373 is in the locking position. Since the connecting head 378 is restricted in the recessed cavity 381 , even if the movable upper cover 2 is lifted during carrying of the intelligent mower, it will not cause a separation of the upper cover 2 from the housing 1 . When an operator needs to remove the movable upper cover 2 for cleaning or maintenance, the locking member 373 can be rotated to the releasing position, and the movable upper cover 2 can be lifted up and easily removed.
- the operator can place the movable upper cover 2 on the housing 1 , insert the connecting head 378 into the recessed cavity 381 , then turn the locking member 373 from the releasing position to the locking position, and the intelligent mower can continue its normal work.
- the bottom plate 374 cannot move up and down, and the locking member 373 can move up and down when rotating.
- the locking member 373 can be set to not-able-to move up and down, the bottom plate 374 can be driven to move up and down when rotates the locking member 373 , and other structures can remain unchanged.
- the locking member 373 is in the releasing position, the bottom plate 374 is at a high position, and the connecting head 378 can escape from the recessed cavity 381 .
- the connecting head 378 is confined in the recessed cavity 381 .
- the existence of the gap A between the inner wall surface of the adjustment cavity 388 and the outer side surface S 1 of the elastic connecting walls 385 enables the elastic connecting walls 385 to expand outwards.
- the gap A may not exist, that is, when the locking member 373 is in the releasing position, the elastic connecting walls 385 are located outside the adjustment cavity 388 , so that the elastic connecting walls 385 can expand outwards without restriction.
- the above embodiment can be utilized especially when the threaded connection between the locking member 373 and the bottom plate 374 can produce sufficient up and down displacement.
- the bottom plate 374 is fixed relative to the mounting base 372 .
- the bottom plate 374 and the mounting seat 372 may be assembled together.
- the bottom plate 374 can be manufactured integrally with the mounting base 372 or riveted together after being manufactured separately.
- the locking member 373 is movably arranged relative to the mounting base 372 , meaning the locking member 373 can rotate, or move up and down. The following description takes the bottom plate 374 and the mounting seat 372 set separately as an example.
- FIG. 120 and FIG. 121 are schematic perspective views of the mounting base 372 .
- the mounting base 372 can include a top wall 393 and an annular side wall 395 extending downward from the middle of the top wall 393 .
- the annular side wall 395 and the top wall 393 together form the aforementioned cavity 379 .
- the bottom plate 374 is installed on the bottom surface of the annular side wall 395 , and the locking member 373 is accommodated in the cavity 379 .
- the top wall 393 is substantially circular, and a through hole 394 is provided at the center of the top wall 393 for the locking member 373 to be partially exposed.
- the lower side of the top wall 393 is provided with a pair of mounting posts 396 , which are respectively located at opposite ends of the cavity 379 for fixing screws 375 and mounting the bottom plate 374 to the bottom surface of the mounting base 372 .
- the annular side wall 395 is provided with several protruding ribs 397 connected to the top wall 393 , the protruding ribs 397 can strengthen the strength of the annular side wall 395 .
- FIG. 122 and FIG. 123 are schematic perspective views of the locking member 373 .
- the locking member 373 can include a column 399 and an operating part 400 on the top of the column 399 .
- the column 399 is approximately cylindrical with an open bottom.
- the operating part 400 is also cylindrical and located at the center of the top surface of the column 399 .
- a diameter of the operating part 400 is smaller than a diameter of the column 399 .
- a diameter of the through hole 394 of the top wall 393 of the mounting base 372 is larger than the diameter of the operating part 400 , but smaller than the diameter of the column 399 , so that the operating part 400 can protrude into the through hole 394 and expose at outside of the mounting base 372 .
- the movable upper cover 2 is provided with a hole (not labeled) to expose the operating part 400 for consumers to operate.
- the column 399 is always restricted below the through hole 394 .
- the top of the operating part 400 is provided with a groove 401 , and when the operator needs to turn the locking member 373 , a screwdriver or other tool can be used to snap into the groove 401 to drive the locking member 373 .
- the annular cavity 380 with the internal thread 404 is formed in the column 399 .
- the column 399 is also provided with the elastic connecting walls 385 and the recessed cavity 381 formed by the elastic connecting walls 385 .
- a center line of the recessed cavity 381 overlaps with a center line of the operation part 400 , and when the operation part 400 is rotated, the recessed cavity 381 will not move eccentrically.
- there may be four elastic connecting walls 385 with the adjacent ones of the elastic connecting walls 385 having a gap therebetween, so that the connecting walls 385 are elastic and can be deformed outwards.
- the locking member 373 can further include a positioning member 402 beside the column 399 .
- the positioning member 402 is roughly in the shape of an arc and surrounds the column 399 , and the positioning member 402 and the column 399 form a gap.
- One end of the positioning member 402 is connected to the column 399 , so that the positioning member 402 can include certain elasticity and can be deformed appropriately.
- a protrusion 403 is provided on an outer surface of the positioning member 402 .
- the inner wall of the cavity 379 is further provided with two vertical positioning grooves 398 spaced apart.
- the positioning member 402 drives the protrusion 403 to rotate and thereby engage with corresponding positioning grooves 398 respectively in the releasing position and the locking position.
- An engaging force of the positioning grooves 398 of the positioning member 402 can prevent the locking member 373 from rotating and shifting by itself when the consumer is not operating. Meanwhile, it is convenient for consumers to obtain a clear response whether the locking member 373 is turned into proper position during operation.
- a top surface of the top wall 393 is provided with an indication mark 376 around the through hole 394 , the indication mark 376 can further tell the consumer whether the locking member 373 is turned into proper position.
- the indication mark 376 can include “0” and “1”.
- the top surface of the operating part 400 of the locking member 373 is provided with an arrow used together with the indication mark 376 .
- the arrow pointing to “0” indicates that the locking member 373 is in the released position
- the arrow pointing to “1” indicates that the locking member 373 is in the locking position.
- a directional arrow 329 indicating a rotation direction of the locking member 373 can be arranged between “0” and “1”.
- the protrusion 403 is engaged with the positioning groove 398 .
- “0” and “1” can be represented by other words or graphics, such as “release” or “lock”, “separation” or “connection”, unlock and unlock icons, etc., without being limited herein.
- FIG. 124 is a schematic perspective view of the bottom plate 374 .
- the bottom plate 374 is provided with a bottom wall 406 and the protruding post 386 extending upward from the middle of the bottom wall 406 .
- the bottom wall 406 is substantially diamond-shaped, and two opposite corners are provided with mounting holes 407 .
- the screws 375 pass through the mounting holes 407 respectively and are fixed to the mounting posts 396 of the mounting base 372 to fix the bottom plate 374 to the mounting base 372 .
- FIG. 125 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the bottom plate 374 .
- the inner side wall of the adjustment cavity 388 is provided with a step, so that different height positions of the adjustment cavity 388 have different inner diameters.
- the inner wall of the adjustment cavity 388 is divided into an upper inner wall 384 and a lower inner wall 391 by the step.
- the step is located between the upper inner wall 384 and the upper inner wall 384 and the step is provided with a chamfer.
- outer surfaces of the elastic connecting walls 385 are located on one circle, and a diameter of the circle is defined as an outer diameter of the elastic connecting walls 385 .
- the inner diameter of the upper inner wall 384 is greater than the outer diameter of the elastic connecting walls 385
- the inner diameter of the lower inner wall 391 is equal to the outer diameter of the elastic connecting walls 385 .
- the term “equal to” herein means substantially equal, that is, the difference in size between the inner diameter of the lower inner wall 391 and the outer diameter of the elastic connecting walls 385 is not enough to allow the elastic connecting walls 385 to deform enough so that the connecting head 378 can escape from the recessed cavity 381 .
- the elastic connecting walls 385 when the elastic connecting walls 385 are aligned with the upper inner wall 384 but staggered up and down with the lower inner wall 391 , the elastic connecting walls 385 can be deformed outwards, which is corresponding to the releasing position of the locking member 373 .
- the elastic connecting walls 385 are at least partially aligned with the lower inner wall 391 , the elastic connecting walls 385 are restricted from deforming outwards, which is corresponding to the locking position of the locking member 373 .
- the adjustment cavity 388 is further provided with another ring-shaped stopping step 392 below the lower inner wall 391 .
- An inner diameter of the stopping step 392 is smaller than the outer diameter of the elastic connecting walls 385 .
- the operating portion 400 of the locking member 373 is located in the through hole 394 of the mounting base 372 , and the arrow on the operating portion 400 points to “0” of the mounting base 372 .
- the locking member 373 is in the releasing position.
- the connecting head 378 can be easily inserted into the recessed cavity 381 formed by the elastic connecting walls 385 , and the manipulation area 368 is movably connected to the mower body 1 and the movable upper cover 2 .
- the operating portion 400 is rotated by a tool to rotate the locking member 373 until the arrow on the operating portion 400 points to “1”, which indicates that the rotation is in place.
- the locking member 373 moves downwardly to the locking position while rotating, as shown in FIG. 123 , the connecting head 378 is held in the recessed cavity 381 , which can prevent the movable upper cover 2 from being easily separated from the mower body 1 .
- the locking member 373 when the intelligent mower is in normal use, the locking member 373 is always in the locking position to prevent the movable upper cover 2 from being separated from the mower body 1 .
- the locking member 373 is rotated in a reverse direction, which makes it moves from the locking position to the releasing position, the connecting head 378 can be easily separated from the recessed cavity 381 , and then the movable upper cover 2 can be removed simply and conveniently.
- a switch 316 can include a casing 1 and a pressing device disposed above the casing 1 .
- a magnet 319 is provided on the pressing device, and a reed switch 320 that senses a magnetic field of the magnet 319 is provided in the casing 1 .
- the switch 316 is further provided with a fixing portion 322 fixed on the upper side of the casing 1 .
- the pressing device is pivotally connected to the top of the fixing portion 322 via a pivot shaft 321 and can rotate above the casing 1 with the pivot shaft 321 as a center.
- the fixing portion 322 connects the casing 1 and the pressing device, and the fixing portion 322 may be separately provided and fixed to the casing 1 , or it may be integrally formed with the casing 1 . Positions of the reed switch 320 and the magnet 319 correspond to each other. A direction in which the magnet 319 and the reed switch 320 are oppositely arranged is defined as a first direction. When the pressing device is moved/triggered, a distance between the magnet 319 and the reed switch 320 in the first direction can be changed so as to switch on/off the reed switch 320 .
- the pressing device can include a main body portion 323 .
- the main body portion 323 is substantially in the shape of a horizontal plate.
- a middle portion of the main body portion 323 is extended to form a connecting portion 325 .
- the connecting portion 325 is connected with a pivot shaft 321 , and is used for rotatably fixing the pressing device to the fixing portion 322 .
- the pressing device can further include a protruding portion 324 protruding from the main body portion 323 toward the reed switch 320 .
- One end of the protruding portion 324 close to the reed switch 320 can include a receiving groove (not labelled).
- the receiving groove can include an opening toward the reed switch 320 and is used for receiving the magnet 319 .
- the magnet 319 is fixed in the receiving groove which allows a side of the magnet 319 facing toward the reed switch 320 to be exposed.
- the main body portion 323 can include a first pressing part 332 and a second pressing part 333 .
- two sides of the connecting portion 325 are defined as right side and left side respectively.
- the magnet 319 and the reed switch 320 are located on the right side, the first pressing part 332 is located on the left side, and the second pressing part 333 is located on the right side.
- the protruding portion 324 protrudes from an end of the second pressing part 333 toward the reed switch 320 .
- the first pressing part 332 is located away from the magnet 319 .
- the reed switch 320 can sense a magnetic field of the magnet 319 .
- two pieces of magnetic reeds of the reed switch 320 are contacted with each other, the reed switch 320 is in a switched-on state.
- the first pressing part 332 which would cause the main body portion 323 to rotate counterclockwise around the pivot shaft 321 and thereby increase the distance between the magnet 319 and the reed switch 320
- the reed switch 320 cannot sense the magnetic field of the magnet 319 .
- the two pieces of magnetic reeds of the reed switch 320 will return to an original non-contact state, and the reed switch 320 is switched off.
- the pressing device can further include a first abutting part 330 extending downwards from an end of the first pressing part 332 and a second abutting part 331 extending downwards from an end of the second pressing part 333 .
- the casing 1 is provided with a first mating surface 327 for being touched against the first abutting part 330 and a second mating surface 329 for being touched against the second abutting part 331 .
- the first mating surface 327 and the second mating surface 329 are used to limit rotation ranges of the first pressing part 332 and the second abutting part 331 .
- the pressing device can further include an abutting part 334 protruding downwards from a portion of the first pressing part 332 near the connecting portion 325 .
- the abutting part 334 protrudes downwards from the bottom side of the main body portion 323 .
- the abutting part 334 can include an arc-shaped abutting surface
- the fixing portion 322 also can include an arc-shaped contact surface, so as to facilitate the abutting part 334 and the fixing portion 322 to touch against each other and thereby limit a rotation range of the pressing device.
- the pressing device can further include a first switch cap 326 and a second switch cap 328 respectively provided on upper surfaces of the first pressing part 332 and the second pressing part 333 .
- the first switch cap 326 and the main body portion 323 are detachably connected, and the second switch cap 328 and the main body portion 323 are also detachably connected.
- the first switch cap 326 , the second switch cap 328 , and the main body 323 may be integrally constructed to form a one-piece structure.
- the switch 316 is installed on the mower.
- the mower can include a start-stop switch and a main switch.
- the start-stop switch may be the switch 316
- the main switch may be the switch 316
- both the start-stop switch and the main switch are switches 316 .
- the mower is a robotic lawn mower.
- the switch 316 As illustrated in FIG. 127 , a working process of the switch 316 will be described below.
- the main body portion 323 rotates counterclockwise around the pivot shaft 321 , the magnet 319 is moved far away from the reed switch 320 .
- the reed switch 320 cannot senses the magnetic field of the magnet 319 , the two pieces of magnetic reeds of the reed switch 320 return to the original non-contact state, the reed switch 320 is at the switched-off state, the switch 316 is turned off, and the mower stops working.
- the reed switch 320 can sense the magnetic field of the magnet 319 , the two pieces of magnetic reeds of the reed switch 320 are contacted with each other, the reed switch 320 is at a switched-on state, the switch 316 is turned on, and the mower can resume working.
- the switch 316 can be installed as an independent component on other garden tools or other control objects, especially as a control switch for products that require waterproofing.
- the solutions that are the same as or similar to the illustrated embodiment are all covered by the protection scope of the disclosure.
- the reed switch 320 is arranged inside the casing 1 , and the magnet 319 is arranged outside the casing 1 , so that the distance between the magnet 319 and the reed switch 320 can be controlled to control on-off states of the reed switch 320 , which may in turn control the turned-on and turned-off states of the switch 316 .
- This arrangement not only does not require an opening on the casing 1 , but also reduces the risk of water ingress to the switch and prolongs the service life of the switch.
- the reed switch 320 is controlled by a magnetic field and does not require an external power supply, which saves electrical energy.
- the lawn mower with the switch 316 can provide a stable working state and a long battery life.
- a charging station system can include a charging station 335 and a ceiling 336 .
- the charging station 335 can include a bottom plate 338 laid on the ground and a docking pile 339 on a side of the bottom plate 338 .
- the docking pile 339 is provided with a protruding charging seat 340 .
- the charging seat 340 is matched with the intelligent mower and used for charging the battery pack in the intelligent mower.
- the ceiling 336 can include a connecting base 337 detachably assembled on the docking pile 339 of the charging station 335 and a cover 342 pivotally connected to the connecting base 337 .
- a projection of the ceiling 336 on the ground roughly covers the bottom plate 338 , which effectively shields and protects the intelligent mower, including sun shading, rain sheltering, and avoiding external collisions.
- the ceiling 336 of the charging station system of the disclosure is detachably fixed, and when repairs are needed, the ceiling 336 can be removed first and then repair is made, which makes the operation more convenient.
- the connecting base 337 can include a connecting portion 350 snapped on the periphery of the docking pile 339 of the charging station 335 and a supporting portion 351 extending laterally from the connecting portion 350 .
- the supporting portion 351 extends laterally from the top end of the connecting portion 350 toward the bottom plate 338 and is used to stably support the cover 342 assembled on the connecting base 337 .
- a cross section of the connecting portion 350 is roughly U-shaped and is arranged around the rear surface and opposite side surfaces of the docking pile 339 .
- the connecting portion 350 covers the top of the docking pile 339 .
- the bottom of the connecting portion 350 is detachably mounted to the side surfaces of the docking pile 339 by screws (not shown).
- the supporting portion 351 is provided with a storage space 352 with an opening upward, which is used for accommodating maintenance tools such as handles, screwdrivers, screws for repairing the ceiling 336 or the charging station 335 .
- the connecting base 337 can further include multiple protruding ribs 353 arranged in the storage space 352 . The protruding ribs 353 divide the storage space 352 into multiple areas, so that users can place tools of different types or sizes in different areas.
- the cover 342 is arranged roughly in the shape of a lid, which can include a top wall 356 and a side wall 357 extending downwards from the circumference of the top wall 356 .
- the cover 342 can be used for shading sun and sheltering rain when the intelligent mower is parked at the charging station 335 for charging.
- the cover 342 can also include a protruding portion 343 bulging upwards and a groove 363 corresponding to the protruding portion 343 .
- the protruding portion 343 is formed by a portion of the top wall 356 of the cover 342 corresponding to the storage space 352 of the connecting base 337 bulging upwards.
- the groove 363 is correspondingly disposed below the protruding portion 343 and directly above the storage space 352 of the connecting base 337 .
- the protruding portion 343 can reinforce the strength of the cover 342 , and the groove 363 can increase the volume of the storage space 352 .
- the cover 342 can further include a transparent observation window 344 buckled on the top wall 356 .
- the observation window 344 is set at a position of the top wall 356 in front of the protruding portion 343 to allow the user to observe a charging state of the intelligent lawn mower at the charging station 335 .
- the observation window 344 can include a lid-shaped main body 360 and a snapping portion 441 extending downwardly from the periphery of the main body 360 .
- the top wall 356 of the cover 342 can include a through hole 358 at a position corresponding to the observation window 344 .
- a side wall of the through hole 358 is provided with a fitting groove 401 that cooperates with the snapping portion 441 of the observation window 344 .
- the observation window 344 is made of a transparent material and is fitted into the through hole 358 of the cover 342 .
- the observation window 344 is substantially rectangular and located at the front of the protruding portion 343 and further staggered from the supporting portion 351 .
- a size of the observation window 344 should be larger than a display area on the intelligent mower to facilitate observation.
- the cover 342 is pivotally assembled on the supporting portion 351 , and can be opened or closed relative to the connecting base 337 .
- the ceiling 336 can further include a resilient buckle 345 for movably buckling the cover 342 onto the connecting base 337 .
- the buckle 345 can be fixed to one of the connecting base 337 and the cover 342 , and can be connected with the other resilient buckle.
- the setting of the buckle 345 requires the user to apply a certain external force to open the cover 342 , which can prevent the cover 342 from being blown over when the wind is strong, and can also improve the user’s operating feel.
- the buckle feeling can help the user to determine whether the cover 342 is in place.
- the buckle 345 is an inverted U-shaped metal resilient piece, which can include a fixing piece 346 fixed to the cover 342 by a screw 348 and two buckle arms 347 extending downwards from opposite ends of the fixing piece 346 respectively.
- the fixing piece 346 is fixed to a screw post 367 on the bottom surface of the cover 342 by the screw 348 .
- the fixing piece 346 is assembled on the bottom of the protruding portion 343 of the cover 342 .
- the fixing piece 346 is located at an end of the protruding portion 343 of the cover 342 close to the observation window 344 .
- the supporting portion 351 of the connecting base 337 is provided with a buckling portion 354 protruding forward at an end away from the connecting portion 350 .
- the buckling portion 354 can be matched with the buckling arms 347 of the buckle 345 , to buckle the cover on the connecting base 337 .
- the buckling portion 354 of the supporting portion 351 of the connecting base 337 is accommodated in a space formed by the buckling arms 347 of the buckle 345 .
- the user needs to open the storage space 352 , he/she needs to overcome a buckling force of the buckle 345 , and then lift the cover 342 upwards.
- FIG. 134 which shows a state in which the cover 342 is opened, the buckle 345 is retained on the buckling portion 354 , and the matching manner of the buckle 345 and the buckling portion 354 is clearly illustrated.
- a rear edge of the cover 342 is provided with a notch 362 and two pivot ports 365 located on opposite sides of the notch 362 .
- the pivot portions 365 protrude downwards from the cover 342 and are provided with pivot holes 364 .
- Two pivot shafts 349 are respectively fixed to two sides of the connecting base 337 after passing through the two pivot holes 364 , so as to pivotally connect the cover 342 to the connecting base 337 .
- the pivot 349 is similar to the structure of a tack, and an end thereof is provided with an elastic buckle structure.
- the elastic buckle structure is inserted into a corresponding hole (not labeled) of the connecting base 337 and then buckles with an edge of the hole.
- the two sides of the connecting base 337 are further provided with stoppers 366 for the opened cover 342 to bear against, which can limit an opened angle of the cover 342 and prevent the cover 342 from overturning and causing inconvenience in use.
- the notch 362 of the cover 342 is located in an area of the aforementioned protruding portion 343 , and the top of the connecting base 337 is further provided with a convex portion 355 .
- the convex portion 355 is inserted into the notch 362 , a top surface of the convex portion 355 and a top surface of the protruding portion 343 are coplanar, which can improve the overall appearance of the ceiling 336 and enhance the beauty of product.
- to assemble first fix the buckle 345 to the cover 342 , and then pivotally connect the cover 342 to the connecting base 337 to form the ceiling 336 .
- the buckle 345 is fastened/buckled to the buckling portion 354 of the connecting base 337 to keep the cover 342 in a closed state, and then the assembled ceiling 336 is fixed to the charging station 335 .
- the installation of the charging station system with the ceiling 336 is completed.
- the ceiling 336 can be sold separately as a spare part, and can be installed on an existing charging station after the user purchases it. If the existing charging station has been installed with a casing protecting the docking pile 339 , the casing can be removed first, and then the connecting base 337 can be detachably installed on the docking pile 339 , so that the ceiling 336 can be assembled to the charging station 335 to form a charging station system.
- the ceiling 336 of the disclosure is convenient to disassemble, easy to maintain, and can be adapted to existing charging stations, and thus has a wide range of applications and flexibility.
- FIG. 135 through FIG. 137 show an embodiment of a safety switch 421 of the disclosure rotated to a first position.
- the safety switch 421 is in a stopped state.
- FIG. 138 and FIG. 139 show a state of use when the safety switch 421 is rotated to a second position.
- the safety switch 421 is in an activated state.
- the safety switch 421 is installed on a casing 422 or a chassis of a garden tool.
- the garden tool can be a robotic mower or any other garden tool to which the safety switch 421 can be applied.
- the garden tool is driven by an engine (not shown).
- the engine may be an internal combustion engine or a driving engine.
- the engine in the disclosure is an electric motor.
- FIG. 135 is a schematic exploded view of the safety switch 421 of the disclosure in the first position.
- the safety switch 421 is installed on the casing 422 of the garden tool.
- the safety switch 421 can include a first button 423 and a second button 438 arranged on the first button 423 .
- the safety switch 421 can be used to start a power device (not shown) of the engine so as to provide power to the engine.
- the safety switch 421 can further include a pivot shaft 424 connected to the casing 422 .
- the first button 423 is pivotally connected to the pivot shaft 424 .
- the first button 423 can include a first part 425 and a second part 426 .
- the first part 425 and the second part 426 are respectively provided on two sides of the pivot shaft 424
- the second button 438 is provided on the second part 426 .
- the first button 423 can rotate around the pivot shaft 424 and between a first position and a second position.
- the first button 423 When a tail end of the first part 425 is close to the casing 422 , the first button 423 is in the first position; and when a tail end of the second part 426 is close to the casing 422 , the first button 423 is in the second position.
- the second button 438 can include a first sliding button 427 and a second sliding button 428 .
- the safety switch 421 is installed on a horizontal surface 429 of the casing 422
- the second sliding button 428 is located beside the first button 423
- the first sliding button 427 is located above the second sliding button 428 .
- the first sliding button 427 and the second sliding button 428 are manufactured separately and subsequently assembled together.
- the first sliding button 427 is provided with a protrusion 439 protruding toward the second sliding button 428 (downwardly).
- the second sliding button 428 is provided with a cavity 430 , and the protrusion 439 is placed in the cavity 430 to connect the first sliding button 427 with the second sliding button 428 .
- Such arrangement facilitates the assembly and disassembly of the safety switch 421 .
- the second button 438 is further provided with a biasing device 431 .
- the biasing device 431 is positioned and installed on the second sliding button 428 via a guiding pin 440 .
- the guiding pin 440 is disposed on the second sliding button 428 and extends in a direction substantially parallel to a first upper surface 432 of the first sliding button 427 .
- the guiding pin 440 can be used to fix and guide the biasing device 431 to ensure that the biasing device 431 is compressed and extended without deviating from its expansion and contraction direction.
- the expansion and contraction direction of the biasing device 431 can be described as an axial direction of a central axis formed along a center of the biasing device 431 .
- the biasing device 431 may be a coil spring or any other suitable spring device.
- the first button 423 can include a first snapping portion 434 and a second snapping portion 435 .
- the first snapping portion 434 is disposed above the second snapping portion 435 .
- the pivot shaft 424 is disposed on the second snapping portion 435 . Alternately, the pivot shaft 424 may penetrate through the second snapping portion 435 .
- the second snapping portion 435 is provided with a sliding groove 436 at an end close to the second sliding button 428 . A side of the sliding groove 436 facing toward the second sliding button 428 is opened, and the sliding groove 436 is provided with a limiting surface 16 facing toward the opening.
- the second sliding button 428 is provided with a protrusion 20 placed in the sliding groove 436 .
- the protrusion 20 can slide along the sliding groove 436 .
- the biasing device 431 and the guiding pin 440 are fixedly housed in the protrusion 20 .
- the biasing device 431 is located in the sliding groove 436 , and two ends of the biasing device 431 are pressed against the limiting surface 16 and the second sliding button 428 respectively.
- the first button 423 is provided with a second upper surface 445 extending in a longitudinal direction
- the second button 438 is slidably disposed on the second upper surface 445 along the longitudinal direction.
- the second button 438 is slidable in the front and rear directions toward two opposite outer boundaries of the casing 422 .
- the second button 438 can further include a pressing portion 441 extending toward the casing 422 .
- the pressing portion 441 is disposed at an end of the second sliding button 428 facing away from the first button 423 .
- the casing 422 can include an abutting portion 442 extending toward the safety switch 421 and the second sliding button 428 (i.e., extending upwards).
- the first sliding button 427 can include a first protrusion 446 and a second protrusion 447 protruding toward the casing 422 .
- the first protrusion 446 and the second protrusion 447 are disposed on a third lower surface 448 of the first sliding button 427 .
- the second part 426 of the first button 423 is provided with an accommodation chamber
- the first sliding button 427 of the second button 438 covers the accommodation chamber
- the protrusion 439 is inserted into the accommodation chamber to connect with the second sliding button 428 .
- the first button 423 is provided with a first receiving portion 449 for receiving the first protrusion 446 and a second receiving portion 450 for receiving the second protrusion 447 .
- the first accommodating portion 449 is provided with a first wall portion 451 and a second wall portion 452 extending toward the first sliding button 427 ;
- the second accommodating portion 450 is provided with a third wall portion 453 and a fourth wall portion 454 extending toward the first sliding button 427 .
- the first receiving portion 449 and the second receiving portion 450 are both U-shaped. A distance between the first wall portion 451 and the second wall portion 452 , and a distance between the third wall portion 453 and the fourth wall portion 454 can be used to define a moving/sliding distance of the second button 438 relative to the first button 423 . Furthermore, the first receiving portion 449 , the first wall portion 451 , the second wall portion 452 and the first protrusion 446 are arranged in a labyrinth manner. Meanwhile, the second receiving portion 450 , the third wall portion 453 , the fourth wall portion 454 , and the second protrusion 447 are also arranged in a labyrinth manner. Such arrangement can effectively prevent garbage and dirt from entering the interior of the second button 438 one the one hand, and can prevent garbage from entering a use area of the biasing device 431 to cause abnormal use of the second button 438 on the other hand.
- the first button 423 can include the first part 425 and the second part 426 .
- the first part 425 and the second part 426 are respectively arranged on two sides of an axis in an extending direction of the pivot shaft 424 .
- the second button 438 is arranged on the second part 426 .
- the position in which the second button 438 is located shall be deemed the stopping position.
- the position in which the second button 438 is located shall be deemed the starting/activated position.
- a rotation of the first button 423 is restricted and cannot be rotated toward the second position.
- the first part 425 of the first button 423 is close to the casing 422 , and the end 443 of the pressing portion 441 touches against the abutting portion 442 on the casing 422 .
- the second button 438 is slidably connected to the second part 426 , the second button 438 can slide along the second upper surface 445 of the second part 426 , so that the second button 438 can be slidably switched between the stopping position and the starting position. Furthermore, when the second button 438 is switched to the stopping position, the engine is in a power-off state; whereas, when the second button 438 is switched to the starting position, the engine is in the energized state.
- FIG. 138 and FIG. 139 schematic diagrams of the first button 423 being rotated to the second position are disclosed.
- an extending direction of the second upper surface 445 located in a projection area of the safety switch 421 is substantially parallel to an extending direction of the casing 422 .
- the end 443 of the pressing portion 441 touches against the casing 422 .
- the first side surface 455 of the pressing portion 441 and the second side surface 456 of the abutting portion 442 are arranged oppositely, and the first side surface 455 and the second side surface 456 are approximately parallel.
- the restoring force of the biasing device 431 acts on the abutting portion 442 via the pressing portion 441 , so that the safety switch 421 is positioned at the activation/starting position.
- the second sliding button 428 touches against the second snapping portion 435 through a buckling portion 38 , and the second button 438 is in the stopping position.
- the first button 423 is in the second position (as shown in FIG. 37 )
- the second button 438 moves toward the first button 423
- the biasing device 431 is compressed
- the restoring force of the biasing device 431 acts on the second button 438
- the pressing portion 441 touches against the abutting portion 442 , so that the second button 438 is in the activation position.
- the safety switch 421 when the first button 423 rotates to the first position, that is, the first part 425 of the first button 423 rotates around the pivot shaft 424 and obliquely leans against the casing 422 , the safety switch 421 is in a disabled/deactivated state.
- the safety switch 421 When the safety switch 421 is in a deactivated state before being activated, the safety switch 421 is at a start/initial position. That is, at the first position shown in FIG. 133 through FIG. 135 , the second button 438 is in the stopping position.
- the safety switch 421 of the disclosure when the safety switch 421 of the disclosure is activated/started, the safety switch 421 can be switched from the stopping position to the starting position.
- an external force is applied firstly onto the first button 423 in the first position, the first sliding button 427 slides toward the first part 425 of the first button 423 and compresses the biasing device 431 , and the end 443 of the pressing portion 441 is disengaged from the top end of the abutting portion 442 .
- an external force is applied to the second button 438 , so that the second part 426 rotates around the pivot shaft 424 toward the casing 422 until a stopping portion 458 of the second button 438 touches against the casing 422 .
- the safety switch 421 reaches the starting position.
- the biasing device 431 stretches on its own restoring force and drives the second button 438 to move away from the first part 425 and further drives the first side surface 455 of the pressing portion 441 to touch against the second side surface 456 of the abutting portion 442 .
- the safety switch 421 is in the activated state, which can be used to activate the power device of the electric engine/motor and provide power to the electric engine.
- the first part 425 of the first button 423 is pushed to rotate around the pivot 424 toward the casing 422 , the first side surface 455 and the second side surface 456 are separated, and the biasing device 431 drives the second button 438 to move away from the first part 425 .
- the safety switch 421 is in the stopping position and the motor stops working.
- the safety switch 421 of the disclosure is provided with the first button 423 and the second button 438 .
- the second button 438 is controlled to slide during a using process to further control the first button 423 and the second button 438 to rotate with the pivot shaft 424 as an axis, so that the safety switch 421 is in the activated state.
- the safety switch 421 of the disclosure is activated/started by performing two different continuous control actions. Such arrangement makes the safety switch 421 of the disclosure to be fool-proof, and the accidental activation of the garden tool is avoided. Thus, garden tools using the safety switch 421 of the disclosure can have relatively good safety.
- the safety switch 421 of the disclosure can be applied to a robotic mower, a power mower, or any other garden tools suitable for using the safety switch 421 .
- a method for providing power to an engine of a garden tool.
- the garden tool is provided with the safety switch 421 .
- the first button 423 can rotate between the first position and the second position with the pivot shaft 424 as an axis.
- the second button 438 can slide between the stopping position and the starting position.
- the method of using the safety switch 421 specifically can include the following steps.
- Step 1 press the first part of the first button of the safety switch to make it closer to the casing, in order to rotate the first button to the first position; Since the second button is located in the stopping position and touches against the casing, the rotation of the first button toward the second position is restricted.
- Step 2 slide the second button to compress the biasing device, and separate the second button from the casing.
- Step 3 downwardly press the second button so that the first button rotates around the pivot shaft from the first position to the second position, and the second button slides from the stopping position to the starting position under the effect of an elastic force from the biasing device.
- Step 4 place the safety switch in the starting state, which allows the activation of the power plant/device and starting of the engine.
- a light guide member 690 is provided in the disclosure and used for guiding light.
- the light guide member 690 is substantially in a cylindrical shape, and can include a light guide portion 683 , a light output portion 680 , and a light incident portion 691 respectively provided at two ends of the light guide portion 683 in an extending/lengthwise direction.
- the light output portion 680 is arranged at the front end of the light guide portion 683 along the extending direction of the light guide portion 683 .
- the light incident portion 691 is arranged opposite to the light output portion 680 and is located at the tail/rear end of the light guide portion 683 in the extending direction.
- the light guide portion 683 , the light output portion 680 , and the light incident portion 691 are integrally constructed (i.e., one-piece structure).
- the light guide portion 683 , the light output portion 680 , and the light incident portion 691 can be separately manufactured.
- the light guide portion 683 is further provided with guiding parts 688 and a snapping part 686 formed along the extending direction.
- the guiding parts 688 and the snapping part 686 are staggered along the circumferential direction of the light guide portion 683 .
- the guiding parts 688 are used to guide the light guide member 690 to fit with other structure and used to prevent a relative rotation between the light guide member 690 and the other structure, thereby ensuring the stability of the light guide member 690 fitting with the other structure.
- the guiding parts 688 are provided on an outer wall surface of the light guide portion 683 and are formed extending outwards along a radial direction of the light guide portion 683 . Furthermore, the guiding part 688 extends from the tail end of the light guide portion 683 along the extending direction of the light guide portion 683 . In the extending direction of the light guide portion 683 , ends of the guiding part 688 are located below the light output portion 680 .
- the guiding part 688 is provided with a guiding structure 687 at an end of its extending direction, and the guiding structure 687 is formed by inclined guiding surfaces 685 arranged obliquely, so as to make the light guide member 690 connecting with the other structure conveniently.
- the guiding part 688 is substantially rectangular
- the guiding structure 687 is formed by three inclined guiding surfaces 685
- each the inclined guiding surface 685 is a flat surface, so that the guiding structure 687 is roughly in a pyramid shape.
- the inclined guide surface 685 can be in an arc shape, so that the guiding structure 687 is roughly in the shape of a bullet. That is, the specific setting form of the guiding structure 687 in the disclosure can be selected according to actual needs, without limiting herein.
- the two guiding parts 688 there are two guiding parts 688 respectively provided on two sides of the extending direction of the light guide portion 683 .
- the two guiding parts 688 is symmetrically arranged relative to a central axis of the light guide portion 683 .
- one or more than two guiding parts 688 may be provided instead, and when there are more than one guiding part 688 , these guiding parts 688 are evenly distributed on the outer circumferential wall of the light guide portion 683 .
- the number and position of the guiding part 688 in the disclosure can be selected according to actual needs, as long as it can ensure that the guiding part(s) 688 can facilitate the fitting of the light guide member 690 with other structure and can prevent the occurrence of relative rotation between the light guide member 690 and the other structure.
- the snapping part 686 is arranged close to the tail end of the light guide portion 683 to limit a displacement of the light guide part 690 in a connecting direction when the light guide member 690 is connected to other structure, and to prevent the light guide member 690 from detaching from the other structure.
- the setting of the snapping gap 689 can facilitate the fitting of the light guide member 690 with the other structure.
- the snapping part 686 can include a guiding surface 686 b arranged obliquely and an abutting surface 686 a arranged perpendicular to the extending direction. When the light guide member 690 is connected to the other structure, the abutting surface 686 a touches against the other structure, so as to fix the connection position of the light guide member 690 with the other structure.
- the light output portion 680 can include a light-emitting surface 682 and a light blocking wall 681 disposed around the light-emitting surface 682 .
- the light output portion 680 is formed by being recessed from the front end of the light guide portion 683 toward the tail end.
- the light output portion 680 is formed by the outer circumferential surface of the light guide portion 683 extending along the extending direction in a manner of facing away from the tail end of the light guide portion 683 , so that an edge of the light blocking wall 681 is located above the light-emitting surface 682 .
- the light-emitting surface 682 is a flat surface to realize a linear transmission of light.
- the light-emitting surface 682 when configured as a concave/convex surface, the light-emitting surface 682 can be used to realize the convergence/divergence of light, so as to transmit the light to a place that needs to be illuminated.
- the light incident portion 691 is provided in a groove shape and is recessed from the tail end to the front end of the light guide portion 683 , and is further used for accommodating a light-emitting element.
- the light-emitting element can be indicator lamp, an LED and other component used for light-emitting.
- the light guide member 690 can conduct/guide the light emitted from the light-emitting element through the light guide portion 683 and achieve the exporting and transmission of the light through the light output portion 680 .
- the light guide member 690 can further include a sealing member 684 arranged at the front end of the light guide portion 683 , the light guide portion 683 is provided with a receiving groove 692 for receiving the sealing member 684 , and the receiving groove 692 is located on the periphery of the light output portion 680 .
- the sealing member 684 and the receiving groove 692 both are ring-shaped, and the receiving groove 692 is recessed from a center line of the light blocking wall 681 to the tail end of the light guide portion 683 .
- Such arrangement facilitates the connection of the sealing member 684 with the light output portion 680 on the one hand, and can improve the sealing performance when the light guide member 690 is connected to other structure on the other hand.
- an inner wall surface of the receiving groove 692 is sloped so as to further improve the sealing performance of the light guide member 690 connected with the other structure.
- the light guide member 690 is provided with the guiding part(s) 688 and the snapping part 686 for positioning and connecting the light guide member 690 with other structure, which effectively improves the stability of connection between the light guide member 690 and the other structure.
- the arrangement of the sealing member 684 improves the sealing performance of the light guide member 690 connected with the other structure, thereby effectively preventing rainwater from entering the other structure along a gap between the light guide member 690 and the other structure when the light guide member 690 is connected to the other structure.
- a mower provided by the disclosure can include a first casing 641 and a second casing 642 snapped/engaged with each other, a driving unit 695 and a power supply 693 housed between the first casing 641 and the second casing 642 , and a working unit 694 for performing garden work tasks.
- the power supply unit 693 is used to provide power to the driving unit 695
- the driving unit 695 is used to drive the working unit 694 to complete corresponding garden work tasks.
- the first casing 641 is provided with a lamp receiving groove 696 , an indicator lamp 697 corresponding to the lamp receiving groove 696 , and the light guide member 690 accommodated in the lamp receiving groove 696 .
- the light guide member 690 guides light emitted from the indicator lamp 697 from inside of the first casing 641 to outside of the first casing 641 .
- the lamp receiving groove 696 can include guiding slots 696 a for holding the light guide member 690 and a holding slot 696 b for positioning a connection position of the light guide member 690 with the lamp receiving groove 696 .
- the guiding parts 688 of the light guide member 690 are received in the guiding slots 696 a and can slide along the guiding slots 696 a to realize the fitting between the light guide member 690 and the lamp receiving groove 696 , which facilitates the light guide member 690 to be inserted into the first casing 641 on the one hand, and can prevent a relative rotation between the light guide member 690 and the lamp receiving groove 696 on the other hand.
- the stability of the connection between the light guide member 690 and the lamp receiving groove 696 is thereby ensured.
- the abutting surface 686 a of the snapping part 686 touches in the holding slot 696 b to prevent the light guide member 690 from being separated from the lamp receiving groove 696 .
- the guiding parts 688 and the guiding slots 696 a correspond to each other, and the snapping part 686 and the holding slot 696 b are arranged in one-to-one correspondence.
- the snapping part 686 arranged corresponding to the holding slot 696 b .
- the circumferential edge of the lamp receiving groove 696 is further provided with an abutting groove 696 c for accommodating the light blocking wall 681 .
- the sealing member 684 is interposed between the light blocking wall 681 and the abutting groove 696 c , and is accommodated between the abutting groove 696 c and the receiving groove 692 .
- Such arrangement can enable the sealing member 684 to close a connection gap between the lamp receiving groove 696 and the light guide member 690 , thereby ensuring the airtightness of the mower.
- the indicator lamp 697 is used for status indication.
- There may be multiple indicator lamps 697 and the multiple indicator lamps 697 can independently emit lights.
- the first casing 641 is provided with a display panel 695 covering the lamp receiving grooves 696
- the display panel 695 is provided with display areas (not shown) set in one-to-one correspondence with the lamp receiving grooves 696 and the indicator lamps 697 . By way of bright/dark states of the display areas, working states of the mower can be determined.
- the light guide member 690 of the disclosure is provided with the guiding part(s) 688 and the snapping part 686 , so that the light guide member 690 can be firmly connected to the first casing 641 of the mower.
- the setting of the sealing member 684 makes the light guide member 690 be tightly connected with the upper casing of the mower, which prevents rainwater from entering the mower at the connection position of the light guide member 690 with the first casing 641 , and effectively improves waterproof performance and use safety of the mower which uses the light guide member 690 to guide out the light emitted from the indicator lamp 697 .
- a light guide member 700 is also provided to seal the indicator lamp on an equipment and guide out light emitted by the indicator lamp.
- a material of the light guide member 700 may be a light conductive material.
- the light conductive material may be a polycarbonate (PC) material.
- the light guide member 700 can include a light incident portion 701 matched with the indicator lamp, a light output portion 702 , and a light guide portion 706 connected to the light incident portion 701 and the light output portion 702 .
- the light incident portion 701 , the light output portion 702 , and the light guide portion 706 are integrally formed.
- the light incident portion 701 , the light output portion 702 , and the light guide portion 706 may be individual structures.
- a top surface of the light guide portion 706 is higher than a top surface of the light output portion 702 , and the top surface of the light output portion 702 extends to the top surface of the light guide portion 706 and thereby forms an upward slope.
- Such arrangement can effectively prevent rainwater from entering into the casing of equipment along the light guide member 700 , effectively seal the indicator lamp, and prevent the problem of damage to components inside the casing resulting from rainwater entering into the casing of equipment from a lamp receiving groove.
- the top surface of the light incident portion 701 is higher than the top surface of the light guide portion 706 ; the top surface of the light incident portion 701 , the top surface of the light guide portion 706 and the top surface of the light output portion 702 are coplanar, so that the light emitted by the indicator lamp can be guided out with maximum efficiency.
- the top surface of the light incident portion 701 can be set lower than the top surface of the light guide portion 706 .
- a width of the light guide member 700 along the B-B direction (as shown in FIG. 147 ) and a thickness along the A-A direction gradually increase along a direction from the light incident portion 701 to the light output portion 702 .
- Such arrangement can effectively increase a light-emitting area of the light output portion 702 , so that the user can easily observe the state of the indicator lamp.
- the width of the light guide member 700 along the B-B direction and the thickness along the A-A direction can be set to be constant instead.
- an end of the light incident portion 701 facing away from the light guide portion 706 is matched with the indicator lamp, so as to collect light emitted from the indicator lamp.
- an end of the light incident portion 701 facing away from the light guide portion 706 is disposed with a lighting cover (not shown), so as to improve light collection efficiency of the light incident portion 701 .
- the light guide portion 706 connects the light incident portion 701 and the light output portion 702 and is used for guiding the light collected by the light incident portion 701 toward the light output portion 702 .
- the light guide portion 706 is further provided with a mounting hole 707 , and the light guide member 700 can be fixedly installed on the casing of equipment by a screw or a bolt.
- the mounting hole 707 may be a through hole or a blind hole.
- the light output portion 702 can include a light-emitting surface 703 for guiding light out, and a side of the light-emitting surface 703 facing away from the light guide portion 706 protrudes outwards to form a convex surface.
- a convex surface Such arrangement allows the user to observe the light emitted from the light output portion 702 in a wide range, and thus facilitates the user to observe the state of the indicator lamp.
- An end of the light output portion 702 facing away from the light guide portion 706 extends outwards to form a waterproof cap 704 that is matched with the casing of equipment so as to prevent rainwater from entering into a lamp receiving groove provided on the casing of equipment along the light guide member 700 .
- the waterproof cap 704 and the light-emitting surface 703 are coplanar. In other embodiments, the waterproof cap 704 and the light-emitting surface 703 may not be coplanar.
- a diversion groove (not shown) may be provided on a side of the light output portion 702 to guide a small amount of rainwater that may be fallen between the waterproof cap 704 and the top surface of the light output portion 702 to the outside of the casing of equipment.
- a side of the light output portion 702 is further provided with a limiting block 705 that matches with the casing of equipment, so as to prevent the light guide member 700 from being excessively inserted into the lamp receiving groove on the casing of equipment during an installation process, which would destroy the indicator lamp.
- the bottom of the limiting block 705 is further provided with a positioning protrusion 708 that matches with the casing of equipment and facilitates a quick positioning during installation.
- the light guide member 700 of the disclosure sets the top surface of the light guide portion 706 higher than the top surface of the light output portion 702 , and an upward slope surface is formed from the top surface of the light output portion 702 to the top surface of the light guide portion 706 .
- it can effectively prevent rainwater from entering the casing of equipment/device along the light guide member 700 and thereby effectively seal the indicator lamp and prevent rainwater from entering the casing of equipment from the lamp receiving groove.
- the disclosure also provides a charging device 709 , which can include a bottom plate 710 , a charging part 712 mounted on the bottom plate 710 , an indicator lamp 722 , a light guide member 700 , and a boundary line (not shown).
- a charging device 709 can include a bottom plate 710 , a charging part 712 mounted on the bottom plate 710 , an indicator lamp 722 , a light guide member 700 , and a boundary line (not shown).
- the bottom plate 710 is laid on the ground, and a number of fixing holes 711 are provided on the bottom plate 710 , so that the bottom plate 710 can be fixedly installed on the ground by screws or bolts.
- the charging part 712 is fixedly installed on a side edge of the bottom plate 710 and is substantially perpendicular to the bottom plate 710 .
- the charging part 712 can include a first side wall 713 facing toward a center of the bottom plate 710 , a third side wall 718 disposed opposite to the first side wall 713 , and a second sidewall 714 located on the first side wall 713 and the third side wall 718 .
- the first side wall 713 , the second side wall 714 , and the third side wall 718 jointly define a receiving space for receiving electronic components and the indicator lamp 722 of the charging device 709 .
- the first side wall 713 is provided with a lamp receiving groove 719 and a charging interface 720 matched with a device to be charged.
- the lamp receiving groove 719 is recessed inwardly from the first side wall 713 and connects with the indicator lamp/light 722 , so that the indicator lamp 722 is located at the bottom of the lamp receiving groove 719 .
- the bottom wall of the lamp receiving groove 719 is provided with a water guide/ diversion hole 721 to guide water in the lamp receiving groove 719 to the outside of the lamp receiving groove 719 .
- a groove side wall and a groove top wall of the lamp receiving groove 719 can also be provided with water diversion holes as required.
- the side edge of the lamp receiving groove 719 is provided with a limiting groove 720 (as shown in FIG. 152 ) that matches with the limiting block 705 , and the groove bottom wall of the limiting groove 720 is fitted with the positioning protrusion 708 .
- the top of the charging part 712 is further provided with a rain shelter 715 .
- the light guide member 700 is installed in the lamp receiving groove 719 and matches with the indicator lamp 722 to guide light emitted by the indicator lamp 722 .
- the top surface of the light guide portion 706 is higher than the top surface of the light output portion 702 , so that an upward slope is formed from the top surface of the light output portion 702 to the top surface of the light guide portion 706 , and rainwater is effectively prevented from entering the lamp receiving groove 719 as well as the inside of the charging part 712 along the light guide member 700 .
- the light emitting surface 703 is partially located on the first side wall 713 and partially located on the second side wall 714 . Such arrangement can facilitate the user to observe the state of the indicator lamp 722 in a wider range.
- an intersection of the first side wall 713 and the second side wall 714 is provided with a fixing hole 716 connecting with the mounting hole 707 , so that the screw 717 passes through the fixing hole 716 and the mounting hole 707 and causing the light guide member 700 to be fixedly installed on the charging part 712 .
- the waterproof cap 704 directly touches against the first side wall 713 as well as the second side wall 714 and protrudes out of the charging part 712 .
- a receiving groove (not shown) for receiving the waterproof cap 704 may be provided on the periphery of the lamp receiving groove 719 .
- the boundary line is electrically connected to the charging device 709 , and the indicator lamp 722 is used to display whether the boundary line and the charging device 709 are normally connected.
- the indicator lamp 722 can also be used to display other states, for example, to display whether the device to be charged is fully charged.
- the disclosure also discloses a charging system including an electronic device (not shown) and a charging device 709 for charging the electronic device.
- the light guide member 700 of the disclosure can seal the indicator lamp and guide the light emitted by the indicator lamp, thereby effectively preventing rainwater from entering the inside of the casing of device from the lamp receiving groove and causing damage to the components inside the casing.
- control assembly is for example but not limited to a single-chip microcomputer (also referred to MCU) or a processor module, and can control various mechanisms to perform different working processes through corresponding driving circuits.
- the airtightness of the housing can be detected through the airtight nozzle on the housing, and then the air filter hood can be used to ensure that the mower maintaining the air pressure balance in the housing during the working process, and thereby ensures the normal working condition of mower.
- the height of the blade carrier disc is adjusted by the assisted height-adjustment assembly in the cutting mechanism, and the prime mover is controlled to rotate through the control assembly to drive the blade carrier disc to rotate correspondingly, which drives the blades for mowing.
- the relative displacement between the movable upper cover and the housing in the vertical direction is detected by the suspension-lift detection assembly in the detecting mechanism, so that when a relative displacement in the vertical direction occurs between the movable upper cover and the housing, a current signal change is produced/generated and sent to a control module or its connected current sensor to regulate the working state of the mower (such as stopping the mowing action or stopping the moving action).
- a relative displacement between the movable upper cover and the housing in the horizontal direction is detected by the collision detection assembly in the detecting mechanism, so that when the relative displacement in the horizontal direction occurs between the movable upper cover and the housing, a current signal change is generated and delivered to a control module or its connected current sensor to regulate the working status of the mower (such as stopping the mowing action or stopping the moving action).
- the suspension-lift detection assembly and the collision detection assembly are set independently to respectively detect the relative displacement in the vertical direction and the relative displacement in the horizontal direction between the movable upper cover and the housing, which can effectively reduce false triggering.
- the wheel cover trim can be detached and replaced on the traveling/walking wheel, which can achieve the purpose of changing the color of the traveling wheel.
- the above working processes can be implemented individually or in combination, so that the mower can meet different functional or design requirements.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Power Engineering (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Environmental Sciences (AREA)
- Transportation (AREA)
- Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
- Harvester Elements (AREA)
Abstract
A mower is provided and includes: a case; a charging circuit provided in the case, and a combination of a wheel assembly and a charging interface assembly arranged on the case. The combination is electrically connected to the charging circuit. The combination includes: a wheel assembly; and a charging interface assembly electrically connected to the charging circuit. The wheel assembly and the charging interface assembly are integrated molding structure.
Description
- The present application is continuation application of PCT application filing PCT/CN2021/084615 filed on Mar. 3, 2021, which claims the benefit of priority of the following commonly-owned, presently-pending Chinese patent applications: serial No. 202020441934.X, filed Mar. 31, 2020; serial No. 202020701949.5, filed Apr. 30, 2020; serial No. 202020731685.8, 202020731675.4, 202010384328.3, 202020731501.8, 202010376995.7, 202020732348.0, filed May 7, 2020; serial No. 202020799218.9, 202020800248.7, filed May 14, 2020; serial No. 202020991642.3, filed Jun. 3, 2020; and serial No. 202011533027.9, 202023096114.0, 202011519711.1, 202023096221.3, 202011518432.3, 202023096201.6, 202011518419.8, 202023096313.1, 202011518322.7, 202023094544.9, 202011519837.9, 202023094522.2, 202023091979.8, filed Dec. 21, 2020, of which the present application is a non-provisional application thereof. The disclosures of the forgoing applications are hereby incorporated by reference in it entirely, including any appendices or attachments thereof, for all purposes.
- The disclosure relates to a robotic mower.
- A mower, which may be a mechanical tool used for mowing lawns, vegetation, etc., may use an engine to rotate blades at a high speed, thereby increasing the efficiency of mowing and greatly reducing the working time and cost of a worker. An intelligent mower may bring the advantages of artificial intelligence and modernization into lawn mowing, and can be environmental-friendly and free-up worker’s hands. Therefore, Intelligent mowers become more and more favored by the market and consumers. However, when a conventional intelligent lawn mower is in use, its tires may slip very easily, resulting in the mower fails to work properly.
- An object of the disclosure is to provide a mower including a housing; a movable upper cover, arranged on the housing; and a cutting mechanism, disposed on the housing.
- In summary, the mower provided by the disclosure may be an intelligent/smart/robotic mower, which can automatically carry out a mowing operation, so that the user can be far away from a working/operation site, and therefore the harm to the user may be reduced, and the mowing efficiency can be improved.
-
FIG. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a mower observed at a top viewing angle according to the disclosure. -
FIG. 2 is a schematic perspective view of the mower observed at a bottom viewing angle. -
FIG. 3 is a schematic side view of the mower after removing a main body flip cover and a movable upper cover. -
FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A ofFIG. 1 . -
FIG. 5 is a schematic exploded view of an assisted height-adjustment assembly for blade carrier disc. -
FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the assisted height-adjustment assembly for blade carrier disc. -
FIG. 7 is a schematic top view of the assisted height-adjustment assembly for blade carrier disc. -
FIG. 8 is a schematic perspective view of the assisted height-adjustment assembly for blade carrier disc observed at a bottom viewing angle. -
FIG. 9 a is a schematic view of the assisted height-adjustment assembly for blade carrier disc in a state of lowering the blade carrier disc. -
FIG. 9 b is a schematic view of the assisted height-adjustment assembly for blade carrier disc in a state of lifting the blade carrier disc. -
FIG. 10 a is a schematic perspective view of a first blade carrier disc connector observed at a top viewing angle. -
FIG. 10 b is a schematic perspective view of the first blade carrier disc connector observed at a bottom viewing angle. -
FIG. 11 a is a schematic perspective view of a second blade carrier disc connector observed at a top viewing angle. -
FIG. 11 b is a schematic perspective view of the second blade carrier disc connector observed at a bottom viewing angle. -
FIG. 12 a is a schematic perspective view of a third blade carrier disc connector observed at a top viewing angle. -
FIG. 12 b is a schematic perspective view of the third blade carrier disc connector observed at a bottom viewing angle. -
FIG. 13 is a schematic perspective view of an assisted height-adjustment rod observed at a bottom viewing angle. -
FIG. 14 is a schematic enlarged view of the portion D inFIG. 4 . -
FIG. 15 a is a schematic view of lowering the height of the blade carrier disc in the mower. -
FIG. 15 b is a schematic view of adjusting the height of the blade carrier disc in the mower. -
FIG. 15 c is a schematic view of lifting the height of the blade carrier disc in the mower. -
FIG. 16 is a schematic perspective view of a suspension-lift detection assembly. -
FIG. 17 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the suspension-lift detection assembly. -
FIG. 18 is a schematic enlarged view of the portion B inFIG. 4 . -
FIG. 19 is a schematic enlarged view of the portion C inFIG. 4 . -
FIG. 20 is a schematic perspective view of an air filter hood. -
FIG. 21 is a schematic top view of the air filter hood. -
FIG. 22 is a schematic bottom view of the air filter hood. -
FIG. 23 is a schematic front view of the air filter hood. -
FIG. 24 is a schematic perspective view of an airtight nozzle. -
FIG. 25 is a schematic top view of the airtight nozzle. -
FIG. 26 is a schematic bottom view of the airtight nozzle. -
FIG. 27 is a schematic front view of the airtight nozzle. -
FIG. 28 is a schematic perspective view of the mower in which a walking wheel is exploded/disassembled. -
FIG. 29 is a schematic exploded view of the walking wheel. -
FIG. 30 is a schematic perspective view of a wheel cover trim observed at a front viewing angle. -
FIG. 31 is a schematic front view of a rear side of the wheel cover trim. -
FIG. 32 is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E inFIG. 31 . -
FIG. 33 is a schematic perspective view of an inner side of a wheel cover. -
FIG. 34 is a schematic front view of an outer side of the wheel cover. -
FIG. 35 is a schematic perspective view of an inner side of a wheel hub. -
FIG. 36 is a schematic perspective view of an outer side of the wheel hub. -
FIG. 37 is a schematic front view of the outer side of the wheel hub. -
FIG. 38 is a schematic assembling diagram of a fastening member. -
FIG. 39 is a schematic assembling diagram of a positioning member. -
FIG. 40 is a schematic perspective view of a lower casing and a combination device of the mower of the disclosure. -
FIG. 41 is a schematic exploded view of the lower casing and the combination device inFIG. 40 . -
FIG. 42 is a schematic enlarged view of the circle portion inFIG. 41 . -
FIG. 43 is a schematic perspective view of the lower casing inFIG. 41 . -
FIG. 44 is a schematic perspective view of the combination device inFIG. 41 . -
FIG. 45 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the combination device inFIG. 44 after removing a support wheel. -
FIG. 46 is a schematic bottom view of a charging interface assembly and a support wheel mounting seat inFIG. 44 . -
FIG. 47 is a schematic perspective view of the charging interface assembly and the support wheel mounting seat inFIG. 44 . -
FIG. 48 is a schematic perspective view of a wheel assembly of the discourse after removing the support wheel mounting seat. -
FIG. 49 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the wheel assembly inFIG. 48 after removing the support wheel mounting seat. -
FIG. 50 is a schematic perspective view of a first half-wheel inFIG. 49 . -
FIG. 51 is a schematic perspective view of a second half-wheel inFIG. 49 . -
FIG. 52 is a schematic structural view of an embodiment of a planetary gearbox of the disclosure. -
FIG. 53 is a schematic structural exploded view of the planetary gearbox inFIG. 52 . -
FIG. 54 is a schematic partial structural view of the planetary gearbox inFIG. 53 . -
FIG. 55 is a schematic perspective view of a blade carrier disc assembly of the disclosure. -
FIG. 56 is a schematic perspective view of the blade carrier disc assembly inFIG. 55 from another viewing angle. -
FIG. 57 is a schematic perspective view of the blade carrier disc. -
FIG. 58 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the blade carrier disc assembly inFIG. 56 . -
FIG. 59 is a schematic plan view of a cross-section of the blade carrier disc assembly inFIG. 58 . -
FIG. 60 is a schematic perspective view of a housing and a height-adjustment mechanism of the mower of the disclosure. -
FIG. 61 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the height-adjustment mechanism and the housing inFIG. 60 . -
FIG. 62 is a schematic top view of the housing of the mower. -
FIG. 63 is a schematic top view of the mower of the disclosure after removing an upper casing and an upper cover. -
FIG. 64 is a schematic partial enlarged view of the circle portion inFIG. 63 . -
FIG. 65 is a schematic perspective structural view of bases and an adjusting mechanism after being assembled. -
FIG. 66 is a schematic perspective structural view of a lower base and the adjusting mechanism after being assembled. -
FIG. 67 is a schematic perspective view of the adjusting mechanism and the cutting mechanism after being assembled. -
FIG. 68 is a schematic perspective structural view of a resilient guide member. -
FIG. 69 is a schematic perspective structural view of the resilient guide member inFIG. 68 from another viewing angle. -
FIG. 70 is a schematic cut-away view of the resilient guide member inFIG. 68 . -
FIG. 71 is a schematic perspective structural view of a second embodiment of a resilient guide member. -
FIG. 72 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a mower employing the resilient guide member inFIG. 71 . -
FIG. 73 is a schematic structural view of a first charging assembly of the disclosure. -
FIG. 74 is a schematic structural view of a first resilient terminal of the disclosure. -
FIG. 75 is a schematic structural view of a second charging assembly of the disclosure. -
FIG. 76 is a schematic structural view of a third resilient terminal of the disclosure. -
FIG. 77 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second charging assembly of the disclosure. -
FIG. 78 is a schematic structural view of a first fixing buckle of the disclosure. -
FIG. 79 is a schematic first process diagram of using the first charging assembly and the second charging assembly of the disclosure. -
FIG. 80 is a schematic second process diagram of using the first charging assembly and the second charging assembly of the disclosure. -
FIG. 81 is a schematic perspective exploded view of a mower. -
FIG. 82 is a cut-away view of the mower. -
FIG. 83 is a cut-away view of the mower from another viewing angle. -
FIG. 84 is a schematic perspective structural view of a support column. -
FIG. 85 is a schematic perspective exploded view of the support column inFIG. 84 . -
FIG. 86 is a schematic structural view of a mower. -
FIG. 87 is a schematic front view of a first casing. -
FIG. 88 a is a schematic perspective structural view of the first casing. -
FIG. 88 b is a schematic perspective structural view of the first casing from another viewing angle. -
FIG. 89 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first casing inFIG. 88 b taken along the direction of A-A. -
FIG. 90 is a schematic structural view of a second casing. -
FIG. 91 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second casing inFIG. 90 taken along the direction of B-B. -
FIG. 92 is a schematic perspective partial view of a housing of the disclosure. -
FIG. 93 is a schematic enlarged view of the portion A inFIG. 92 . -
FIG. 94 is a schematic partial enlarged view of a main body of the disclosure. -
FIG. 95 is a schematic partial enlarged view of a rear cover of the disclosure. -
FIG. 96 is a schematic perspective view of a shaft pin of the disclosure. -
FIG. 97 is a schematic structural view of lifting detection device of a mower of the disclosure, wherein the lifting detection device is located between a main body and a chassis. -
FIG. 98 is a schematic perspective exploded view of the lifting detection device of the mower of the disclosure. -
FIG. 99 is a schematic perspective exploded view of the lifting detection device of the mower of the disclosure from another viewing angle. -
FIG. 100 is a schematic cross-sectional structural view of the lifting detection device of the mower in a normal working state of the disclosure. -
FIG. 101 is a schematic cross-sectional structural view of the lifting detection device of the mower in a lifted state of the disclosure. -
FIG. 102 is a schematic cut-away structural view of the mower of the disclosure. -
FIG. 103 is a schematic perspective view of a suspension device inFIG. 102 . -
FIG. 104 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the suspension device inFIG. 103 taken along the direction of A-A. -
FIG. 105 is a schematic perspective partial structural view of the suspension device inFIG. 103 . -
FIG. 106 is a schematic exploded view ofFIG. 105 . -
FIG. 107 is a schematic perspective view of a first support column inFIG. 106 . -
FIG. 108 is a schematic perspective view of a fixing frame of the suspension device inFIG. 103 . -
FIG. 109 is a schematic perspective view of the fixing frame inFIG. 108 from another viewing angel. -
FIG. 110 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the fixing frame inFIG. 108 . -
FIG. 111 is a schematic view of the mower from another viewing angle. -
FIG. 112 is a schematic exploded view of a magnet fixing structure of the disclosure. -
FIG. 113 is a schematic cross-sectional structural view of a housing of the mower. -
FIG. 114 is a schematic partial enlarged view of the portion A inFIG. 113 . -
FIG. 115 is a schematic structural view of a collision sensor of the disclosure. -
FIG. 116 is a schematic perspective view of an intelligent mower according to an embodiment of the disclosure. -
FIG. 117 is a schematic perspective view of a connection device of the intelligent mower according to the embodiment of the disclosure. -
FIG. 118 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the connection device inFIG. 117 , wherein a locking member of the connection device is at a releasing position. -
FIG. 119 is similar toFIG. 118 , but the locking member is at a locking position. -
FIG. 120 is a schematic perspective view of a mounting base of the connection device. -
FIG. 121 is another schematic perspective view of the mounting base, showing a structure of its bottom. -
FIG. 122 is a schematic perspective view of the locking member of the connection device. -
FIG. 123 is another schematic perspective view of the locking member, showing a structure of its bottom. -
FIG. 124 is a schematic perspective view of a bottom plate of the connection device. -
FIG. 125 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the bottom plate. -
FIG. 126 is a schematic structural view of a switch of the disclosure in a switched-on state. -
FIG. 127 is a schematic cross-sectional structural view of the switch of the disclosure taken along the line A-A inFIG. 126 . -
FIG. 128 is a schematic structural view of the switch of the disclosure in a switched-off state. -
FIG. 129 is a schematic cross-sectional structural view of the switch of the disclosure taken along the line A-A inFIG. 128 . -
FIG. 130 is a schematic perspective assembled view of a charging station system according to an embodiment of the disclosure. -
FIG. 131 is another schematic perspective view of the charging station system inFIG. 10 , wherein a charging station and a ceiling are separated from each other. -
FIG. 132 is a schematic perspective exploded view of the ceiling of the charging station system inFIG. 131 . -
FIG. 133 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the charging station system of the disclosure taken along the direction A-A inFIG. 130 . -
FIG. 134 is a schematic perspective assembled view of the charging station system inFIG. 130 from another viewing angle, wherein the ceiling is in an opened state. -
FIG. 135 is a schematic exploded view of a safety switch of the disclosure in a first position. -
FIG. 136 is a schematic top view of the safety switch of the disclosure. -
FIG. 137 is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along the direction A-A inFIG. 136 . -
FIG. 138 is a schematic top view of the safety switch of the disclosure in a second position. -
FIG. 139 is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along the direction B-B inFIG. 138 . -
FIG. 140 is a schematic perspective structural view of a light guide member of the disclosure. -
FIG. 141 is a schematic perspective structural view of the light guide member inFIG. 140 from another viewing angle. -
FIG. 142 is a schematic exploded structural view of the light guide member inFIG. 140 . -
FIG. 143 is a schematic structural dissembled view of the garden tool. -
FIG. 144 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of a light guide post installed on the base. -
FIG. 145 is a schematic structural view of an upper casing inFIG. 144 . -
FIG. 146 is a schematic partial enlarged view of the upper casing inFIG. 144 from another viewing angle. -
FIG. 147 is a schematic perspective structural view of a light guide member of the disclosure. -
FIG. 148 is a schematic perspective structural view of the light guide member inFIG. 148 from another viewing angle. -
FIG. 149 is a schematic perspective structural view of a charging device of the disclosure. -
FIG. 150 is a schematic exploded view of the light guide member and a charging part. -
FIG. 151 is a schematic perspective structural view of the charging part. -
FIG. 152 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the light guide member being installed on the charging part. - The following embodiments are referring to the accompanying drawings for exemplifying specific implementable embodiments of the present disclosure. Furthermore, directional terms described by the present disclosure, such as upper, lower, front, back, left, right, inner, outer, side, etc., are only directions by referring to the accompanying drawings, and thus the used directional terms are used to describe and understand the present disclosure, but the present disclosure is not limited thereto.
- The drawings and description are to be regarded as illustrative in nature and not restrictive. Like reference numerals designate like elements throughout the specification. In addition, the size and thickness of each component shown in the drawings allow ease of understanding and ease of description, but the present disclosure is not limited thereto.
- Referring to
FIG. 1 throughFIG. 4 , in some embodiments, an intelligent mower (“mower”) is provided. The mower can include, among other parts and components, ahousing 1, a movableupper cover 2 positioned above thehousing 1, and a control assembly disposed within thehousing 1. The movableupper cover 2 can include, among other parts and components, a main body flip cover 4 disposed thereon. The control assembly may be configured (i.e., structured and arranged) to control the mower during operation. The control assembly may include, among other components, a single-chip microcomputer or a processor module, and can perform various functionalities with corresponding driving circuits. - Referring to
FIG. 4 andFIG. 5 throughFIG. 15 c , in which embodiments of a cutting mechanism is illustrated. The mower can include acutting mechanism 3 for cutting grass. Thecutting mechanism 3 can include a prime mover (also referred to as prime motor) 36, ablade carrier disc 5, and an assisted height-adjustment assembly 37 for theblade carrier disc 5. Theprime mover 36 is disposed in thehousing 1 and configured for driving the rotation of theblade carrier disc 5. Theblade carrier disc 5 is disposed at the bottom of the assisted height-adjustment assembly 37 and configured for mounting/installing blades 6 (i.e., having blade mounting positions). The assisted height-adjustment assembly 37 is configured for adjusting a height of theblade carrier disc 5. - As illustrated in
FIG. 4 ,FIG. 6 andFIG. 14 , the assisted height-adjustment assembly 37 for the blade carrier disc is, without limitation, tightly installed on an output shaft of theprime mover 36. A bottom surface of the assisted height-adjustment assembly 37 can be attached to theblade carrier disk 5, which may be fitted with at least oneblade 6 for cutting grass. In the illustrated embodiment, the number/amount of theblades 6 may be three, and the threeblades 6 may be evenly arranged/distributed on a circumference of theblade carrier disc 5. In other embodiments, the number of theblades 6 may be adjusted as required. Optionally, aprotective cover 58 can be arranged under theblade carrier disc 5 to prevent accidental touching of theblades 6. - As illustrated in
FIG. 5 throughFIG. 15 c , the assisted height-adjustment assembly 37 for the blade carrier disc can include an adjustingelement 50 and at least two blade carrier disc connectors, each of which can be sequentially and movably sleeved on and off a shaft. In particular, a first bladecarrier disc connector 47 is located at the inner side and can be fixedly installed on the output shaft of theprime mover 36. A second bladecarrier disc connector 57 is located at the outer side and configured for connecting to theblade carrier disc 5. An adjustingelement 50 is configured for moving the second bladecarrier disc connector 57 to along a surface of the first bladecarrier disc connector 47 when adjusting the height of theblade carrier disc 5. - As illustrated in
FIG. 5 throughFIG. 15 c , the number/amount of the blade carrier disc connectors may be at least two. When the number of the blade carrier disc connectors is two, the second bladecarrier dis connector 57 is directly moving along the sleeve (or the outer surface) of the first bladecarrier disc connector 47. When the number of the blade carrier disc connectors is more than two, the additional blade carrier disc connector(s), e.g., a third blade carrier disc connector, can be located between the first blade carrier disc connector and the second blade carrier disc connector, and can move along the sleeves (inner or outer surfaces) of the two connectors. For example, in the accompanyingFIG. 7 , an embodiment with three blade carrier disc connectors is illustrated, while the number of the blade carrier disc connectors is not limiting. - As illustrated in
FIG. 10 a andFIG. 10 b , the first bladecarrier disc connector 47 can include a hollowfirst body 61, and at least onefirst guide groove 62 on the outer side surface of thefirst body 61. Thefirst body 61 is closely attached to the output shaft of theprime mover 36, so that power from theprime mover 36 can be transferred to other blade carrier disc connector(s) adjacent to the first bladecarrier disk connector 47 via the at least onefirst guide groove 62. - As illustrated in
FIG. 10 andFIG. 10 b , thefirst body 61 can be hollow-in-the-center and cylindrical, with openings both ends to allow the output shaft of theprime mover 36 to be inserted. Thefirst body 61 may also be equipped with an assisted height-adjustment rod. The illustratedfirst guide grooves 62 are evenly distributed on the outer surface of thefirst body 61, each of thefirst guide grooves 62 each may have the same height as thefirst body 61, meaning thefirst guide grooves 62 are full grooves. - As illustrated in
FIG. 10 a andFIG. 10 b , one end of thefirst body 61 may have at least one first mountinghole 63, and the at least one first mountinghole 63 is configured for mounting afirst stopper 55. Thefirst stopper 55 may be, without limitation, a screw or a bolt, and may be mounted/installed into the first mountinghole 63 by threads. One end (wider head) of thefirst stopper 55 may be wider than the other end, and may extend out of the edge of the first guide groove to limit/restrict another blade carrier disc connector from sliding out. That is, the wider end of thefirst stopper 55 may prevent the blade carrier disc connector adjacent to the first blade carrier disc connector from detaching or sliding away from the first blade carrier disc connector. In other words, when there are two blade carrier disc connectors, the wide head of thefirst stopper 55 is configured to limit/align two end surfaces of the second blade carrier disc connector and the first blade carrier disc connector; when there are at least three blade carrier disc connectors, the wide head of thefirst stopper 55 is configured to limit/align the end surfaces of the third blade carrier disc connector from and the first bladecarrier disc connector 47. - As illustrated in
FIG. 11 a andFIG. 11 b , the second bladecarrier disc connector 57 can include a hollowsecond body 64 and at least one protrudedsecond guide portion 65 on the inner side surface of thesecond body 64. Anopen end 68 is located at one end of thesecond body 64 and configured for inserting an inner blade carrier disc connector into. Aclosed end 69 is located at the other end of thesecond body 64 and configured for mounting an adjustingelement 50. Thesecond guide portions 65 as illustrated are matched with the guide grooves of the inner blade carrier disc connector, so the second bladecarrier disc connector 57 can slide along the inserted inner blade carrier disc connector. - As illustrated in
FIG. 11 a andFIG. 11 b , thesecond body 64 may be hollow and cylindrical, with one of its ends opened (i.e., open end 68), so as to act as a sleeve to allow another blade carrier disc connector (e.g., the first blade carrier disc connector or the third blade carrier disc connector) to be inserted into. The other end of thesecond body 64 is partially closed (i.e., closed end 69), and configured for mounting the blade carrier disc and an adjustment end of the assisted height-adjustment rod. Thesecond guide portions 65 as illustrated are evenly distributed on the inner surface of thesecond body 64. - The
second guide portions 65 include at least one second long-protrusion 66 and at least one short-protrusion 67 in an alternately arranged manner. A height of the second long-protrusion 66 is substantially equal to that of thesecond body 64. The second short-protrusion 67 can include a height smaller than that of thesecond body 64, and is disposed near theopen end 68 of thesecond body 64. The second short-protrusion 67 may operate with the corresponding stopper to prevent the second blade carrier disc connector from detaching away from the third blade carrier disc connector or the first blade carrier disc connector. - As illustrated in
FIG. 11 b , the closed end of thesecond body 64 is disposed with at least one blade carrierdisc mounting hole 60 for attaching theblade carrier disc 5 via at least one fastener. The at least one blade carrierdisc mounting hole 60 is located at or near the bottom of the second long-protrusions 66. - As illustrated in
FIG. 5 , at least one third bladecarrier disc connector 48 may be inserted between the first bladecarrier disc connector 47 and the second bladecarrier disc connector 57. When there is one third bladecarrier disc connector 48, the number of the blade carrier disc connectors in the assisted height-adjustment assembly for the blade carrier disc is three. When there are two third bladecarrier disc connectors 48, the number of the blade carrier disc connectors in the assisted height-adjustment assembly for the blade carrier disc becomes four, and the third blade carrier disc connectors may have the same structure but different dimensions, so as to be sequentially and movably inserted-onto one another from inside to outside. - As illustrated in
FIG. 12 a andFIG. 12 b , the third bladecarrier disc connector 48 can include a hollowthird body 72 a and at least one protrudedthird guide portion 74 which is disposed on the inner side surface of thethird body 72 a and matched with the guide groove(s) of the internally adjacent blade carrier disc connector. The third blade carrier disk connector may also have at least onethird guide groove 72 that is disposed on the outer side of thethird body 72 a and matched with the guide portion(s) of the externally adjacent blade carrier disc connector. - As illustrated in
FIG. 12 a andFIG. 12 b , thethird body 72 a is hollow and cylindrical, with its two ends opened so as to allow the inner blade carrier disc connector to be inserted. Thethird guide grooves 72 as illustrated are evenly distributed on the external side surface of thethird body 72 a, and each may have a height same as that of thethird body 72 a (i.e., thethird guide grooves 72 are through grooves). Thethird guide portions 74 as illustrated are evenly distributed on the inner side surface of thethird body 72 a. - Further, the
third guide portions 74 may include at least one third long-protrusion 76 and at least one third short-protrusion 75 in an alternately arranged manner. The at least one third long-protrusion 76 each can include a height substantially the same as that of thethird body 72 a. The at least one third short-protrusion 75 each can include a height smaller than that of thethird body 72 a and is located near the bottom end of thethird body 72 a, so it can operate with a corresponding stopper(s) to prevent the second blade carrier disc connector or other third blade carrier disc connector from detaching away from the third blade carrier disc connector. In the disclosure, the at least one third guide portion and the at least one third guide groove may correspond to each other one to one, and are oppositely arranged on the inner and outer side surfaces of the third body. The at least one third guide portion and the at least one third guide groove can also be arranged staggered, as long as the assembling requirement is met. - As illustrated in
FIG. 5 ,FIG. 8 andFIG. 12 b , a lower end of thethird body 72 a is provided with at least one third mountinghole 73 for mounting with a third stopper(s) 58. The third mounting holes 73 as illustrated are located at the bottom of the third long-protrusions 75. Thethird stopper 58 may be, without limiting, a screw or a bolt, can include a structure similar to or different from that of the first stopper, and can be installed into the third mountinghole 73 via threads. Awide head 59 of thethird stopper 58 is protruded into the groove end of thethird guide groove 72, so as to restrict the guide portion of the adjacent blade carrier disc connector from sliding out, i.e., restricting the blade carrier disc connector externally adjacent to the third blade carrier disc connector from detaching away. - In the disclosure, as illustrated in
FIG. 5 , thewide head 56 of thefirst stopper 55 is configured to prevent the first bladecarrier disc connector 47 from detaching from the third bladecarrier disc connector 48. When there are three blade carrier disc connectors, thewide head 59 of thethird stopper 58 is configured to prevent the second bladecarrier disc connector 57 from detaching away from the third bladecarrier disc connector 48. When there are four blade carrier disc connectors, thewide head 59 of thethird stopper 58 is configured to revent the blade carrier disc connector located at the outer side of the third blade carrier disc connector from detaching away from the third blade carrier disc connector. - As illustrated in
FIG. 5 andFIG. 13 , the adjustingelement 50 can include an assisted height-adjustment rod 51, an install end connecting to the output shaft of theprime mover 36, and an adjustend 53 passing through the blade carrier disc connectors threadedly connected with theblade carrier disc 5. When rotating the assisted height-adjustment rod 51, theblade carrier disc 5 drives the second bladecarrier disc connector 57 to rotate. Theclosed end 69 of the second body may include a throughhole 70 to allow the blade carrier disc connector suitable for the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 to pass therethrough. Theclosed end 69 of the second body may be formed with otherstructural holes 71 for assembling, observation or weight reduction. - As illustrated in
FIG. 5 andFIG. 13 , the installend 52 of the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 is snap-fitted into thefirst body 61 using thefirst stoppers 55. The adjustend 53 of the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 is formed with an adjustgroove 54. Theblade carrier disc 5 is provided with a threaded throughhole 58 suitable for movement via the adjustend 53. - As illustrated in
FIG. 6 , aspring washer 49 may be added between the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 and the output shaft of theprime mover 36. - As illustrated in
FIG. 6 throughFIG. 15 c , a process to adjust the height of the blade carrier disc by the assisted height-adjustment assembly for the blade carrier disc can be summarized in the following two cases. Other possible implementations of adjusting the height of the blade carrier disc by the assisted height-adjustment assembly for the blade carrier disc should also be within the protection scope of the application. - Step 1: The process of adjusting the height of the blade carrier disc with two blade carrier disc connectors is as follows: manually or by other means (such as using a screwdriver or other tool) to snap into the adjust
groove 54, and rotate the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 so that the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 drives the blade carrier disc to up or down. In this case, the blade carrier disc drives the second blade carrier disc connector to move along the first blade carrier disc connector, thereby achieving the height adjustment action of the blade carrier disc. Since the adjustment process of the blade carrier disc and the movement process of the blade carrier disc connectors are relatively simple, they are not illustrated in the drawings. - Step 2: The process of adjusting the height of the blade carrier disc with three or more blade carrier disc connectors are similar. Taking three blade carrier disc connectors as an example, to perform the height adjustment action of the blade carrier disc, a specific adjustment process is illustrated in
FIG. 10 andFIG. 10 b , orFIG. 15 a throughFIG. 15 c . In this process, the first bladecarrier disc connector 47, the third bladecarrier disc connector 48, and the second bladecarrier disc connector 57 are attached in the above order from inside to outside. To adjust the height of the blade carrier disc, in the first operation (1), first assuming that thecutter head 5 is initially at the lowest possible height (as shown inFIG. 15 a ), thefirst stoppers 55 are mounted into the first mounting holes 63, the wide heads 56 of thefirst stoppers 55 protrude into thefirst guide grooves 62 and touch against the bottoms of the third short-protrusions 75 so as to prevent the third blade carrier disc connector from detaching away from the first blade carrier disc connector. The wide heads 56 of thefirst stoppers 55 also protrude into the hollow portion of thefirst body 61 and touch against the bottom of the installend 52 of the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 so as to prevent the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 from detaching away from the first bladecarrier disc connector 47. Thethird stoppers 58 are installed into the third mounting holes 73, and thewide heads 59 of thethird stoppers 58 protrude into thethird guide grooves 72 and touch against the bottoms of the second short-protrusions 67 so as to prevent the second bladecarrier disc connector 57 from detaching away from the third bladecarrier disc connector 48. - In the second operation (2), the assisted height-
adjustment rod 51 is rotated in a manner similar to the above-mentioned way, and the rotation of the assisted height-adjustment rod 51 drives theblade carrier disc 5 to move upward. In this case, theblade carrier disc 5 pushes the second bladecarrier disc connector 57 to move along the side surface of the third blade carrier disc connector, so as to increase the height of the blade carrier disc from the ground. - In the third operation (3), when the closed end 69 (bottom end) of the second blade
carrier disc connector 57 touches against thethird stoppers 58 or the bottom of thethird body 72 a, the second bladecarrier disc connector 57 substantially contains the third bladecarrier disc connector 48. - In the fourth operation (4), the second blade
carrier disc connector 57 continues to move upwardly, the third bladecarrier disc connector 48 is pushed by the second bladecarrier disc connector 57 to move along the side surface of the first blade carrier disc connector 47 (as shown inFIG. 15 b ), so that the height of the blade carrier disc from the ground is further increased until the third bladecarrier disc connector 48 is substantially contain the first bladecarrier disc connector 47. In this case, the first bladecarrier disc connector 47, the third bladecarrier disc connector 48, and the second bladecarrier disc connector 57 are completely sleeved one after another in this order from inside to outside, with the closed end of the second bladecarrier disc connector 57 touching against the bottom of the first bladecarrier disc connector 47, and theblade carrier disc 5 being adjusted to the highest position. - Referring to
FIG. 3 ,FIG. 4 , andFIG. 16 throughFIG. 19 , the mower can further include a detecting mechanism arranged between thehousing 1 and the movableupper cover 2 and configured for detecting a relative displacement between the movableupper cover 2 and thehousing 1. The control assembly is suitable for adjusting the working state of the mower based on the above detecting mechanism. The detecting mechanism can include at least one suspension-lift detection assembly 20 disposed on thehousing 1 and configured for detecting a relative displacement between the movableupper cover 2 and thehousing 1 in the vertical direction, and at least onecollision detection assembly 93 disposed on thehousing 1 and configured for detecting a relative displacement between the movableupper cover 2 and the housing in the horizontal direction. The control assembly is suitable for adjusting the working state of the mower according to detection signals of the at least one suspension-lift detection assembly 20 and the at least onecollision detection assembly 93. The control assembly may include a processor, various control circuits, sensing units, and corresponding driving circuits, etc., can detect changes in current signals, and can control shutdown or operation of the mower. - As illustrated in
FIG. 3 andFIG. 4 , the mower may include two suspension-lift detection assemblies 20 respectively arranged at the first mounting locations 16 of the movableupper cover 2 in diagonal positions of thehousing 1. Alternatively, the mover may include four suspension-lift detection assemblies 20 that are respectively arranged at the first mounting locations of the movableupper cover 2 in corners of thehousing 1. The mover may include twocollision detection assemblies 93 respectively arranged at the second mounting locations 17 of the movableupper cover 2 in two ends of thehousing 1. The number of the suspension-lift detection assembly and the number of the collision detection assembly can also be adjusted according to machine models and structural requirements, and at the same time, their installation positions on the housing can be changed correspondingly. - As illustrated in
FIG. 4 ,FIG. 16 andFIG. 17 , the suspension-lift detection assembly 20 can include asuspension ball head 80 fixed on the movable upper cover of the mower; a liftingstopper 86, arranged below and separated from thesuspension ball head 80; asuspension spring 87 with two ends thereof fixedly connected to thesuspension ball head 80 and the liftingstopper 86 respectively; and asignal trigger module 88 arranged at the bottom of the liftingstopper 86. When thesuspension ball head 80 occurs/generates an upward displacement, thesuspension spring 87 pulls the liftingstopper 86 to move upward, causing thesignal trigger module 88 to send/issue a detection signal. - As illustrated in
FIG. 18 , a side surface of thesuspension ball head 80 is disposed with a ball joint 89, thereby allowing thesuspension ball head 80 to be fixed onto the movableupper cover 2 of the mower by a snap-fit structure. The two ends of thesuspension spring 87 are respectively connected with thesuspension ball head 80 and the liftingstopper 86 through threads. When the movable upper cover of the mower moves upward, thesuspension ball head 80 is driven to move upward together. In this case, thesuspension spring 87 would pull the liftingstopper 86 to move upward, causing thesignal trigger module 88 to issue a detection signal. In addition, a limitinggroove 90 is provided at the top of thesuspension ball head 80 and used in conjunction with a limiting post on the movable upper cover, so as to avoid horizontal shaking between the suspension ball head and the movable upper cover. - As illustrated in
FIG. 18 , the suspension spring is a spring with relatively high rigidity, that cannot easily be deformed in the vertical direction. It can not only meet the requirement of thesuspension spring 87 pulling the liftingstopper 86 to move upward, but also make the suspension spring to play a role of horizontal damping as well as allow a certain relative displacement between the suspension ball head and the lifting stopper in the horizontal direction. In this way the suspension-lift detection assembly will not be damaged or generate a false alarm when the mower collides. In other embodiment, the suspension spring may be fixedly connected to the suspension ball head by means of buckle or pin lock. - As shown in
FIG. 18 , thesignal trigger module 88 can include a firstmagnetic block 88 a fixed on the lower end of the liftingstopper 86, a firstlifting detection board 88 b located below the liftingstopper 86, and afirst reed switch 91 disposed on the firstlifting detection board 88 b. When the liftingstopper 86 moves upward, the firstmagnetic block 88 a leaves away from thefirst reed switch 91, thefirst reed switch 91 is opened or closed to change the current signal on the firstlifting detection board 88 b, and the changed current signal may trigger the sending of the detection signal. The first lifting detection board and a second lifting detection board are, without limiting, Hall boards, and are electrically connected to the control assembly. In the illustrated embodiment, thefirst reed switch 91 is located directly below the firstmagnetic block 88 a. - As illustrated in
FIG. 16 , the suspension-lift detection assembly can further include a suspension-fixingcorrugated sleeve 81 sleeved onto the outer side of thesuspension spring 87. One end of the suspension-fixingcorrugated sleeve 81 is snapped to thesuspension ball head 80, and the other end is fixedly installed onto thehousing 1 of the mower by asuspension fixing frame 82. When the lifting stopper moves upward, the suspension-fixingcorrugated sleeve 81 is stretched, which can not only produce a restoring tension, but also play the role of sealing protection. - In order to increase the restoring force of the suspension-lift detection assembly, the suspension-
lift detection assembly 20 of the mower can further include asuspension restoring spring 84 sleeved on the outer side of the liftingstopper 86. Two ends of thesuspension restoring spring 84 respectively touch against the bottoms of thesuspension fixing frame 82 and the liftingstopper 86. When the liftingstopper 86 moves upward, thesuspension fixing frame 82 stays still, which causes a distance between the bottoms of thesuspension fixing frame 82 and the lifting stopper to become smaller, and thesuspension restoring spring 84 is compressed to generate a restoring elastic force. After the mower stops working, the suspension-lift detection assembly is restored to avoid jamming. - As illustrated in
FIG. 17 , the liftingstopper 86 may be hollow rod-shaped, with its sides having an engaginggroove 83. Thesignal trigger module 88 can further include amagnet bracket 92 located in the hollow interior of the liftingstopper 86. Themagnet bracket 92 is suspended in the engaginggroove 83 of the lifting stopper. The firstmagnetic block 88 a is fixed on the bottom of themagnet bracket 92, so as to ensure that it is also fixed at the hollow bottom end of the liftingstopper 86. Meanwhile, the bottom of the liftingstopper 86 is disposed with an outwardly extending liftingstopper flange 85, and an outer diameter of the liftingstopper flange 85 is greater than an inner diameter of thesuspension fixing frame 82, so that the liftingstopper flange 85 can limit a vertical stroke of the firstmagnetic block 88 a, thereby ensuring the overall stability of the suspension-lift detection assembly. - As illustrated in
FIG. 4 andFIG. 18 , thecollision detection assembly 93 can include a secondmagnetic block 94 arranged on the movableupper cover 2; asecond reed switch 95 arranged on thehousing 1 and below the secondmagnetic block 94; and a secondlifting detection board 96 arranged between the secondmagnetic block 94 and thesecond reed switch 95. When a relative displacement in the horizontal direction between the movableupper cover 2 and thehousing 1 occurs, the secondmagnetic block 94 approaches or leaves away from thesecond reed switch 95. With thesecond reed switch 95 opening or closing, a current signal on the secondlifting detection board 96 is changed. The secondlifting detection board 96 is electrically connected to the control assembly and sends the current signal to the control assembly as a detection signal. In the illustrated embodiment, thesecond reed switch 95 is arranged just below the secondmagnetic block 94. - As illustrated in
FIG. 19 , thecollision detection assembly 93 can further include a magnetic-block support 97 fixed on the movableupper cover 2. The magnetic-block support 97 is magnetic sheet, such as an iron sheet for attracting the secondmagnetic block 94, so as to leave a certain gap between the secondmagnetic block 94 and thesecond reed switch 95. - Referring to
FIG. 3 , andFIG. 20 throughFIG. 27 , thehousing 1 can further include an internally sealedcase 18; a function hole or a function mounting location (covered by anair filter hood 19, not shown) formed on thecase 18 and interconnecting the interior and exterior of thecase 18; and a functional module selectively detachably mounted on the function hole to detect a sealing state of the casing or maintain a balance of air pressure between inside and outside of the casing. - As illustrated in
FIG. 20 throughFIG. 23 , when the functional module is anair filter hood 19, it can balance the air pressure between the inside and outside of thecase 18 when the mower is working. Theair filter hood 19 can include aventilation base 98 mounted at the function hole for ventilation, and can include air filterhood mounting portions 100 extending outwardly from theventilation base 98. Theventilation base 98 is disposed with corresponding vent holes 99 and may be made of a breathable material to achieve the purpose of breathability. - There may be two air filter
hood mounting portions 100 respectively extend from theventilation base 98 in two opposing directions, and thus symmetrically arranged at two sides of theventilation base 98. As to theair filter hood 19, the air filterhood mounting portions 100 are mechanically fixed onto thecase 18 through fasteners. The fasteners can be suitable parts such as, without limiting, screws, bolts or engaging members. Optionally, the air filterhood mounting portions 100 are provided with corresponding air filter hood mounting holes 750, so that the air filterhood mounting portions 100 are mechanically fixed onto thecase 18 by screws. - As illustrated in
FIG. 23 , an inner side of the air filter hood 19 (i.e., a side near the casing) is further provided with raisedcolumns 102. The raisedcolumns 102 are located at edges of the air filterhood mounting portions 100 and matched with holes on the casing so as to positionally restrict theair filter hood 19 during installation. Each of the air filterhood mounting portions 100 is provided with a slope on the outside of the air filter hood 19 (i.e., the side facing away from the casing). After theair filter hood 19 is installed, theventilation base 98 gradually protrudes from the casing. - As illustrated in
FIG. 24 throughFIG. 27 , when the functional module is anairtight nozzle 108, an air tightness of the housing can be detected by a barometer. Theairtight nozzle 108 can include abody part 109 installed at the function hole and mountingparts 110 extending outwards from thebody part 109. Two mountingparts 110 may respectively extend from thebody part 109 in two opposing directions and thus are symmetrically arranged on two sides of the body part. - As shown in
FIG. 27 , an outer side (i.e., a side facing away from the casing) of thebody part 109 is provided with aconduct pipe 111 protrudes outwardly, and theconduct pipe 111 is suitable for connecting with the barometer to detect air tightness of the mower. Extending directions of the mountingparts 110 are perpendicular to an extending direction of theconduct pipe 111. As to theairtight nozzle 108, the mountingparts 110 and thecase 18 are mechanically fixed by fasteners (not shown), and the fasteners may be suitable parts such as, without limiting, screws or bolts. Optionally, the mountingparts 110 are provided with corresponding mountingholes 112, and the mountingparts 110 and mechanically fixed onto thecase 18 by screws. The outer side (i.e., a side facing away from the casing) of each of the mountingparts 110 is provided with a slope, and after theairtight nozzle 108 is installed, thebody part 109 gradually protrudes from the casing. - As illustrated in
FIG. 24 throughFIG. 27 , different functional modules can be installed at the function hole manually or by other means to facilitate the detection of the sealing state or the air pressure balance inside and outside of thecase 18, for meeting the functional requirements of the mower in different working conditions. For example, during operation, the mower uses theair filter hood 19 to balance the air pressure inside and outside of thecase 18 of the mower. In another example, when it is necessary to detect the air tightness, theair filter hood 19 may be replaced by theairtight nozzle 108, a rubber sleeve is sheathed on theconduct pipe 111 of theairtight nozzle 108, and a barometer is used to check whether an upper limit of inflation air pressure and a pressure holding capacity meet the standards, thus reliability of the seal is checked. - Referring to
FIG. 1 ,FIG. 2 , andFIG. 28 throughFIG. 39 , the mower can further include a walking/travelling assembly 8 configured for driving the mower to move forward. The walking assembly 8 may include at least one walking wheel 9 (i.e., driving wheel) disposed on thehousing 1; and at least oneuniversal wheel 10 disposed on thehousing 1. Thewalking wheel 9 can include awheel hub 178, awheel cover 202 disposed on thewheel hub 178, and awheel cover trim 203 detachably mounted on thewheel cover 202. - As illustrated in
FIG. 29 , thewheel cover 202 and thewheel hub 178 are detachably assembled, and thewheel cover trim 203 is interposed between thewheel hub 178 and thewheel cover 202. When thewheel cover trim 203 is replaced, thewheel cover 202 is firstly removed from thewheel hub 178, then a newwheel cover trim 203 is assembled on thewheel cover 202. Finally, thewheel cover 202 and thewheel hub 178 are assembled together. The changing of the color of the walking wheel can be realized by replacing the wheel cover trim. - As illustrated in
FIG. 30 throughFIG. 32 , thewheel cover trim 203 can include amiddle portion 204 with multiple (i.e., more than one)protrusions 205 extending outward in the circumferential direction from themiddle portion 204. Theprotrusions 205 are embedded in corresponding wheelcover mounting holes 210. - As illustrated in
FIG. 30 , themiddle portion 204 has a ring-shaped body and coaxial with thewheel hub 178 and thewheel cover 202. The protrusions 25 can include adecorative block 206 adapted to the wheelcover mounting hole 210, and aflange 207 located on one side of thedecorative block 206 and protruding from thedecorative block 206. When theprotrusion 205 is embedded in the corresponding wheelcover mounting hole 210, thedecorative block 206 is fitted into the corresponding wheelcover mounting hole 210 and exposed from the outer side of the wheel cover 201. Further, theflange 207 may touch against the periphery of the wheelcover mounting hole 210. - As illustrated in
FIG. 31 andFIG. 32 , the rear side (i.e., a side near the wheel hub) of thewheel cover trim 203 is plane-shaped, and the front side (i.e., the side near the wheel cover) of thewheel cover trim 203 is protruded through thedecorative block 206 so as to fit into the wheel cover mounting hole. In order to reduce the weight of the decorative block, the rear side of thedecorative block 206 is formed with aweight reduction groove 208. The front side of thedecorative block 206 is provided with a color-setting groove, and the groove bottom of the color-setting groove is provided with acorresponding color plate 209. Therefore, the color plate can be recessed in the color-setting groove to prevent the color plate from being worn and faded, thereby protecting the color plate. The color plate can be designed separately, or integrated with the color-setting groove to ensure consistence of color. - As illustrated in
FIG. 33 andFIG. 34 , multiple wheelcover mounting holes 210 are arranged in the circumferential direction of thewheel cover 202 and used to engage with theprotrusions 205 of thewheel cover trim 203. There are inner protrusions 211 (located at the inner side of thewheel cover 202, i.e., the side near the wheel cover trim) and outer grooves 214 (located at the outer side of thewheel cover 202, i.e., the side away from the wheel cover) provided on intervals among the wheelcover mounting holes 210. An edge of the inner protrusion 211 is disposed with a fitting head 212 for engaging with thewheel hub 178. In particular, the inner protrusions 211 and theouter grooves 214 can adopt the same shape and structure design, or be designed with different shapes and structures, but they should not form through-holes, so as to ensure that the wheel cover is covered on the outer side of the walking wheel, and the internal structure of the walking wheel is sealed. - As illustrated in
FIG. 35 throughFIG. 37 , the inner side (i.e., the side close to the housing) of thewheel hub 178 is flat to meet the overall assembling requirement of the mower. The outer side of the wheel hub 178 (i.e., the side close to the wheel cover trim) is provided with a wheelcover mounting location 217 for installing the wheel cover. On the wheelcover mounting location 217, there may be multiple reinforcing ribs 189 for supporting the wheel hub. - As illustrated in
FIG. 38 , multiple wheelhub fitting grooves 215 are provided in the wheelcover mounting location 217. The wheelhub fitting grooves 215 are evenly distributed on the circumference of thewheel hub 178 and form fastening members together with the fitting heads 212 of thewheel cover 202, so as to detachably install the wheel cover onto the wheel hub by the fastening members. - As illustrated in
FIG. 39 , thewheel cover 202 and thewheel hub 178 are positioned and installed by at least two asymmetrically arranged positioning members. The positioning members can include apositioning rod 213 arranged on the circumference of thewheel cover 202, and include a wheelhub positioning hole 216 arranged on the circumference of thewheel hub 178 and matched with thepositioning rod 213. By inserting thepositioning rod 213 into the corresponding wheelhub positioning hole 216, thewheel cover 202 and thehub 178 are positioned and then assembled together. - Referring to
FIG. 2 , andFIG. 40 throughFIG. 51 , a process of implementable assembling the walking assembly 8 is illustrated. The machine body is provided with two walkingwheels 9 located at two sides of the machine body respectively. The walkingwheels 9 generally are arranged at the front of the machine body. The twowalking wheels 9 are respectively driven by two drive motors. If rotation speeds of the drive motors are different, the mower may turn toward one direction; if the rotation speeds of the drive motors are the same, the mower may travel in a straight line; and if the rotation speeds of the drive motors are opposite, the mower may perform a turn-around at the same position. There is at least oneuniversal wheel 10 disposed at the rear of the machine body. The mower is supported by the walkingwheels 9 and theuniversal wheel 10 when moving around. Theuniversal wheel 10 provides convenient for the turning of the mower. - As illustrated in
FIG. 3 ,FIG. 40 andFIG. 41 , the disclosure provides a combination structure (or combination device). The combination structure can include a charginginterface assembly 501 and awheel assembly 502. The charginginterface assembly 501 is electrically connected to a charging circuit, and thewheel assembly 502 and the charginginterface assembly 501 form an integrated molding structure. Thecase 18 is provided with acover 503 covering the charginginterface assembly 501, and thecover 503 is matched with an outer contour of the charginginterface assembly 501. Thecase 18 is provided with a receivingpart 504 for accommodating the combination structure, and the receivingpart 504 is arranged at the front or bottom of thecase 18. Specifically, thecover 503 is formed on thecase 18, and the receivingpart 504 is below thecover 503. - Please refer to
FIG. 41 andFIG. 42 together, the receivingpart 504 is provided with a chargingopening 505 and a mountingopening 506 at the front and bottom of thecase 18 respectively, so as to facilitate the installation of the charginginterface assembly 501 and the using of a charging connector to mate with the charginginterface assembly 501 from the front. Thecase 18 is provided with a pair of first guidingpieces 507 located on both sides of the chargingopening 505 in an oblique manner. Thecover 503 is provided with a cylindrical first wire-throughportion 508. - As illustrated in
FIG. 44 throughFIG. 47 , the charginginterface assembly 501 can include a chargingsocket 509, a charginginterface 510 disposed on the chargingsocket 509, chargingterminals 511, and a chargingseal 512. The chargingterminals 511 include at least a pair of guiding pieces electrically connected to a charging circuit. The chargingterminals 511 are installed on two sides of the chargingsocket 509 and extend into the charginginterface 510. - As illustrated in
FIG. 44 throughFIG. 49 , the chargingsocket 509 can include atop wall 513, opposite first andsecond side walls second side walls first side wall 514, thesecond side wall 515, thethird side wall 516, and thetop wall 513 together define the charginginterface 510. The chargingterminals 511 are fixed on the chargingsocket 509. Each of the chargingterminals 511 include a connecting end 517 connected to a charging cable and a chargingend 518 in contact with a charging connector. The charginginterface 510 is arranged at the rear of the chargingopening 505. The chargingsocket 509 is disposed with a pair of second guidingpieces 519 located at the rear of the first guidingpieces 507 and arranged obliquely to guide the charging connector to connect into the charginginterface 510. - As illustrated in
FIG. 44 throughFIG. 49 , a second wire-throughportion 520 corresponding to the first wire-throughportion 508 is disposed at the top of the chargingsocket 509 and connects with the charginginterface 510. The chargingsocket 509 is further disposed with awire positioning groove 521 for connecting with the second wire-throughportion 520. The second wire-throughportion 520 and thewire positioning groove 521 are illustratively located on thetop wall 513. The second wire-throughportion 520 is cylindrical, and anotch 522 is formed on the second wire-throughportion 520. Thewire positioning groove 521 connects with the second wire-throughportion 520 through thenotch 522. Thewire positioning groove 521 first extends to both sides of the chargingsocket 509, and then extends a distance downward to connect with the charginginterface 510. - As illustrated in
FIG. 44 throughFIG. 49 , the charginginterface assembly 501 is provided withretainers 523 for fixing with thecase 18, and theretainers 523 are disposed on the chargingsocket 509. Specifically, theretainers 523 are a pair of resilient sheets respectively arranged at two sides of the chargingsocket 509. Upper ends of the resilient sheets are connected with the chargingsocket 509, and lower ends of the resilient sheets are free ends. The receivingpart 504 is provided with slidinggrooves 524 for receiving the resilient sheets, and bottoms of the slidinggrooves 524 are provided withprotrusions 525 that engage with the lower ends of the resilient sheets. When assembling, the chargingsocket 509 may be put upwards into the receivingpart 504 along the slidinggrooves 524, and the resilient sheets may be resiliently deformed downwards in the process of extending. When being installed in place, the resilient sheets will restore and snap into the twoprotrusions 525 to prevent the chargingsocket 509 from moving downwards. - As illustrated in
FIG. 44 throughFIG. 49 , the chargingseal 512 are matched with both the second wire-throughportion 520 and the first wire-throughportion 508, so as to lead the charging cable into thecase 18 in a sealed manner. A part of the chargingseal 512 matched with the first wire-throughportion 508 is a threaded structure, another part of the chargingseal 512 matched with the second wire-throughportion 520 is formed with notches 526. The chargingseal 512 can include a hollow cylindrical shape. Further, the chargingseal 512 can include afirst fixing part 527 installed on the second wire-throughportion 520, asecond fixing part 528 fixed to the first wire-throughportion 508, and a connectingpart 529 connecting the first fixingpart 527 and thesecond fixing part 528. An outer diameter of the connectingpart 529 is greater than the outer diameters of the first fixingpart 527 and thesecond fixing part 528. The connectingpart 529 is located between the second wire-throughportion 520 and the first wire-throughportion 508 and acts as a buffer. Twonotches 530 are defined at the lower end of the first fixingpart 527. - As illustrated in
FIG. 44 throughFIG. 49 , after the chargingseal 512 is assembled with the second wire-throughportion 520, thenotches 522 and thenotches 530 are aligned with each other. An outer side of thesecond fixing part 527 is provided with threads to increase friction between the chargingseal 512 and thecase 18. A top end of thesecond fixing part 527 is provided with two wire-throughholes 531 for allowing the charging cable to pass through. One end of the charging cable is welded to the connecting end 517. The other end of the charging cable enters the chargingseal 512 through thewire positioning groove 521, sequentially passes through thenotches 522 and thenotches 530, and finally passes through the wire-throughholes 531 and enters into thecase 18. The opening size of the wire-throughhole 531 is set to be slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the charging cable, so that the charging cable fits tightly with the chargingseal 512 in the wire-throughhole 531. - As illustrated in
FIG. 40 ,FIG. 41 ,FIG. 44 ,FIG. 45 ,FIG. 48 andFIG. 49 , thewheel assembly 502 can include, among other components, awheel shaft 534 which theuniversal wheel 10 mounted to, a wheel shaft positioning assembly 535, a sealingassembly 536, and a supportwheel mounting seat 537. In the illustrated embodiment, the supportwheel mounting seat 537 and the charginginterface assembly 501 form an integrated structure. Specifically, the supportwheel mounting base 537 and the chargingsocket 509 are an integrally-constructed structure (also referred to as one-piece structure). Please also refer toFIG. 47 , in which the supportwheel mounting seat 537 is arranged behind thethird side wall 516, the supportwheel mounting seat 537 is provided with a mountinghole 538 extending from top to bottom, and thewheel shaft 534 is fixed in the mountinghole 538. Specifically, thewheel shaft 534 extends upward into the mountinghole 538 and is fixed in the mountinghole 538 by twoshaft sleeves 539 andfasteners 540. - As illustrated in
FIG. 49 , theuniversal wheel 10 can include a first half-wheel 541 and a second half-wheel 542. The first half-wheel 541 and the second half-wheel 542 are engaged with each other to form anaccommodating cavity 543. Thewheel shaft 534 passes through the first half-wheel 541 and enters theaccommodating cavity 543. Theaccommodating cavity 543 can include a first fitting gap formed by thefirst half wheel 541 and thewheel shaft 534, and a second fitting gap formed by thefirst half wheel 541 and thesecond half wheel 542. The first fitting gap and the second fitting gap are respectively located on two sides of theaccommodating cavity 543. - As illustrated in
FIG. 49 throughFIG. 51 , the first half-wheel 541 and the second half-wheel 542 are disk-shaped respectively. The first half-wheel 541 is provided with a firstcylindrical portion 544 protruding toward the second half-wheel 542, and one side of the firstcylindrical portion 544 is provided with a through-hole 545 allowing thewheel shaft 534 to pass through. The second half-wheel 542 is provided with a secondcylindrical portion 546 and a thirdcylindrical portion 547 protruding toward the first half-wheel 541, and a ring groove (not labelled) is formed between the secondcylindrical portion 546 and the thirdcylindrical portion 547. When thefirst half wheel 541 and thesecond half wheel 542 are engaged, the firstcylindrical portion 544 extends into the ring groove. The firstcylindrical portion 544 and the secondcylindrical portion 546 together form theaccommodating cavity 543. Since the two half-wheels are assembled with each other, two fitting gaps will be generated to affect the overall sealing of theaccommodating cavity 543. One of them is the first fitting gap formed between the throughhole 545 and thefirst half wheel 541, and the other is the second fitting gap formed between the firstcylindrical portion 544 and the secondcylindrical portion 546. - As illustrated in
FIG. 50 andFIG. 51 , thefirst half wheel 541 is provided with multiple mountingholes 548, and thesecond half wheel 542 is provided with multiple mountingposts 549 corresponding to the mounting holes 548. In addition, the second half-wheel 542 is provided with multiple engagingmembers 550 in the circumferential direction. Each of the engagingmembers 550 are provided with an engaging opening 551. The first half-wheel 541 is provided with alocking block 552 which is matched with a corresponding engagingmember 550, and thelocking block 552 is capable of being snapped into a corresponding engaging opening 551. Furthermore, each of the first half-wheel 541 and the second half-wheel 542 are provided with a number of reinforcing ribs (not labeled). - As illustrated in
FIG. 41 throughFIG. 49 , thewheel shaft 534 can include ahorizontal support portion 554 mounted on the support wheel 553, a vertical mountingportion 555 mounted on the supportwheel mounting seat 537, and a connectingportion 556 connecting thesupport portion 554 and the mountingportion 555. Thewheel shaft 534 extends via the throughhole 545 into theaccommodating cavity 543, and its end is located in the thirdcylindrical portion 547 of the second half-wheel 542. - As illustrated in
FIG. 41 throughFIG. 49 , the wheel shaft positioning assembly 535 can include, sequentially arranged on thewheel shaft 534, abearing 557, a bearingpressing block 558, awasher 559, abearing clamp 560, and awasher 561 located outside the first half-wheel 541. The wheel shaft positioning assembly 535 can be used to rotatably install theuniversal wheel 10 on thewheel shaft 534. Thebearing 557, the bearingpressing block 558, thewasher 559, thewasher 561, and thebearing clamp 560 are all arranged on thesupport portion 554. Thefirst half wheel 541 is provided with aring portion 562 near the throughhole 545, and thering portion 562 and thewasher 561 cooperatively limit the position of afirst seal 563. - As illustrated in
FIG. 49 , the sealingassembly 536 can include thefirst seal 563 for sealing the first fitting gap and asecond seal 564 for sealing the second fitting gap, so as to protect thewheel shaft 534 and the wheel shaft positioning assembly 535 in theaccommodating cavity 543. In one embodiment, thefirst seal 563 is an oil seal, thesecond seal 564 is an O-ring gasket, and thesecond seal 564 is located in the ring groove and touches against the firstcylindrical portion 544. - As illustrated in
FIG. 44 throughFIG. 49 , when assembling, the combination device is first assembled into one unit, and the charging cable, the chargingterminals 511 and the chargingseal 512 are then assembled onto the chargingsocket 509 . One end of the charging cable is welded to the charging terminals, and the other end passes through the chargingseal 512. Afterwards, the combination device as a whole is assembled into the receivingpart 504 of thecase 18 from below the mountingopening 506, the charging cable is inserted into the first wire-throughportion 508, the lower part of the chargingseal 512 and the chargingsocket 509 are tightly sealed, and the upper part of the chargingseal 512 is tightly sealed with thecase 18. - Referring to
FIG. 40 throughFIG. 51 , by integrating the wheel assembly and the charging interface unit, the electric equipment of the disclosure is not only compact in structure, but can effectively reduce the overall volume. Sine the above two components are integrated and then fastened to the casing, it makes the assembling of the whole machine convenient. - In addition, a charging seal is provided at the connection between the charging interface unit and the inside of the casing. The charging seal allows the charging cable to pass through while isolating inside and outside of the casing and keeping the inside of the casing to be sealed. Furthermore, in the disclosure, the first seal and the second seal are arranged on both sides of the accommodating cavity, so that the accommodating cavity can provide good sealing performance, so as to protect metal parts such as the bearing therein and seal the key parts of the wheel shaft.
- Referring to
FIG. 52 throughFIG. 54 , a planetary gearbox can include ahousing 408 having anupper cover 413, aninternal ring gear 414, and abottom casing 415. Aplanetary gear device 414 is arranged in thehousing 408 and is connected with anoutput shaft 578 to output power. Theplanetary gear device 414 can include at least a firstplanetary gear assembly 409. The firstplanetary gear assembly 409 can include aplanet carrier 416, asun gear 417, and multiple planet gears 418. The planet gears 418 mesh with thesun gear 417 and theplanet carrier 416 respectively. Thesun gear 417 and theplanet carrier 416 are separated structures, and thesun gear 417 and the planet gears 418 are installed on theplanet carrier 416 in coordination. Thesun gear 417 and theplanet carrier 416 are separately manufactured and then assembled. The gears and theplanet carrier 416 are precision manufactured to improve the accuracy of the gears. The precision level of powder metallurgy parts generally should be level 7, while the precision of the finished gears is level 4-6, so it can significantly improve the degree of fit and reduce noise. Optionally, the teeth profile of the sun gear can be implemented using involute spline teeth. Compared with rectangular splines, the involute splines have the advantages of more teeth, thicker teeth ends and roots, stronger load-bearing capacity, easier self-centering and higher installation accuracy. When used in garden tools such as an intelligent mower (robotic mower), the involute spline teeth profile can achieve better noise reduction and higher precise control effects. - As illustrated in
FIG. 54 , awasher 419 is arranged between theplanet carrier 416 and thesun gear 417 to avoid overheating friction between thesun gear 417 and theplanet carrier 416. Thesun gear 417 is equipped with arolling pin shaft 420, and the usage of therolling pin shaft 20 can reduce the friction area, reduce the noise, and improve the transmission efficiency of the gearbox. - As illustrated in
FIG. 54 , theplanetary gears 418 of the firstplanetary gear assembly 409 may be plastic gears. Thesun gear 417 and theinternal ring gear 414 may be metal gears. When plastic planetary gears mesh with metal gears, noise can be effectively reduced due to the elastic cushioning effect of plastics. - As illustrated in
FIG. 53 , theplanetary gear device 414 can include a firstplanetary gear assembly 409 and a secondplanetary gear assembly 410. The secondplanetary gear assembly 410 is disposed above the firstplanetary gear assembly 409 and connected to the output shaft. The planet gears 418 of the firstplanetary gear assembly 409 are plastic gears, while thesun gear 417 and theinternal ring gear 414 are metal gears. The planet gears 418, thesun gear 417, and theinternal ring gear 414 of the secondplanetary gear assembly 410 are metal gears. Alternatively, the planet gears 418 of the firstplanetary gear assembly 409 and the secondplanetary gear assembly 410 are plastic gears, and the sun gears 417 and the internal ring gears 414 are metal gears. - As illustrated in
FIG. 52 throughFIG. 54 , theplanetary gear device 414 can include a firstplanetary gear assembly 409, a secondplanetary gear assembly 410, and a thirdplanetary gear assembly 411. The firstplanetary gear assembly 409, the secondplanetary gear assembly 410, and the thirdplanetary gear assembly 411 are sequentially arranged from bottom to top, with the thirdplanetary gear assembly 411 being connected to the output shaft. The planet gears 418 of the first planetary gear assembly may be plastic gears, thesun gear 417 and theinternal ring gear 414 may be metal gears. The planet gears 418, the sun gears 417 and the internal ring gears of the secondplanetary gear assembly 410, and the thirdplanetary gear assembly 411 may be metal gears. Since the secondplanetary gear assembly 410 and the thirdplanetary gear assembly 411 have low gear speeds and large transmission torques, the gears made of metal materials can support a large transmission ratio. - Alternatively, the planet gears 418 of the first
planetary gear assembly 409, the secondplanetary gear assembly 410, and the thirdplanetary gear assembly 411 may be plastic gears, and the sun gears 417 and the internal ring gears 414 may be metal gears. In the case of relatively small transmission ratio, the secondplanetary gear assembly 410 and the thirdplanetary gear assembly 411 may also use plastic planetary gears. A transmission ratio of the firstplanetary gear assembly 409 may be about 6.3, a transmission ratio of the secondplanetary gear assembly 410 may be about 3.79, a transmission ratio of the thirdplanetary gear assembly 411 may be about 3.79, and the total transmission ratio may be about 90.3. The planetary gearbox provided by the disclosure can reduce the noise generated in the transmission process, with more stable transmission torque, and high degree of coordination. - Referring to
FIG. 55 andFIG. 56 , the disclosure also provides a blade carrier disc assembly 218 for mowing lawns and other similar operations. The blade carrier disc assembly 218 can include ablade carrier disc 5 andblades 6 mounted on theblade carrier disc 5. - As illustrated in
FIG. 55 throughFIG. 57 , the blade carrier disc assembly 218 can include adisc body 219, withblade mounting grooves 220 recessed inwardly from the edge of thedisc body 219 along an axial direction of thedisc body 219. In the illustrated embodiment, thedisk body 219 may be circular. In other embodiments, thedisk body 219 can also be set in other shapes as needed, such as a regular polygon. Thedisc body 219 is provided withguide platforms 221 on the side facing the lawn. Anaxle sleeve 230 and reinforcing ribs 231 are provided on the side of thedisc body 219 facing away from the lawn. Each theguide platform 221 is provided by protruding outward from the side of thedisc body 219 facing the lawn. Theguide platform 221 is adjacent to theblade mounting groove 220 and is located on the first grass-incoming side of theblade mounting groove 220. - When the blade carrier disc assembly 218 rotates counterclockwise in the direction of the arrow shown in
FIG. 55 , the first grass-incoming side of theblade mounting groove 220 may be deemed the first side 222, and a secondary grass-incoming side may be deemed the second side 223. When the blade carrier disc assembly 218 rotates clockwise in the opposite direction of the arrow shown inFIG. 55 , the first grass-incoming side may be deemed the second side 223, and the secondary grass-incoming side may be deemed the first side 222. With this arrangement, theguide platform 221 can touch the grass before theblade mounting groove 220, so that theguide platform 221 first straightens and cleans the long grass on the lawn before theblade 6 cuts the grass, thereby preventing long grass, long vines, etc. from being entangled on theblade 6. - A guiding
wall 224 is provided on the side of theguide platform 221 facing away from the rotation direction of thedisk body 219. In the illustrated embodiment, eachblade mounting groove 220 corresponds to oneguide platform 221, and theguide platform 221 is located on the first grass-incoming side of theblade mounting groove 220. In other embodiments, the first grass-incoming side of theblade mounting groove 220 may be provided withmultiple guide platforms 221 as required, or theguide platforms 221 may be provided on both the first grass-incoming grass side and the secondary grass-incoming side of theblade mounting groove 220. In the illustrated embodiment, the side of theguide platform 221 facing away from thedisc body 219 is a smooth protrusion. In other embodiments, the side of theguide platform 221 facing away from thedisc body 219 can be provided cutting edges (not shown) so as to enhance the ability of theguide platform 221 to straighten out and clean up long grass and long vines. In the illustrated embodiment, theguide platform 221 is in the shape of an arc. In other embodiments, theguide platform 221 may also be configured in other shapes, such as a V-shape. - Please refer to
FIG. 56 , theaxle sleeve 230 is located at a center of the side of thedisc body 219 facing away from the lawn. Theaxle sleeve 230 is used to operate with an output shaft of a power mechanism, so that the blade carrier disc assembly 218 rotates under the power from the output shaft. The reinforcing ribs 231 are arranged along the radial direction of thedisc body 219 and are evenly distributed around theaxle sleeve 230 along the circumference of thedisc body 219. In one embodiment, the side of thedisc body 219 facing away from the lawn can further include secondary reinforcing ribs 232 arranged in the circumferential direction, so as to further enhance the strength of thedisc body 219. - Referring to
FIG. 57 throughFIG. 59 , eachblade mounting groove 220 is formed by recessing inward from the side of thedisc body 219 facing toward the lawn, and located between the adjacent two reinforcing ribs 231. Theblade 6 is installed in theblade mounting groove 220 by afastener 226 and arranged as such that in the axial direction of thedisc body 219, theblade 6 and thefastener 226 do not protrude out of theblade mounting groove 220. With this arrangement, theblade 6 can be hidden in theblade mounting groove 220, so as to prevent theblade 6 and thefastener 226 from colliding with hard objects on the lawn, and prevent thefastener 226 from being removed. Moreover, such arrangement can also prevent theblade 6 from directly contacting broken grass and soil on the lawn, thereby effectively preventing the broken grass from being entangled on theblade 6, and preventing the soil from entering between theblade 6 and thefastener 226. - The
blade mounting groove 220 can include agroove bottom wall 227 andgroove side walls 225 located on both sides of thegroove bottom wall 227. Thegroove bottom wall 227 is provided with aboss 233 and a mountinghole 234 recessed inward from theboss 233. Theblade 6 is detachably mounted on theboss 233 through thefastener 226 and the mountinghole 234. Such configuration can effectively reduce the friction between theblade 6 and thedisc body 219, thereby avoiding disadvantageous large friction from blades being conventionally and directly mounted on thedisc body 219, and improving the working efficiency of the blade carrier disc assembly 218. - The angle between the
groove bottom wall 227 and thegroove side wall 225 is an obtuse angle, and achamfer 229 is provided at the intersection of thegroove side wall 225 and thedisc body 219; such configuration can effectively reduce the friction between thedisc body 219 and the lawn, thereby effectively improving the working efficiency of the blade carrier disc assembly 218. In the radial direction of thedisc 219, the side of theblade mounting groove 220 near the axis of thedisc 219 is also provided with a through groove 123, so as to facilitate the passing through ofblade 6, grass, stones, etc. - In one embodiment, the
guide platforms 221 and thefasteners 226 are in a circle. In the illustrated embodiment, thefastener 226 may be, without limiting, a screw or other parts. In other embodiments, theblade mounting groove 220 may also be provided with a groove cover (not shown) disposed opposite to thegroove bottom wall 227 to prevent grass, vines and soil from jamming theblade 6. The groove cover and theblade mounting groove 220 may be integrally constructed, or may be separately manufactured. The blade carrier disc assembly 218 of the disclosure installs theblades 6 in the respectiveblade mounting grooves 220 of theblade carrier disc 5, so that theblades 6 are hidden in theblade carrier disc 5, thereby avoiding theblades 6 from grass or mud jamming and improving the working efficiency of the blade carrier disc assembly 218. - Referring to
FIG. 60 andFIG. 61 , in the disclosure, the mower can include a height-adjustment mechanism 565 arranged in thecase 18. The rotating of the height-adjustment mechanism 565 drives thecutting mechanism 3 to move up and down relative to thehousing 1, in order to change the cutting height of thecutting mechanism 3. A multi-thread mating structure (not labeled) is provided between the height-adjustment mechanism 565 and thecutting mechanism 3. The multi-thread mating structure can include a first threadedportion 569 provided on the height-adjustment mechanism 565 and a second threadedportion 580 provided on thecutting mechanism 3. Both the first threadedportion 569 and the second threadedportion 580 are provided with multi-screw threads. Specifically, the height-adjustment mechanism 565 can include the first threadedportion 569, a limiting portion 570, a lockingportion 566, a connectingportion 568, and a knob sequentially arranged from bottom to top in that order. The height-adjustment mechanism 565 may be integrally manufactured, or may be an assembled structure. - Referring to
FIG. 60 throughFIG. 62 , thecutting mechanism 3 can include ahousing 574, a motor (not shown) disposed on thehousing 574, and a cutting assembly (not shown) disposed on an output shaft of the motor for cutting grass. The second threadedportion 580 is disposed on thehousing 574. Thehousing 574 can include abottom wall 573 a and anotherbottom wall 573 b. Thebottom wall 573 a and thebottom wall 573 b form a receivingcavity 576 for accommodating the motor. Thebottom wall 573 b protrudes outward to form a protrudingportion 572. The protrudingportion 572 is provided with a throughhole 571 penetrating therethrough, and the second threadedportion 580 is provided on the inner wall of the throughhole 571. In the illustrated embodiment, the first threadedportion 569 may be a male thread, and the second threadedportion 580 may be a female thread. In other embodiments, the first threadedportion 569 may be a female thread, and the second threadedportion 580 may be a male thread. - As illustrated in
FIG. 60 throughFIG. 62 , the multi-thread mating structure can include different thread thicknesses. In the illustrated embodiment, the multi-thread mating structure may be a three-threaded thread, in which the twothreads first thread portion 569 have the same thread thickness, and a thread thickness of thethird thread 579 is smaller than the thread thickness of thethreads portion 569 is screwed into the second threadedportion 580, if positions of the multi-thread portions are misaligned, the first threadedportion 569 cannot be screwed in normally, only the corresponding thread with the same thickness can be screwed in. - The screw-in direction of the first threaded
portion 569 is unique, thereby restricting the height-adjustment mechanism 565 to be assembled to thecutting mechanism 3 from a specific direction. With this setting, there is no need to provide a sign or other auxiliary device to guide the operator to install, and the installation becomes convenient. In addition, since there are three stress points at the connection during connecting multi-screw threads, the first threadedportion 569 and the second threadedportion 580 are not easy to jam during the mating. Therefore, the multi-threaded design of different thicknesses plays a good role in foolproof. As illustrated inFIG. 60 throughFIG. 64 , in other embodiments, the thread thicknesses of two threads can be made equal, and the thread thickness of thethird thread 579 is greater than the thread thicknesses of the two threads. Alternatively, the thread thicknesses of the three threads are set to be different from one another, which can also restrict the height-adjustment mechanism 565 to be assembled to thecutting mechanism 3 from a specific direction. - As illustrated in
FIG. 60 throughFIG. 64 , the limiting portion 570 is used to limit a rotation angle of the height-adjustment mechanism 565. Thehousing 1 is provided with a protrusion (not shown) that cooperates with the limiting portion 570. The limiting portion 570 and the protrusion block each other to limit rotation positions of the height-adjustment mechanism 565 in two directions, thereby restricting the highest position and the lowest position achieved by the rotations of the height-adjustment mechanism 565. Due to the mutual blocking between the limiting portion 570 and the protrusion, a rotation angle of the height-adjustment mechanism 565 is less than 360°. - As illustrated in
FIG. 64 throughFIG. 64 , the lockingportion 566 is used to lock the height-adjustingmechanism 565 after the height-adjustment mechanism 565 completes height-adjustment, so as to avoid an unexpected change in the cutting height. As shown inFIG. 64 , thehousing 1 is fixed with a resilient member 582 that cooperates with the lockingportion 566. The lockingportion 566 may be a gear structure, and the resilient member 582 is locked with a tooth groove of the gear structure to lock the height-adjustment mechanism 565. Specifically, the resilient member 582 can include atop end 581 that matches the shape of the tooth groove of the gear structure, and thetop end 581 is snapped in the tooth groove to prevent the height-adjustment mechanism 565 from rotating. When the height-adjustingmechanism 565 is manually rotated, the gear structure rotates accordingly, and the resilient member 582 is elastically deformed and snapped into next tooth groove. - As illustrated in
FIG. 60 throughFIG. 62 , the connectingportion 568 is used as the adjusting knob, and the adjusting of the height-adjustment mechanism 565 is achieved by manually rotating the knob. In other embodiments, the knob can also use a gear structure linked with an output shaft of another motor through a transmission gear, so as to realize electric drive rotation, thereby further improving the experience of the operator. - Referring to
FIG. 65 andFIG. 66 , regarding an embodiment of the mower as provide by the disclosure, thecase 18 can include anupper base 583 and alower base 584 that is matched with theupper base 583. Thelower base 584 is provided with a slidingpassage 587 penetrating through thelower base 584. Thecutting mechanism 3 can slide in the slidingpassage 587, and at least partially protrude from the slidingpassage 587 in a direction facing away from the bottom surface of thelower base 584, thereby allowing thecutting mechanism 3 to cut lawns, vegetation and so on. In the illustrated embodiment, the casing includes two parts such as theupper base 583 and thelower base 584, and the slidingpassage 587 only penetrates thelower base 584. In other embodiments, thecase 18 can also be made of one or more than two parts, and the slidingpassage 587 can penetrate through thecase 18. - Referring to
FIG. 67 , thecutting mechanism 3 is arranged in the slidingpassage 587 and used for cutting lawns, vegetation and so on. Thecutting mechanism 3 can include abase 595, a prime mover (e.g., a motor) 598 mounted on thebase 595, and a cuttingassembly 592 mounted on the output shaft of the prime mover 598. The base 595 can include afirst side wall 594, a second side wall opposite to thefirst side wall 594, athird side wall 596 perpendicular to thefirst side wall 594, and a fourth side wall opposite to thethird side wall 596. Thefirst side wall 594 protrudes toward anadjusting mechanism 585 to form a protrudingportion 589. The protrudingportion 589 is provided with a threaded hole penetrating through the protrudingportion 589, and an internal thread is provided in the threaded hole. - In the illustrated embodiment, the prime mover 598 may be an electric motor. In other embodiments, the prime mover 598 may also be a gasoline engine. The cutting
assembly 592 can include ablade carrier disc 5 installed on the output shaft of the prime mover 598 andblades 6 installed on theblade carrier disc 5. The output shaft of the prime mover 598 rotates at a high speed, which drives theblade carrier disc 5 and theblades 6 to rotate at a high speed, which is beneficial for theblades 6 to cut lawn, vegetation, etc. - As illustrated in
FIG. 67 , theadjusting mechanism 585 is used to adjust a cutting height of thecutting mechanism 3. Theadjusting mechanism 585 can include an adjustingmember 588 and a drivingmember 590 rotating with the adjustingmember 588. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustingmember 588 is a knob, and the drivingmember 590 is a screw rod provided with an external thread. The drivingmember 590 cooperates with the internal thread of the protrudingportion 589 through the external thread, and drives the base 595 to move up and down in the slidingpassage 587, which may in turn adjust a length that is from the cuttingassembly 592 protruded out an end of the slidingpassage 587 facing away from thecasing 1, thereby achieving the purpose of adjusting the cutting height of thecutting mechanism 3. - In order to make the engagement between the external thread and the internal thread smoothly during adjustment, the screw rod is provided with multiple threads. In the illustrated embodiment, the screw rod is provided with at least three threads, the
adjustment member 588 is a knob, and the adjustment is achieved by manually rotating the knob. The knob is provided with an indicator label, and thehousing 1 is provided with level/grade labels matched with the indicator label. When the knob is rotated, the indicator label can point to different level labels, so that the operator can easily and quickly know the mowing height. In other embodiments, the adjustingmember 588 may also be a gear, and rotate with a motor output shaft through a transmission gear, thereby accomplishing electric-driven rotation and further improving the user experience. Since the protrudingportion 589 protrudes from thefirst side wall 594, the drivingmember 590 is biased to one side of thebase 595. With this arrangement, the overall height of thecutting mechanism 3 and theadjusting mechanism 585 after being assembled together can be reduced, thereby lowering the center of gravity, so that the mower can run more stably. - Referring to
FIG. 67 throughFIG. 70 , aguiding mechanism 586 can include aresilient guide member 586 a and aguide groove 586 d. Theguide groove 586 d and theresilient guide member 586 a can slide relatively. One of theguide groove 586 d and theresilient guide member 586 a is provided on thecase 18, and the other is provided on thebase 595. In the illustrated embodiment, theguide groove 586 d is provided on thebase 595, and theresilient guide member 586 a is fixedly installed on thecase 18. Specifically, in the illustrated embodiment, there are twoguide grooves 586 d, which are respectively located on thethird side wall 596 and the fourth side wall. - In other embodiments, one
guide groove 586 d may be arranged on the second side wall. One end of theresilient guide member 586 a is provided with apositioning hole 603, and the other end is provided with apositioning groove 602. Theresilient guide member 586 a is matched with corresponding fixing structures (not shown) on thecase 18 through thepositioning hole 603 and thepositioning groove 602, so that theresilient guide member 586 a is fixedly installed on thecase 18. Theguide groove 586 d can include agroove bottom wall 586 c and a pair ofgroove side walls 586 b. Theresilient guide member 586 a is located between the pair ofgroove side walls 586 b. Thegroove bottom wall 586 c is further provided with aguide rail 597. Theresilient guide member 586 a can include abase body 600 and acantilever 601 protruding from thebase body 600 toward thegroove bottom wall 586 c. Thecantilever 601 elastically touches against thegroove bottom wall 586 c to limit thebase 595. Thebase 600 is provided with aslot 605 along a direction perpendicular to thegroove bottom wall 586 c, and thecantilever 601 goes across theslot 605. - In the illustrated embodiment, the
slot 605 penetrates through thebase body 600. In other embodiments, theslot 605 may be a blind slot. In additional embodiments, thebase body 600 may not be provided with theslot 605. - A cross section of the
cantilever 601 in the transverse direction is arc-shaped. In the illustrated embodiment, thecantilever 601 spans theslot 605 in a direction perpendicular to thegroove side wall 586 b. Thecantilever 601 can include afirst end 606 and asecond end 604 located on both sides of theslot 605. Thefirst end 606 is fixedly connected to thebase body 600, and thesecond end 604 is separated from thebase body 600. Thecantilever 601 is further provided with aguide groove 607 penetrating thecantilever 601 along the sliding direction of thebase 595, and theguide groove 607 is located between thefirst end 606 and thesecond end 604. Theguide groove 607 cooperates with theguide rail 597 to facilitate alignment during installation. An end of theguide groove 607 is trumpet-shaped/horn-shaped. - Referring to
FIG. 71 andFIG. 72 ,FIG. 71 shows aresilient guide member 608 according to another embodiment. Theresilient guide member 608 can include abase body 609 andcantilevers 610 protruding outward from thebase body 609. Thebase body 609 is provided withslots 611 along a direction perpendicular to thegroove bottom wall 586 c. In the illustrated embodiment, theslot 611 penetrates through thebase body 609. In another embodiment, theslot 611 may be a blind slot. In still another embodiment, thebase body 609 may not be provided with theslot 611. In the illustrated embodiment, there may be twoslots 611 and twocantilevers 610, the twoslots 611 are arranged along the sliding direction of thebase 595, and the twocantilevers 610 are arranged across the pair ofslots 611 respectively along sliding direction of thebase 595.Resilient arms 612 are provided on the side of thebase body 609 opposite to thegroove side wall 586 b, and theresilient arm 612 and thebase body 609 together may form an O-shape structure. - As illustrated in
FIG. 67 , to adjust the mowing height of thecutting mechanism 3 of the mower, the adjustingmember 588 may be adjusted so that the drivingmember 590 may rotate, thereby driving thebase 595 to slide along the slidingpassage 587, and achieving the adjusting of the mowing height of thecutting mechanism 3. In this case, thecantilever arm 601 may moderately touch against the side wall of the base 595 to limit the base 595 in a direction perpendicular to thegroove bottom wall 586 c. Thebase body 600 and theresilient arms 612 appropriately touch against thegroove side wall 586 b to limit the base 595 in a direction perpendicular to thegroove side wall 586 b, so as to avoid problems such as bending of the sliding path of thebase 595 and tilting of thebase 595, and thereby ensure that the base 595 will not get stuck. By setting theguiding mechanism 586, it can avoid the problems such as the bending of the sliding path of the prime mover and the tilting of the prime mover during the process of adjusting the mowing height of the mower, thereby effectively improving the user experience. - Referring to
FIG. 73 andFIG. 75 , an embodiment of the disclosure further provides a charging device. The charging device can include afirst charging assembly 459 and asecond charging assembly 475 corresponding with thefirst charging assembly 459. Thefirst charging assembly 459 can include a symmetrical structure and is provided with a receivingcavity 460 inside. The receivingcavity 460 is provided with a firstresilient terminal assembly 461 and a secondresilient terminal assembly 464. The firstresilient terminal assembly 461 can include afirst groove 462 and a firstresilient terminal 463. Thefirst groove 462 is located in the receivingcavity 460, and the firstresilient terminal 463 is fixed in thefirst groove 462. The secondresilient terminal assembly 464 can include asecond groove 465 and a secondresilient terminal 466. Thesecond groove 465 is located in the receivingcavity 460, and the secondresilient terminal 466 is fixed in thesecond groove 465. An embeddedspace 467 is formed between the firstresilient terminal 463 and the secondresilient terminal 466. One side of thefirst charging assembly 459 is provided with atapered opening 468, and thetapered opening 468 connects with the embeddedspace 467. An end of thefirst charging assembly 459 opposite to thetapered opening 468 is provided with a first mountingportion 469. - As illustrated in
FIG. 73 andFIG. 74 , the firstresilient terminal 463 can include a first fixing part 470 and afirst contact part 471. Thefirst contact part 471 can include a firstinitial contact portion 472 and a firstcharging contact portion 473. The firstcharging contact portion 473 is connected to the first fixing portion 470 by the firstinitial contact portion 472. The first fixing part 470 is fixed in thefirst groove 462. Thefirst contact part 471 can further include a firstbend tail portion 474, and the firstbent tail portion 474 is connected to the firstcharging contact portion 473. The first fixing part 470 and the firstinitial contact portion 472 may form a first rounded corner (not shown in the drawings), and an angle of the first rounded corner may be less than 90 degrees. The firstinitial contact portion 472 and the firstcharging contact portion 473 may form a second rounded corner (not labelled in the drawings), and an angle of the second rounded corner may be greater than 90 degrees and less than 180 degrees. The firstbent tail portion 474 faces away from the embeddedspace 467. The angle of the rounded corner should be understood as an intersection angle of extension lines of two sides of the rounded corner. The secondresilient terminal 466 and the firstresilient terminal 463 may have similar structure. - As illustrated in
FIG. 75 , thesecond charging assembly 475 can include a symmetrical structure. One side of thesecond charging assembly 475 is provided with a protrudingportion 476, and the other side of thesecond charging assembly 475 opposite to theprotruding part 476 is provided with a second mountingportion 477. The protrudingportion 476 is connected to the second mountingportion 477 through a taperedportion 478. The protrudingportion 476 is provided with a thirdresilient terminal 479 and a fourthresilient terminal 480. -
FIG. 76 is a schematic structural view of the thirdresilient terminal 479 in an embodiment of the disclosure. As illustrated inFIG. 76 , the thirdresilient terminal 479 may have a shape similar to a fishhook. The thirdresilient terminal 479 can include athird fixing part 481 and afirst hook part 482. Thethird fixing part 481 is provided with afirst bump 483 and a firstfitting opening 484. Thefirst bump 483 is located at an end of the third fixingpart 481 connected to thefirst hook part 482, and thefirst bump 483 is located at a side of the third fixingpart 481 facing away from thefirst hook part 482. The firstfitting opening 484 is located at an end of the third fixingpart 481 away from thefirst hook part 482. The structure of the fourthresilient terminal 480 is similar to the structure of the thirdresilient terminal 479. -
FIG. 77 is a cross-sectional view of the second charging assembly described in an embodiment of the disclosure. As illustrated inFIG. 75 throughFIG. 77 , the protrudingportion 476 can include aterminal fixing assembly 485 of protruding portion, alower cover plate 492, and an upper cover plate (not shown in the drawings). Theterminal fixing assembly 485 is disposed between thelower cover plate 492 and the upper cover plate (not shown). Theterminal fixing assembly 485 can include afirst fixing plate 486, asecond fixing plate 487, and a built-in plate 488. Thefirst fixing plate 486 and thesecond fixing plate 487 are arranged on each side of the built-in plate 488. - A first embedded groove 489 is provided between the
first fixing plate 486 and the built-in plate 488. Afirst fixing buckle 490 is provided on the side of thefirst fixing plate 486 facing away from the built-in plate 488. Thefirst hook part 482 is embedded in the first embedded groove 489. The firstfitting opening 484 is detachably connected to thefirst fixing buckle 490. A second embeddedgroove 491 is provided between thesecond fixing plate 487 and the built-in plates 488. A second fixing buckle (not labelled in the drawings) is provided on the side of thesecond fixing plate 487 facing away from the built-in plate 488. The second hook part (not labelled in the drawings) is embedded in the second embeddedgroove 491. The second fitting opening (not labelled in the drawings) and the second fixing buckle (not labelled in the drawings) are detachably connected with each other. - As illustrated in
FIG. 77 , thefirst hook part 482 is provided with a first block opening, the first embedded groove 489 is provided with a first block plate therein, and the first block plate is embedded in the first block opening so as to prevent thefirst hook part 482 from moving up and down. The second hook part is provided with a second block opening, the second embeddedgroove 491 is provided with a second block plate therein, and the second block plate is embedded in the second block opening so as to prevent the second hook part from moving up and down. -
FIG. 78 is a schematic structural view of thefirst fixing buckle 490 in an embodiment of the disclosure. The structure of the second fixing buckle is similar to the structure of thefirst fixing buckle 490. As shown inFIG. 78 , thefirst fixing buckle 490 can include aninclined surface 493 and aperpendicular surface 494. Theinclined surface 493 and theperpendicular surface 494 are located on opposite sides of thefirst fixing buckle 490, and theinclined surface 493 faces toward the first hook part (not labelled in the drawings). Theinclined surface 493 facilitates thefirst fixing buckle 490 to be inserted into the firstfitting opening 484. Theperpendicular surface 494 prevents thefirst fixing buckle 490 from being separated from the firstfitting opening 484. -
FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram of a first process of using thefirst charging assembly 459 and thesecond charging assembly 475 in an embodiment of the disclosure. Referring toFIG. 73 ,FIG. 74 ,FIG. 75 andFIG. 79 , a distance between the firstcharging contact portion 473 and the secondcharging contact portion 497 is smaller than a distance between the thirdresilient terminal 479 and the fourthresilient terminal 480. Thesecond charging assembly 475 is inserted into thefirst charging assembly 459 along the X direction. During the first process of using thefirst charging assembly 459 and thesecond charging assembly 475, the thirdresilient terminal 479 is in resilient contact with the firstinitial contact portion 472, and the fourthresilient terminal 480 is in resilient contact with the secondinitial contact portion 498. When thesecond charging assembly 475 is inserted into thefirst charging assembly 459 in the X direction, since the opening size of the tapered opening (also referred to as tapered port) 468 is relatively large, the protrudingportion 476 is easy to be inserted into thetapered opening 468. The side walls of thetapered opening 468 can play a role of guiding the insertion direction of the protrudingportion 476, and under the guiding of the side walls, the protrudingportion 476 slides into the embeddedspace 467 along the side walls. -
FIG. 80 is a schematic diagram of a second process of using thefirst charging assembly 459 and thesecond charging assembly 475 in an embodiment of the disclosure. Referring toFIG. 73 ,FIG. 74 ,FIG. 76 andFIG. 80 , thesecond charging assembly 475 is inserted into thefirst charging assembly 459 along the X direction. During the second process of using thefirst charging assembly 459 and thesecond charging assembly 475, the protrudingportion 476 is inserted into the embedded space (not labelled in the drawings), a connection between the firstinitial contact portion 472 and the firstcharging contact portion 473 is in resilient contact with the third fixingpart 481, the firstcharging contact portion 473 is in resilient contact with thefirst bump 483. A connection between the secondinitial contact portion 498 and the secondcharging contact portion 497 is in resilient contact with thefourth fixing portion 499, the secondcharging contact portion 497 is in resilient contact with thesecond bump 500, shapes of the taperedportion 478 and the taperedport 468 correspond with each other, and the taperedportion 478 can fully fill the taperedport 468. - As illustrated in
FIG. 80 , the firstelastic terminal 463 and the thirdelastic terminal 479 are in resilient contact with each other, and there are two contact points between the firstresilient terminal 463 and the thirdresilient terminal 479. The connection between the firstinitial contact portion 472 and the firstcharging contact portion 473 may touch against the first bump. The secondresilient terminal 466 and the fourthresilient terminal 480 are in resilient contact with each other, there are two contact points between the secondresilient terminal 466 and the fourthresilient terminals 480, and the connection between the second initial contact portion and the secondcharging contact portion 498 may touch against the second bump. Such arrangement not only ensures the stability of contact, but also prevents thesecond charging assembly 475 from detaching from thefirst charging assembly 459. - As illustrated in
FIG. 74 throughFIG. 76 , the firstresilient terminal 463, the secondresilient terminal 466, the thirdresilient terminal 479, and the fourthresilient terminal 480 may be constructed using bent metal sheets. - Referring to
FIG. 81 throughFIG. 83 , theupper base 583 and thelower base 584 of thecase 18 jointly form a receivingcavity 613 for receiving acontrol circuit board 618. Thecontrol circuit board 618 is installed on thelower base 584. The mower may further include a battery pack (not shown) for supplying power to the motor. The battery pack and themotor 637 are installed on thelower base 584. Combination device as provided is used to directly or indirectly control the mower to perform a certain action, and include a first device installed on theupper base 583 and a second device installed on thelower base 584. The first device and the second device are not electrically connected. Such arrangement can effectively avoid an electrical connection between the components arranged in theupper base 583 and the components arranged in thelower base 584 which causes inconvenience to the replacement of theupper base 583. - In the illustrated embodiment, regardless of whether the devices are working or not working, the first device will not be energized. That is, no operating current may passes through the first device when the second device is energized (i.e., there is an operating current passing through the second device). When the first device and the second device are cooperative, the combination device controls the mower to perform a corresponding action. In this case, the first device and the second device are contactless or non-connected electrically. That is, there is no cable connecting between the first device and the second device, for example, the first device and the second device are induced by magnetic component or optical component. This arrangement can not only control the mower directly or indirectly by the non-contact cooperation of the first device and the second device, but also avoid the disadvantage in the prior art, in which components installed on the
upper base 583 and components installed on thelower base 584 need to be electrically connected through wired lines or conductive terminals. Thus, this arrangement reduces the difficulty of assembling theupper base 583 and thelower base 584. - When the
upper base 583 needs to be replaced due to aging or damage caused by collision, the operator can directly disassemble and replace theupper base 583 conveniently and quickly without arranging the wires or re-plugging the conductive terminals, thereby improving the working efficiency of the operator. In addition, since the first device is mounted on theupper base 583, the second device is mounted on thelower base 584, and the first device and the second device are in contactless cooperation, the second device and thelower base 584 can be packaged as a whole, thereby enhancing the waterproof performance of the mower. - In one embodiment, the second device is integrated on the
control circuit board 618. The combination device may be a liftingsensor 632 that detects whether the mower is lifted, acollision sensor 639 that detects whether the mower collides with an obstacle, asafety switch 620 that controls power on or off of the mower, and/or asafety lock 622 that controls whether the mower is in an active state. In other embodiments, the second device may include other electrical components, such as a circuit board, a battery pack, amotor 637 and so on. Details of the liftingsensor 632, thecollision sensor 639, thesafety switch 620, and thesafety lock 622 may be further described below. - Referring to
FIG. 81 throughFIG. 85 , theupper base 583 is provided withsupport columns 614 with atop cover 615 mounted on thesupport columns 614. As illustrated inFIG. 82 andFIG. 83 , thesupport column 614 can include a mountingplate 628 fixedly mounted on theupper base 583, anelastic element 629 mounted on the mountingplate 628, adamper 631 at one end of theelastic element 629 away from the mountingplate 628, and aprotective sleeve 630 sheathed around theelastic element 629. In the illustrated embodiment, theelastic element 629 is a spring, and theprotective sleeve 630 is a bellows. Thetop cover 615 is mounted on thedamper 631, and ahandle 619 is provided thereon. When a user holds thehandle 619 to lift the mower, theelastic element 629 undergoes an elastic deformation, and thetop cover 615 moves in a direction away from theupper base 583. When the mower collides with an obstacle, thetop cover 615 continues to move for a certain distance along an original forward direction of the mower under the action of inertia. In this case, theelastic element 629 undergoes an elastic deformation. - As illustrated in
FIG. 81 andFIG. 82 , the liftingsensor 632 is used to detect up and down relative motions between thetop cover 615 and thecase 18. The liftingsensor 632 can include a metal plate (not shown) installed on thesupport column 614 and afirst Hall sensor 633 installed on thelower base 584. The first device can include a control component, and the control component is the metal plate. The second component is thefirst Hall sensor 633. The control component is not electrically connected to the second device and is used to control the second device. When the mower is lifted, the metal plate is moved away from thefirst hall sensor 633 under the action of thesupport column 614, which causes a signal change of thefirst hall sensor 633. In this case, thefirst Hall sensor 633 controls the mower to stop working, so as to prevent the cuttingassembly 616 from hurting people. In other embodiments, thefirst Hall sensor 633 may send a corresponding signal to thecontrol circuit board 618, so that thecontrol circuit board 618 controls the cuttingassembly 616 to stop working. - In the illustrated embodiment, the first device of the lifting
sensor 632 is a metal plate, and the second device is a Hall sensor. In other embodiments, the first device of the liftingsensor 632 may be a magnet, and the second device may be a reed switch; or, the first device of thelift sensor 632 may be an armature, and the second device may be an inductive sensor. In the illustrated embodiment, the first device of thelift sensor 632 is installed on thesupport column 614. In other embodiments, the first device of the liftingsensor 632 may be installed on thetop cover 615 instead. In the illustrated embodiment, the first device is a metal plate, and the second device is a Hall sensor. In other embodiments, the first device may be a Hall sensor, and the second device is a metal plate. - As illustrated in
FIG. 83 , thecollision sensor 639 is used to detect a horizontal movement of thetop cover 615. Thecollision sensor 639 can include athird magnet 640 installed on thetop cover 615 and athird Hall sensor 641 installed on thelower base 584. Thethird magnet 640 is a control component of the first device, and thethird Hall sensor 641 is the second device. When the mower collides with an obstacle during traveling, thetop cover 615 will continue to move forward for a certain distance along an original forward direction of the mower under the action of inertia, so that themagnet 640 and thethird Hall sensor 641 produce a relative displacement, causing a signal change of thethird Hall sensor 641. In this case, thethird Hall sensor 641 controls the mower to reverse for a certain distance so as to make the mower avoid the obstacle. In the illustrated embodiment, thethird Hall sensor 641 directly controls the retreat of the mower. In other embodiments, thethird Hall sensor 641 may send a corresponding signal to thecontrol circuit board 618, and the mower is controlled to retreat through thecontrol circuit board 618. In the illustrated embodiment, thecollision sensors 639 are provided at the front and rear of the mower. In other embodiments, the first device of thecollision sensor 639 may be an armature, and the second device may be an inductive sensor. - As shown in
FIG. 81 andFIG. 82 , theupper base 583 is provided with a first switch, and thelower base 584 is provided with a second switch. The first switch is electrically disconnected from the second switch. The first switch controls the second switch to be on or off. Specifically, thesafety switch 620 is used to control the power on or off of the mower. Thesafety switch 620 can include abutton 621 installed on theupper base 583, a first magnet 624 (i.e., first device or first switch) installed on thebutton 621, and a first reed switch 625 (i.e., second device or second switch) installed on thelower base 584. Thebutton 621 is pivotally mounted on theupper base 583 via a pivot, and thebutton 621 can include afirst end 626 and asecond end 627 arranged at two sides of the pivot. Thefirst magnet 624 is installed on thefirst end 626. When thefirst end 626 is pressed, thefirst magnet 624 closes to thefirst reed switch 625. In this case, thefirst reed switch 625 is in the on-state, and the mower is in an energized state. When thesecond end 627 is pressed, thefirst magnet 624 is away from thefirst reed switch 625. In this case, thefirst reed switch 625 is in the off-state, and the mower is in a switched-off state. - As illustrated in
FIG. 81 andFIG. 82 , thesafety lock 622 is used to control whether the mower is in an activated state (also referred to as active state). When the mower is in the activated state, the mower can be started. When the mower is in an inactive state or in a locked state, the mower cannot be started. Thesafety lock 622 can include asafety key 623, amotor lock body 634 installed on theupper base 583 corresponding with thesafety key 623, and a second reed switch 635 (i.e., second device) installed on thelower base 584 or thelock body 634. A second magnet 636 (i.e., first device) is provided at one end of thesafety key 623 close to thesecond reed switch 635. When thesafety key 623 is inserted into thelock body 634 and thesafety key 623 is rotated to make thesecond magnet 636 closing to thesecond reed switch 635, thesecond reed switch 635 is in an on-state, and the mower is in the activated state correspondingly. When thesafety key 623 is pulled out from thelock body 634 or thesafety key 623 is rotated to make thesecond magnet 636 away from thesecond reed switch 635, the secondmagnetic reed switch 635 is in an off-state, and the mower is in a locked state at this time. - Referring to
FIG. 86 throughFIG. 91 , amain body 644 of the mower at least can include a battery assembly (not shown) for power supply, and at least two drive motors (not shown) for driving the cutting assembly and the walking assembly 8. Themain body 644 of the mower should also include other components used to control and drive the operation of the mower. Especially, themain body 644 can further include chargingterminals 645 for electrically connecting an external charging post to charge the battery assembly. Acasing assembly 640 is used for supporting the cutting assembly and the walking assembly 8 accommodated in themain body 644. In the disclosure, thecasing assembly 640 can include afirst casing 641 and asecond casing 642 that are buckled/engaged with each other, and themain body 644 is received between thefirst casing 641 and thesecond casing 642 to prevent themain body 644 from being affected by the external environment during use and thereby ensure the normal operation of themain body 644. - Referring to
FIG. 87 throughFIG. 91 , thefirst casing 641 is hollow, thesecond casing 642 is generally plate-shaped. Thefirst casing 641 is fastened onto an edge of thesecond casing 642 by a fastening structure, and a projection of thefirst casing 641 on a horizontal plane covers a projection of thesecond casing 642 on the horizontal plane. In one embodiment, the fastening structure is a snap-fit structure. In other embodiments of the disclosure, the fastening structure may also be, without limiting, a threaded structure, as long as the detachable connection between thefirst housing 641 and thesecond housing 642 is ensured. - As illustrated in
FIG. 87 throughFIG. 91 , thefirst casing 641 and thesecond casing 642 are respectively formed with afirst handle structure 643 and asecond handle structure 654 for carrying thecasing assembly 640 or the mower. As thecasing assembly 640 is defined to have a first end and an opposite second end, thefirst handle structure 643 is located at the first end of thefirst casing 641, and thesecond handle structure 654 is located at the second end of thesecond casing 642. Projections of thefirst handle structure 643 and thesecond handle structure 654 on the horizontal plane are staggered arranged. - As illustrated in
FIG. 87 throughFIG. 91 , thefirst handle structure 643 and theuniversal wheel 10 are both located at the first end of thecasing assembly 640; and thesecond handle structure 654, thewalking wheel 9, and a third walking wheel are all located at the second end of thecasing assembly 640. With this arrangement, it is convenient for users to choose different handle structures to carry thecasing assembly 640 or the mower according to different needs. - Referring to
FIG. 88 a , thefirst handle structure 643 is recessed from outside to inside of thefirst casing 641, and thefirst handle structure 643 penetrates through thefirst casing 641 and forms at least agripping portion 652 along an edge of the penetrating position. Specifically, the first end of thefirst casing 641 in the illustrated embodiment can include afirst protrusion 646 protruding outward along the horizontal plane and asecond protrusion 647 that is vertically offset from thefirst protrusion 646. Thefirst handle structure 643 is located between thefirst protrusion 646 and thesecond protrusion 647. The positions and orientations of the user hands when transporting thecasing assembly 640 or the mower together may constitute gripping positions during transporting. Thefirst handle structure 643 and thesecond handle structure 654 each can providegripping portions 652 corresponding to at least two gripping positions. - Referring to
FIG. 88 a andFIG. 88 b , the grippingportions 652 provided on thefirst handle structure 643 can include a firstgripping portion 648, a secondgripping portion 649, and a throughhole 605 between the firstgripping portion 648 and the secondgripping portion 649. The gripping positions of the firstgripping portion 648 and the second gripping portion are arranged up and down in a staggered manner. A distance between the throughhole 650 and themain body 644 is about 5-10 cm, so as to facilitate the user to extend his hand into thefirst handle structure 643 to achieve the transporting of thecasing assembly 640 or the mower. - Referring to
FIG. 86 throughFIG. 88 b , both the firstgripping portion 648 and the secondgripping portion 649 are arranged obliquely, an inclination degree of the firstgripping portion 648 is greater than an inclination degree of the secondgripping portion 649, and the chargingterminals 645 are arranged toward the throughhole 650. Such an arrangement allows the external charging device to be directly and electrically connected to the chargingterminals 645 through the throughhole 650, which further improves the practicability of the mower. - Referring to
FIG. 89 , the grippingportion 652 can further include a firstgripping space 653 recessed from an edge of the firstgripping portion 648 into the interior of thefirst casing 641, and a secondgripping space 651 recessed from an edge of the secondgripping portion 649 into the interior of thefirst casing 641. A projection of the firstgripping space 653 on the horizontal plane covers a projection of the secondgripping space 651 on the horizontal plane. In the illustrated embodiment, the firstgripping space 653 is formed on thefirst protrusion 646, and the secondgripping space 651 is formed on thesecond protrusion 647. In such an arrangement, when the user lifts thecasing assembly 640 or the mower through the firstgripping portion 648 or the secondgripping portion 649, the user can bend and place his/her fingers in the firstgripping space 653 or the secondgripping space 651, thereby effectively reducing user fatigue accumulated when grasping thefirst griping portion 648 or the secondgripping portion 649. - Referring to
FIG. 90 andFIG. 91 , thesecond handle structure 654 is arranged in a groove shape. In the disclosure, thesecond handle structure 654 is formed by recessing from a bottom of thesecond casing 642 toward the interior of thecasing assembly 640, and an edge of thesecond handle structure 654 forms at least one grippingportion 652. - As illustrated in
FIG. 90 andFIG. 91 , the grippingportion 652 formed on thesecond casing 642 can include a thirdgripping portion 658 and a thirdgripping space 657 corresponding to the thirdgripping portion 658. The thirdgripping portion 658 extends along a surface of thesecond casing 642 toward the center of the thirdgripping portion 658. In an embodiment of the disclosure, thesecond handle structure 654 can further include aninclined guiding surface 656 opposite to the thirdgripping portion 658, and such arrangement can facilitate the user to extend the fingers into the thirdgripping space 657 and hold onto the thirdgripping portion 658, thus achieving the transportation of thecasing assembly 640 or the mower. - Referring to
FIG. 86 throughFIG. 91 , in an embodiment of the disclosure, the parts used for griping and inclined to thehousing assembly 640/mower in thefirst grip portion 648, thesecond grip portion 649, and thethird grip portion 658 are all set to rounded corners. Such arrangement can effectively reduce the tightening feeling of thegrip part 652 and effectively improve the use-friendliness of thehousing assembly 640 and the mower. - Referring to
FIG. 86 throughFIG. 91 , in an embodiment of the disclosure, for example, thefirst handle structure 643 has the firstgripping portion 648 and the secondgripping part 649 and thesecond handle structure 654 has the thirdgripping portion 658. In other embodiments of the disclosure, thefirst handle structure 643 and thesecond handle structure 654 each can be provided with multiple gripping structures. That is, the number and structure of the gripping portion(s) 652 corresponding to each handle structure can be configured according to actual needs, without being limited herein. - As shown in
FIG. 86 throughFIG. 91 , in the disclosure, when thecasing assembly 640 is provided with thefirst handle structure 643 and thesecond handle structure 654, thecasing assembly 640 can includegripping portions 652 with at least two gripping ways, and the user can choose different gripping positions of thegripping portions 652 according to his/her own physical condition and needs. First it can effectively reduce the accumulated fatigue when the user grasps thecasing assembly 640; and second, it can prevent the user’s fingers being laborious or strangled by the gripping portion. Meanwhile, the mower with thecasing assembly 640 can be easily carried/transported, which effectively improves the practicability of the mower. - Referring to
FIG. 92 , an embodiment of the disclosure provides a connection structure, which can be used as a connection method on thehousing 1 of the mower and used for the installation between amain body 661 and arear cover 662 of thehousing 1. - Referring to
FIG. 93 throughFIG. 95 , the connection structure can include a mountingportion 664 provided on themain body 661 and a fixingportion 665 provided on therear cover 662. The mountingportion 664 and the fixingportion 665 are disposed opposite to each other. Specifically, the mountingportion 664 is located in anopening 666 on a side of themain body 661, and the fixingportion 665 is located at anedge 669 on a side of therear cover 662. The mountingportion 664 is rotatably connected with the fixingportion 665 in theopening 666 through ashaft pin 663. Such a connection mechanism is simple in structure and convenient to operate. - As illustrated in
FIG. 92 throughFIG. 95 , the mountingportion 664 can include two mountingholes 667, the fixingportion 665 can include two mountingholes 670, and the two mountingholes 667 are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with the two mountingholes 670 on the fixingportion 665. The mountingportion 664 is provided with a shaftpin receiving groove 668. To install themain body 661 and therear cover 662 together, theshaft pin 663 can be pre-placed in the shaftpin receiving groove 668 and fixed to the mountingportion 664 and the fixingportion 665, and the installation of themain body 661 and therear cover 662 is completed consequently. In other embodiments of the disclosure, the shaftpin receiving groove 668 may be disposed on the fixingportion 665. - As shown in
FIG. 92 throughFIG. 95 , the shaftpin receiving groove 668 is located between the two mountingholes 667. The mountingholes 667 and the shaftpin receiving groove 668 connect with each other and are located on the same straight line. A length of the shaftpin receiving groove 668 is greater than a length of theshaft pin 663, thereby facilitating theshaft pin 663 to slide along thepin receiving groove 668 and then pass through the mountingholes 667 and the mounting holes 670. - As illustrated in
FIG. 92 throughFIG. 95 , the length of the shaftpin receiving groove 668 is slightly greater than twice the length of theshaft pin 663. In this way, two shaft pins can be placed in the shaftpin receiving groove 668 at the same time. In other embodiments of the disclosure, the shaftpin receiving groove 668 may be located on both sides of the mountinghole 667. The mountingportion 664 and the fixingportion 665 can be arranged alternately. - Referring to
FIG. 96 , theshaft pin 663 can include abody portion 671, ahead portion 672 at one end of thebody portion 671, and atail portion 673 at the other end of thebody portion 671. Thebody portion 671, thehead portion 672, and thetail portion 673 can be integrally constructed, without being limited herein. - As illustrated in
FIG. 96 , theshaft pin 663 is provided with a penetratingopening 674 from the middle of thebody portion 671 to thetail portion 673. Thetail portion 673 is cone-shaped, and is made of an elastic material. A diameter of one end of thetail portion 673 near thebody portion 671 is larger than that of the other end. Theopening 674 can be opened and closed according to the force applied onto thetail portion 673, and theopening 674 can be elastically deformed, thereby can change the diameter of thetail portion 673. The diameters of thehead portion 672 and thetail portion 673 are both larger than a diameter of thebody portion 671. - After the installation is completed, the mounting
holes 667 and the mountingholes 670 can be interposed between thehead portion 672 and thetail portion 673. Moreover, a diameter of the shaftpin receiving groove 668 is not less than the diameters of thehead portion 672 and thetail portion 673, so as to prevent theshaft pin 663 from sliding out of the shaftpin receiving groove 668 when theshaft pin 663 slides along the shaftpin receiving groove 668. Opening diameters of the mountingholes 670 and the mountingholes 667 each are smaller than the diameter of thetail portion 673. The opening diameters of the mountingholes 670 and the mountingholes 667 each are larger than the diameter of thebody portion 671. - Referring to
FIG. 92 throughFIG. 96 , in an embodiment of the disclosure, specific installation operations (or steps) of themain body 661 and therear cover 662 are as follows. - Step 1: placing the
shaft pin 663 in the shaftpin receiving groove 668 in advance, and aligning the mountingholes 667 on themain body 661 with the mountingholes 670 on therear cover 662 one by one. - Step 2: pushing the
shaft pin 663 into the mountingholes 667 and the mountingholes 670 along the shaftpin receiving groove 668. In this case, thetail portion 673 of theshaft pin 663 is squeezed by the mountinghole 667 and the mountinghole 670, and theopening 674 is closed, resulting thetail portion 673 and themain body 671 sequentially passing through the mountinghole 667 and the mountinghole 670. - Step 3: pushing the
tail portion 673 completely out of the mountinghole 667 and the mountinghole 670. In this case, thetail portion 673 of theshaft pin 663 is not pressed by the mountinghole 667 and the mountinghole 670, and theopening 674 is opened. Thus, thetail portion 673 exposes from the mountinghole 670, thebody portion 671 is accommodated in the mountinghole 667 and the mountinghole 670, and thehead portion 672 is exposed from the mountinghole 667 and is accommodated in the shaftpin accommodating groove 668, thereby the installation of theshaft pin 663 at one side is completed. - Step 4: repeating the above steps to install the
shaft pin 663 at the other side, until all installation tasks are completed. - The connection structure includes the mounting
portion 664 and the fixingportion 665 disposed opposite to the mountingportion 664, and the mountingportion 664 is connected to the fixingportion 665 through the shaft pins 663. The shaftpin accommodating groove 668 is provided on the mountingportion 664, and theshaft pin 663 is placed in the shaftpin accommodating groove 668 in advance, so that the installation is completed only by sliding theshaft pin 663 along the shaftpin receiving groove 668 to fix onto the mountingportion 664 and the fixingportion 665. The above structure is simple and the above operation is convenient. - Referring to
FIG. 97 throughFIG. 101 , a liftingdetection device 267 of a mower is used to detect a lifting displacement of amain body 265 of the mower relative to achassis 266 of the mower. Themain body 265 is located directly above thechassis 266, and themain body 265 can be lifted upwards and is displaced in the vertical direction relative to thechassis 266. - As illustrated in
FIG. 97 , the liftingdetection device 267 of the mower can include ashock absorber 261 connected with themain body 265, a slidingmember 262 connected with theshock absorber 261, ametal plate 278 arranged at the bottom of the slidingmember 262, asensor 281 arranged on a printed circuit board (PCB) in thechassis 266, and aconnector 268 connecting themain body 265 and theshock absorber 261. Through the connection of theconnector 268, theshock absorber 261, the slidingmember 262 and themetal plate 278 may move upward with themain body 265. - As illustrated in
FIG. 98 , themetal plate 278 can be buckled or fixed by screws to the bottom of the slidingmember 262. Thesensor 281 is used to detect a distance D between thechassis 266 and themetal plate 278 in the vertical direction. When themain body 265 is lifted relative to thechassis 266, themetal plate 278 moves upward correspondingly. When the distance between themetal plate 278 and thechassis 266 in the vertical direction exceeds a preset value, thesensor 281 sends a trigger signal to a control device of the mower (not shown) to control the mower to stop working, so as to prevent the mower from injuring the operator. - As shown in
FIG. 98 , a material of theshock absorber 261 may be rubber. Theshock absorber 261 can include a first connectingend 269 facing toward themain body 265 and a secondconnecting end 270 facing toward the slidingmember 262. Theconnector 268 can include a receivinggroove 285 with an opening facing toward theshock absorber 261, the receivinggroove 285 is used for receiving the first connectingend 269. The connection method of theconnector 268 and theshock absorber 261 is not limited herein, and it can be realized by bolt connection, or by snap connection, or other commonly used connection method, as long as the two can be tightly connected. - As illustrated in
FIG. 98 , the slidingmember 262 is fixedly connected to theshock absorber 261. That is, the movement states of the slidingmember 262 and theshock absorber 261 are consistent. A material of the slidingmember 262 may be plastic. The slidingmember 262 can include a connectingportion 276 extending in the vertical direction and a fixingportion 277 perpendicular to the connectingportion 276. The connectingportion 276 is connected to the second connectingend 270 of theshock absorber 261. The fixingportion 277 is located at the bottom and protrudes toward the periphery relative to the connectingportion 276 to form an enlarged end. Themetal plate 278 is fixed on the bottom surface of the fixingportion 277. - Referring to
FIG. 98 andFIG. 99 , the liftingdetection device 267 of the mower can further include a connectingplate 274 fixed on thechassis 266. The connectingplate 274 can include a mountingplate 283 provided with a through hole, asleeve 284 fixed in the through hole, and asealing ring 275 between the mountingplate 283 and thesleeve 284. The connectingportion 276 of the slidingmember 262 passes upward through thesleeve 284 and is slidably arranged. The mountingplate 283 is fixed to thechassis 266 by fasteningdevices 273. Thefastening device 273 may be a screw or other commonly used connectors. - As illustrated in
FIG. 98 , the liftingdetection device 267 of the mower can further include afirst spring 264 and asecond spring 271. Thefirst spring 264 is sleeved between thesleeve 284 and the fixingportion 277 of the slidingmember 262, and thefirst spring 264 is sleeved on the outer circumference of the connectingportion 276 of the slidingmember 262. Since thesleeve 284 is fixed, when the slidingmember 262 moves upward with themain body 265, thefirst spring 264 is compressed. - As shown in
FIG. 98 , thesecond spring 271 is disposed between theshock absorber 261 and the slidingmember 262. Both theshock absorber 261 and the slidingmember 262 are made of plastic. An upper end of thesecond spring 271 is threadedly connected to a lower end of theshock absorber 261. A lower end of thesecond spring 271 is threadedly connected to a top end of the connectingportion 276 of the slidingmember 262. Theshock absorber 261 provides a stable zero position by using thesecond spring 271, which makes it easy to install themain body 265. This is because thesecond spring 271 is fixed by theshock absorber 261 in an initial position, and thesecond spring 271 is not easy to deform. - As illustrated in
FIG. 98 andFIG. 99 , a plane where the mower collides with an obstacle is defined as a collision plane. When the robotic mower collides horizontally, a deflection elastic force of thesecond spring 271 may resist the horizontal movement. With this arrangement, when the mower collides with the obstacle, e.g., when the mower hits a tree, theshock absorber 261 can be used to reduce a vertical displacement caused by a displacement of themain body 265 relative to thechassis 266 on the collision plane. Therefore, it is ensured that themain body 265 of the mower will not move upward when a collision with the obstacle occurs, thereby avoiding the situation that the mower stops working due to the vertical displacement caused by the collision with the obstacle. That is, theshock absorber 261 allows themain body 265 to move only in the vertical direction relative to thechassis 266 during the collision of the mower robot. The collision plane is approximately parallel to a mowing plane, that is, roughly a horizontal plane. - Referring to
FIG. 98 andFIG. 99 , when the mower is in a normal working state, thefirst spring 264 is in a freely extended state, and the slidingmember 262 needs to overcome the elastic force of thefirst spring 264 to move themain body 265 forward, which is to move away from thechassis 266. With this arrangement, when the mower is slightly collided or faces a bumpy situation (when the mower passes a ramp, a stone or other obstacle), the slidingmember 262 receives less force than the elastic force of thefirst spring 264, the slidingmember 262 will not move in the vertical direction, thereby avoiding the slidingmember 262 moving upward due to slight turbulence which may cause thesensor 281 erroring or cause the mower to stop working. As a result, the working stability of the mower is improved consequently. - As illustrated in
FIG. 98 andFIG. 99 , the liftingdetection device 267 of the mower can further include aprotective cover 272 covering the outer periphery of theshock absorber 261. In the illustrated embodiment, theprotective cover 272 is a bellows. One end of the bellows 13 is connected with theshock absorber 261, and the other end is connected with the mountingplate 283 of the connectingplate 274. This arrangement prevents theshock absorber 261 from being contaminated and damaged, and prolongs the service life of theshock absorber 261. A material of themetal plate 278 may be aluminum. Thesensor 281 may be a Hall sensor, an inductive sensor, or a magnetic sensor. - Referring to
FIG. 101 , thechassis 266 can include alower base 282 and anupper base 279. Thesensor 281 is disposed on thelower base 282 and is tightly attached to a bottom surface of theupper base 279. The connectingplate 274 is fixed on theupper base 279 by thefastening devices 273. Theupper base 279 is further provided with a receivingcavity 280 for receiving and supporting the bottom of the slidingmember 262. Themetal plate 278 touches against the bottom surface of the receivingcavity 280. - Referring to
FIG. 100 , a working process of the liftingdetection device 267 of the mower will be described below: when the mower is in a normal working state, thefirst spring 264 is in a naturally extended state, and themetal plate 278 is positionally close to thesensor 281. When the mower is lifted, themain body 265 moves upward, theshock absorber 261 and the slidingmember 262 are driven to move upward relative to thechassis 266, as shown inFIG. 101 . In this case, thefirst spring 264 is in a compressed state, themetal plate 278 located at the bottom of the slidingmember 262 moves upward, and thesensor 281 detects the distance D between themetal plate 278 and thesensor 281. When the distance D reaches the preset value, thesensor 281 sends a trigger signal to the control device of the mower to control the blades of the mower to stop rotating, so as to prevent the operator from being injured. - When the mower is only colliding with an obstacle instead of being lifted (for example, when hitting a tree), the
shock absorber 261, thefirst spring 264, and thesecond spring 271 can play a role in damping vibration, so that the slidingmember 262 will not move upward. That is, the positions of themetal plate 278 and thesensor 281 are kept close to each other, which prevents the slidingmember 262 from moving upward due to slight bumps which may cause thesensor 281 erroring and thereby cause the mower to stop working. As a result, the working stability of the mower is improved consequently. - Therefore, in the lifting
detection device 267 of the mower, thesensor 281 is installed in thechassis 266 to detect the distance between themetal plate 278 provided on the slidingmember 262 and thechassis 266, and to determine the distance between themain body 265 of the mower and thechassis 266. The liftingdetection device 267 of the mower can include a simple structure and the space of the mower is saved. There is no need to construct a hole on thechassis 266 for the wire connecting the lifting detection device and the chassis to pass through, and thus the waterproof performance is preserved. Theshock absorber 261 can reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the mower is mistakenly stop working due to the displacement in the vertical direction caused by the collision with obstacles, and thus improves the stability of the mower. - Referring to
FIG. 102 , an intelligent/smart/robotic mower can automatically work on a grassland. The mower can include a body 286, a casing 287 covering the body 286, and a suspension device 288 movably connecting the body 286 and the casing 287. - As illustrated in
FIG. 102 , the body 286 is provided with a walking wheel(s) (not shown) for moving the mower, a driving motor (not shown) for driving the walking wheel, a cutting assembly/tool for mowing (not shown), a control assembly (not shown) for controlling operations of the driving motor and the cutting assembly, and a battery pack for providing power to the mower. The structures of the walking wheel, the driving motor, the cutting assembly, the control assembly, and the battery pack are described in details throughout this disclosure. - As shown in
FIG. 102 , the casing 287 which covers the outside of the body 286 can protect the body 286 as well as the operator. For example, it can provide dustproof and waterproof to protect the structures such as the driving motor, the cutting assembly, the control assembly and the battery pack, and can prolong the service life of each of the structures. Meanwhile, it can also prevent the operator from accidents when using the mower, thereby improving the safety factor of the mower consequently. - Referring to
FIG. 102 throughFIG. 104 , the suspension device 288 can include afirst support column 294 connected to the casing 287, asecond support column 295 connected to the body 286, and a flexible connectingmember 299 connecting thefirst support column 294 and thesecond support column 295. Specifically, one end of the flexible connectingmember 299 is connected to thefirst support column 294, and the other end is connected to thesecond support column 295, so that the casing 287 can move relative to the body 286 in a direction perpendicular to the body 286 and/or in a horizontal direction. - As illustrated in
FIG. 102 throughFIG. 104 , in the direction perpendicular to the body 286, thefirst support column 294 is opposite to thesecond support column 295, and thefirst support column 294 is located above thesecond support column 295. It can be understood as that: the horizontal direction is a direction parallel to the ground, and the direction perpendicular to the body 286 is a direction perpendicular to the ground and shall be referred to as the vertical direction. - Referring to
FIG. 102 andFIG. 105 throughFIG. 107 , thefirst support column 294 is provided with a connectingportion 302, the casing 287 is correspondingly provided with a receivingportion 90, and the connectingportion 302 is received in the receivingportion 90. Specifically, in the illustrated embodiment, thefirst support column 294 is roughly a columnar structure, and the connectingportion 302 is provided on the top of thefirst support column 294 and can include a spherical structure. The casing 287 is correspondingly provided with a rubber cap 291, the rubber cap 291 is fixedly connected to the casing 287, the receivingportion 90 is a spherical receiving cavity formed in the rubber cap 291, and the spherical connectingportion 302 is received in the spherical receiving cavity so as to achieve a fixed connection between thefirst support column 294 and the casing 287. Thus, when the casing 287 is moved by an external force, thefirst support column 294 will be driven to move correspondingly. In other embodiments, thefirst support post 294 and the housing 287 can be connected by other structures, as long as thefirst support column 294 and the casing 287 can be fixedly connected, without being limited herein. - As illustrated in
FIG. 106 , thefirst support column 294 is further provided with agroove 303 surrounding an axial direction thereof, and thegroove 303 is approximately located at a middle position of thefirst support column 294. - As shown in
FIG. 106 , The flexible connectingmember 299 can include a spring. One end of thefirst support column 294 is provided with afirst thread 305 matching the spring, and one end of thesecond support column 295 is provided with asecond thread 306 matching the spring. One end of the spring is threadedly connected with thefirst support column 294, and the other end is threadedly connected with thesecond support column 295. Specifically, in the vertical direction, thefirst thread 305 is provided on the bottom of thefirst support column 294, and thesecond thread 306 is provided on the top of thesecond support column 295. - As illustrated in
FIG. 107 , a pitch H of thefirst thread 305 gradually increases from bottom to top. In this way, when the spring is screwed onto thefirst support column 294, the spring will gradually tighten to increase a pressure between the spring and the first support. The increasing the friction between the spring and thefirst support column 294 makes the spring difficult to escape. Similarly, a pitch of thesecond thread 306 is correspondingly set to gradually increase from top to bottom. - As illustrated in
FIG. 106 , the flexible connectingmember 299 can further include a rope (not shown). Both ends of the rope are provided with spherical fixing members. Thefirst support column 294 and thesecond support column 295 are respectively provided withspherical grooves 304 for correspondingly accommodating the spherical fixing members. As shown inFIG. 106 , thespherical groove 304 on thefirst support column 294 is recessed inwardly from an inner side wall of thegroove 303, thespherical groove 304 on thesecond support column 295 is recessed on thesecond thread 306 and close to the top of thesecond support column 295. - As shown in
FIG. 106 , the flexible connectingmember 299 can include a spring and a rope, and a length of the rope is greater than a length of the spring. This arrangement can ensure that the mower stops working when the mower is lifted in case the spring is failed. In some embodiments, the flexible connectingmember 299 may have other structures, as long as it can achieve the effect of stopping the mower when it is lifted, without being limited herein. - Referring to
FIG. 102 throughFIG. 104 ,FIG. 108 , andFIG. 109 , the suspension device 288 can further include a fixingframe 296 fixedly connected to the body 286. The fixingframe 296 is provided with a throughhole 311. In the vertical direction, the top of thesecond support column 295 penetrates the fixingframe 296 via the throughhole 311. Specifically, in the disclosure, the fixingframe 296 can include a cylindrical structure, and the throughhole 311 is formed at the center of the fixingframe 296. - As illustrated in
FIG. 108 , the fixingframe 296 can include afirst fixing portion 307 and asecond fixing portion 308. A diameter of thefirst fixing portion 307 is smaller than a diameter of thesecond fixing portion 308. The throughhole 311 penetrates through thefirst fixing portion 307 and thesecond fixing portion 308 in the vertical direction. The throughhole 311 can include a first throughhole 315 formed on thefirst fixing portion 307 and a second throughhole 313 formed on thesecond fixing portion 308, and a diameter of the first throughhole 315 is smaller than a diameter of the second throughhole 313. - As shown in
FIG. 108 , the top of thefirst fixing portion 307 is slightly recessed downwardly so as to accommodate one end of thespring 299 and to positionally limit one end of thespring 299. Anannular groove 314 is recessed at the bottom of thesecond fixing portion 308. Theannular groove 314 is located at the periphery of the second throughhole 313 and used for accommodating asealing ring 301. The sealing ring 301 (also referred to as gasket) is used to strengthen waterproof performance of the body 286. - As illustrated in
FIG. 108 , the fixingframe 296 is fixed on the body 286, an annular protrusion (not labelled) protrudes from a position of the body 286 corresponding to theannular groove 314, so that the annular protrusion, theannular groove 314 and thesealing ring 301 are mutually cooperated, which not only enables the fixingframe 296 to be closely integrated with the body 286, but also can provide good waterproof performance. - As illustrated in
FIG. 109 , the fixingframe 296 is installed and fixed on the fuselage 286 by screws 292. Thesecond fixing portion 308 is provided with twolugs 309, and eachlug 309 is provided with anopening 312. The twolugs 309 are arranged opposite to each other. The screws 292 pass through theopenings 312 to fix the fixingframe 296 on the body 286. In other embodiments, the fixingframe 296 can be installed and fixed on the body 286 in other ways, such as snap-fit, hard interference, etc., without limiting herein. - Referring to
FIG. 102 throughFIG. 104 again, in the vertical direction, the bottom of thesecond support column 295 is provided with a fixinghead 298, and ametal sheet 300 is installed on the fixinghead 298. A displacement sensor 289 is provided in the body 286. The displacement sensor 289 is located under themetal sheet 300 and used to detect a displacement of thesecond support column 295. The suspension device 288 can further include acompression spring 293 arranged between the fixingframe 296 and the fixinghead 298. One end of thecompression spring 293 is received in the second throughhole 313 and touches against an inner wall surface of thesecond fixing portion 308, and the other end touches against an upper surface of the fixinghead 298. - As illustrated in
FIG. 102 throughFIG. 104 , when the mower is lifted for some reason, the casing 287 can drive thefirst support column 294, the flexible connectingmember 299, and thesecond support column 295 to move upward. In this case, thecompression spring 293 is compressed. If the displacement sensor 289 detects thesecond support column 295 is displaced and the detected displacement exceeds a preset value, an induction signal is sent to the control assembly, and the control assembly then sends a control signal to the cutting assembly to stop the mower. When the external force disappears, a restoring force of thecompression spring 293 can prompt thesecond support column 295, the flexible connectingmember 299, and thefirst support column 294 to return to the initial position. In this case, the mower can resume its work. - As shown in
FIG. 102 throughFIG. 104 , the suspension device 288 can further include a dust-proof rubber sleeve 297 covering thefirst support column 294, a flexible connectingmember 299, and asecond support column 295. An open end at one side of thedustproof rubber sleeve 297 is positioned in thegroove 303, and another open end at the other side is positioned in the fixingframe 296. Specifically, a limitingspace 310 is provided between thefirst fixing portion 307 and thesecond fixing portion 308 of the fixingframe 296. The dust-proof rubber sleeve 297 is substantially in a column shape. And in the vertical direction, the top open end of the dust-proof rubber sleeve 297 is positioned in thegroove 303, and the bottom open end is positioned in the limitingspace 310, so as to protect the flexible connectingmember 299, a connecting position of the flexible connectingmember 299 and thefirst support column 294, and a connecting position of the flexible connectingmember 299 and thesecond support column 295. - Referring to
FIG. 102 throughFIG. 104 again, four suspension devices 288 are respectively arranged at the four corners of the body 286. In other embodiments, the number and positions of the suspension devices 288 can be changed, without being limited herein. - As illustrated in
FIG. 102 , when the mower works normally, the casing 287 cannot move disorderly. When the mower hits an obstacle during operation, the casing 287 may stop while the body 286 may continue to move forward, which may cause a relative displacement between the body 286 and the casing 287. In this case, the collision sensor on the body 286 (not shown) sends a collision signal to the control assembly, and the control assembly then controls the mower to reverse or retreat. In the event of a collision, since the rubber cap 291 is fixed on the casing 287, the rubber cap 291 may drive thefirst support column 294 to deflect. Since thesecond support column 295 is housed in a cylindrical hole of the body 286, a horizontal degree of free-space is small, and therefore the rubber cap 291 may drive thespring 299 to deflect at the same time. - As illustrated in
FIG. 102 , after the mower collides, thespring 299 may not directly return to its original state, but may continue to vibrate/shake. In this case, both thespring 299 and the rubber cap 291 can be deformed. The rubber cap 291 can include a damping effect and can offset vibration. Therefore, the rubber cap 291 can be used to absorb/offset part of the vibration to prevent the body 286 from cracking, thereby greatly extending the service life of the mower and reducing the use cost. - Accordingly, in the mower of the disclosure, the suspension device 288 is configured to include the
first support column 294, thesecond support column 295, and the flexible connectingmember 299 connecting thefirst support column 294 and thesecond support column 295. Thefirst support column 294 is connected to the casing 287, and thesecond support column 295 is connected to the body 286, so that the casing 287 cannot move disorderly during normal operation. The casing 287 can flexibly move relative to the body 286 in the direction perpendicular to the body 286 and/or in the horizontal direction when it collides with an obstacle. - Referring to
FIG. 111 throughFIG. 115 , an embodiment of the disclosure can include a collision sensor 677 for detecting collisions. The collision sensor 677 can include amagnet fixing structure 674. As shown inFIG. 115 , the collision sensor 677 can include amagnet 675, themagnet fixing structure 674, and aHall sensor 678 corresponding to themagnet fixing structure 674. Themagnet fixing structure 674 and theHall sensor 678 are respectively and fixedly arranged on thehousing 1 and a mower body (including the cuttingassembly 616, the walking assembly 8 and the battery pack assembly). The mower body is provided with acircuit board 679, theHall sensor 678 is electrically connected to thecircuit board 679, and theHall sensor 678 is correspondingly disposed directly under themagnet fixing structure 674. - As illustrated in
FIG. 111 throughFIG. 115 , there may be one set of theHall sensor 678, and the collision sensor 677 can be used to detect collision. In another embodiment of the disclosure, there may be four sets of theHall sensors 678 which are respectively arranged in the front, rear, left, and right directions directly below themagnet fixing structure 674 to detect specific collision directions. Furthermore, the number ofHall sensors 678 can be more. For example, there may be four additional sets of Hall sensors 678 (for a total of eight sets of Hall sensors 678) respectively positioned on the left front, left rear, right front, and right rear directions, besides the front, rear, left, and right directions, so as to improve detection accuracy of collision direction. In the illustrated embodiment, after detecting a collision direction, the mower may control the walking assembly 8 to retreat in the collision direction, so as to avoid a possible subsequent collision. - Referring to
FIG. 111 throughFIG. 113 , in an embodiment of the disclosure, there may be two groups of collision sensors 677 respectively arranged at the front and rear ends of the mower. - Referring to
FIG. 112 throughFIG. 115 , themagnet fixing structure 674 can include a first cavity and a second cavity. The first cavity extends in the vertical direction, the first cavity is cylindrical, and the second cavity extends in the horizontal direction and is arranged above the first cavity. The first cavity is provided with thecolumnar magnet 675, and the second cavity is provided with ametal sheet 676 for themagnet 675 to pull, so as to fix themagnet 675 in the first cavity. When the mower encounters obstacles or collisions with other objects, themagnet fixing structure 674 may vibrate, so that themagnet 675 is displaced in the first cavity. In this case, based on the Hall effect, theHall sensor 678 may generate a corresponding Hall voltage to determine that the mower encountered a collision. In other embodiments of the disclosure, the first cavity may have other regular shapes, and themagnet 675 is correspondingly set in the first cavity to have a corresponding shape including but not limited to a cube and other shapes, without being limited herein. - As illustrated in
FIG. 115 , the first cavity is provided with a hole with an opening facing downward, and the hole is used for fixing themagnet 675 to pull toward themetal sheet 676, particularly pulling into contact with themetal sheet 676 arranged in the second cavity above the first cavity. In one embodiment, the hole is circular in shape, and a diameter of the hole is larger than a diameter of themagnet 675, so that themagnet 675 and themetal sheet 676 can be magnetically connected. When themagnet 675 needs to be repaired, themetal sheet 676 in the second cavity can be taken out, themagnet 675 can be removed from the hole. In other embodiments of the disclosure, the hole may also be formed on a side surface of the first cavity, and themagnet 675 may be correspondingly inserted through the hole on the sidewall of the first cavity. In order to prevent accidental detaching of themagnet 675 from the first cavity, themagnet 675 can be enclosed in the first cavity, without being limited herein. - As shown in
FIG. 115 , themagnet 675 is a permanent magnet, so that themagnet 675 can be pulled toward themetal sheet 676. In another embodiment of the disclosure, themagnet 675 may be an electromagnet or an electro-permanent magnet. When themagnet 675 is the electromagnet, a blocking structure (not shown) is correspondingly provided at the hole at the lower end of the first cavity, so as to prevent the electromagnet from being disengaged after the mower is powered off. When themagnet 675 is the electro-permanent magnet, themagnet 675 can also be constantly pulled toward themetal sheet 676. Meanwhile, a magnetic field of the electro-permanent magnet can be controlled by adjusting the current magnitude. - As illustrated in
FIG. 115 , a spacing/distance between themagnet fixing structure 674 and theHall sensor 678 in the vertical direction may be less than 10 mm. That is, a vertical distance between themagnet fixing structure 674 and theHall sensor 678 may be less than 10 mm. For example, the distance between themagnet fixing structure 674 and theHall sensor 678 in the vertical direction can be 1 mm, 5 mm, or 9 mm. The distance can also be adjusted according to specific conditions. For example, when themagnet 675 includes a large magnetism, the distance can be increased accordingly; when the magnetism of themagnet 675 is relatively small, the distance can be reduced accordingly to ensure detection accuracy. - Referring to
FIG. 111 throughFIG. 115 , a diameter of the first cavity is larger than a diameter of themagnet 675, so that themagnet 675 can be displaced in the first cavity. The diameter of the first cavity should not be set excessively large, so as to prevent themagnet 675 from deviating from an upright position after displacement, which may cause a decrease in detection accuracy and prevent themagnet 675 from shaking or even falling off when encountering accidentally violent collision. In the illustrated embodiment, the first cavity may also be provided with a reset structure (not shown) for resetting themagnet 675 after displacement, and the reset structure can include, without limitation, a spring, and can be set according to actual needs without being limited herein. - Referring to
FIG. 111 throughFIG. 115 , the first cavity and the second cavity are connected with each other. Correspondingly, themagnet 675 is magnetically connected to themetal sheet 676. In the illustrated embodiment, themetal sheet 676 may be fixedly arranged in the second cavity. In this case, themagnet 675 will be relatively displaced with themetal sheet 676 after the mower collides. Themetal sheet 676 can also be movably arranged in the second cavity instead. In this case, the second cavity is correspondingly provided with a limiting structure to prevent themetal sheet 676 from being separated. Themagnet 675 would bring themetal sheet 676 to move synchronously after the mower collides. In another embodiment of the disclosure, the first cavity and the second cavity are not connected with each other, and correspondingly, themagnet 675 is magnetically attracted to themetal sheet 676 but is not directly contacted with themetal sheet 676. After the mower collides, themagnet 675 moves closer to the bottom surface of the second cavity along the first cavity. - As illustrated in
FIG. 111 throughFIG. 115 , the collision sensor 677 may further include a magnetic reed switch (not shown) for detecting a relative movement of thecasing 1 and the mower body in the vertical direction. That is, when themagnet 675 moves in the vertical direction, it controls the reed switch to be on or off, which may control the cutting assembly and walking assembly 8 of the mower to stop working in the case of thecasing 1 being disassembled or accidental damage occurred, thereby preventing injury, etc. In other embodiments, the reed switch can include other forms such as a relay or an inductive sensor, without being limited herein. Themagnet fixing structure 674 provided by the disclosure is convenient to install and disassemble, which may reduce the production cost. - Referring to
FIG. 116 , in an embodiment of the disclosure, an automatic working device is provided. The automatic working device may be an intelligent/smart/robotic mower, a vacuum cleaner, etc. In the illustrated embodiment, the intelligent mower is taken as an example for description. The intelligent mower can include, without limitation, ahousing 1 and a movableupper cover 2. Awalking wheel 9 is installed on thehousing 1, a control circuit is installed inside thehousing 1, and a manipulation area 369 is provided on the top of thehousing 1. The movableupper cover 2 is installed above thecasing 1. The movableupper cover 2 can include an outer contour larger than that of thehousing 1, and anopening 20 is provided to expose the manipulation area 369 and convenient for consumers to control the intelligent mower. - Further, a collision detector is provided between the movable
upper cover 2 and thehousing 1, such as a displacement sensor having a Hall sensor and a magnet. When a collision occurs causing a relative displacement between the movableupper cover 2 and thehousing 1, a change of relative position between the magnet and the Hall sensor brings about a change of magnetic field. The Hall sensor may sense the change of magnetic field and output a signal to the control circuit, which may control the intelligent mower to change its moving direction and avoid collisions. - In an embodiment of the disclosure, a connection device is further provided. In an illustrated embodiment,
multiple manipulation areas 368 are movably connected between the movableupper cover 2 and thehousing 1 of the intelligent mower, so as to allow the movableupper cover 2 to be displaced relative to thehousing 1. As an embodiment of the disclosure, there may be threemanipulation areas 368, two of them are located at the rear of the intelligent mower, and the other one is located at the front of the intelligent mower. Themanipulation areas 368 of the disclosure greatly facilitates the removal the upper cover and avoids the problem of the upper cover easily falling off. - Referring to
FIG. 117 , themanipulation area 368 of the disclosure can include a connectingrod 371 and a connecting base. The connectingrod 371 is fixed on thehousing 1, and the connecting base is fixed on the movableupper cover 2. The connectingrod 371 can include a connectinghead 378. The connectinghead 378 is movably arranged inside the connecting base so that thehousing 1 and the movableupper cover 2 are movably connected. The connecting base can include a mountingbase 372, a lockingmember 373, and abottom plate 374. Thebottom plate 374 is located on the bottom side of the mountingbase 372, and the lockingmember 373 is located between the mountingbase 372 and thebottom plate 374. - As illustrated in
FIG. 118 andFIG. 119 , the mountingbase 372 is provided with acavity 379, the lockingmember 373 is contained in thecavity 379 and the top thereof is exposed for operation by the operator. The lockingmember 373 is provided with anannular cavity 380, and an inner wall of theannular cavity 380 is provided with aninternal thread 404. The lockingmember 373 is further provided with a recessedcavity 381 located in theannular cavity 380. The recessedcavity 381 is formed by multiple elastic connectingwalls 385. Each of the elastic connectingwalls 385 may have a certain elasticity and can be deformed appropriately to allow the connectinghead 378 in the recessedcavity 381 to be detached from the recessedcavity 381. The connectinghead 378 may be spherical, and the recessedcavity 381 may be a spherical recessed cavity. - As illustrated in
FIG. 117 andFIG. 118 , thebottom plate 374 is fixed on the mountingbase 372 and thebottom plate 374 is provided with a protrudingpost 386. An outer side of the protrudingpost 386 is provided with anexternal thread 405, which can be threadedly connected with theinternal thread 404 of theannular cavity 380. The protrudingpost 386 is a hollow structure, and the inner of the protrudingpost 386 has anadjustment cavity 388 that penetrates up and down. The lockingmember 373 and thebottom plate 374 are assembled from the bottom side of the mountingbase 372. In particular, the lockingmember 373 and thebottom plate 374 may first be screwed together, and then assembled together on the mountingbase 372. - After assembled, the
annular cavity 380 of the lockingmember 373 is located in thecavity 379, the protrudingpost 386 of thebottom plate 374 extends into theannular cavity 380, theexternal thread 405 matches with theinternal thread 404 of theannular cavity 380, and the recessedcavity 381 of the lockingmember 373 is located inside theadjustment cavity 388 of the protrudingpost 386. The connectinghead 378 of the connectingrod 371 passes through thebottom plate 374 and is movably received in the recessedcavity 381. - As shown in
FIG. 117 andFIG. 118 , thebottom plate 374 is locked onto the bottom side of the mountingbase 372 byscrews 375, and its position remains unchanged relative to the mountingbase 372. The threaded connection between the lockingmember 373 and thebottom plate 374 enables the lockingmember 373 to rotate and move up and down, which in turn drives the elastic connectingwalls 385 to move up and down in theadjustment cavity 388. Theadjustment cavity 388 may be substantially cylindrical with a stepped inner wall and a diameter of theadjustment cavity 388 near the bottom is smaller. - As shown in
FIG. 122 , when the elastic connectingwalls 385 are located at a high place, there is a gap A between the inner wall surface of theadjustment cavity 388 and the outer side surface S1 of the elastic connectingwalls 385. The gap A allows the elastic connectingwalls 385 to deform outwards. In this case, the connectinghead 378 may be detached from the recessedcavity 381 and separated from the movableupper cover 2, so that the movableupper cover 2 and thecasing 1 can be separated. When the elastic connectingwalls 385 are located at a low position, the inner wall surface of theadjustment cavity 388 restricts an outward deformation of the elastic connectingwalls 385, thereby restricting the connectinghead 378 in thecavity 381 and keeping the movableupper cover 2 connected to thehousing 1. - Referring to
FIG. 118 andFIG. 119 , the above restriction can be that the inner wall surface of theadjustment cavity 388 touches against the elastic connectingwalls 385, or the inner wall surface of theadjustment cavity 388 is very close to the elastic connectingwalls 385. Although the elastic connectingwalls 385 can be slightly expanded and deformed, the degree of deformation is insufficient to make the connectinghead 378 being detached from the recessedcavity 381. - As shown in
FIG. 118 andFIG. 119 , the lockingmember 373 can include a releasing position and a locking position. When the lockingmember 373 is located at the releasing position, the elastic connectingwalls 385 can expand and deform outward, allowing the connectinghead 378 to be detached from the recessedcavity 381, and the connecting base and the connectingrod 371 to be separated from each other. When the lockingmember 373 is in the locking position, the elastic connectingwalls 385 are restricted by the inner wall surface of theadjustment cavity 388 and cannot expand outwards and deform enough, so that the connectinghead 378 is restricted in the recessedcavity 381, and the connecting base and the connectingrod 371 are connected with each other. Therefore, the releasing position and the locking position of the lockingmember 373 can meet different usage requirements of themanipulation area 368. - As illustrated in
FIG. 118 , when the intelligent mower with themanipulation area 368 is in normal use, the lockingmember 373 is in the locking position. Since the connectinghead 378 is restricted in the recessedcavity 381, even if the movableupper cover 2 is lifted during carrying of the intelligent mower, it will not cause a separation of theupper cover 2 from thehousing 1. When an operator needs to remove the movableupper cover 2 for cleaning or maintenance, the lockingmember 373 can be rotated to the releasing position, and the movableupper cover 2 can be lifted up and easily removed. After the cleaning or maintenance, the operator can place the movableupper cover 2 on thehousing 1, insert the connectinghead 378 into the recessedcavity 381, then turn the lockingmember 373 from the releasing position to the locking position, and the intelligent mower can continue its normal work. - As shown in
FIG. 117 andFIG. 118 , thebottom plate 374 cannot move up and down, and the lockingmember 373 can move up and down when rotating. As a simple alternative, the lockingmember 373 can be set to not-able-to move up and down, thebottom plate 374 can be driven to move up and down when rotates the lockingmember 373, and other structures can remain unchanged. When the lockingmember 373 is in the releasing position, thebottom plate 374 is at a high position, and the connectinghead 378 can escape from the recessedcavity 381. When the lockingmember 373 is in the locking position, thebottom plate 374 is at a low position, and the connectinghead 378 is confined in the recessedcavity 381. - As illustrated in
FIG. 117 andFIG. 118 , when the lockingmember 373 is in the releasing position, the existence of the gap A between the inner wall surface of theadjustment cavity 388 and the outer side surface S1 of the elastic connectingwalls 385 enables the elastic connectingwalls 385 to expand outwards. As a simple alternative, the gap A may not exist, that is, when the lockingmember 373 is in the releasing position, the elastic connectingwalls 385 are located outside theadjustment cavity 388, so that the elastic connectingwalls 385 can expand outwards without restriction. The above embodiment can be utilized especially when the threaded connection between the lockingmember 373 and thebottom plate 374 can produce sufficient up and down displacement. - Referring to
FIG. 117 andFIG. 120 throughFIG. 125 , in which specific structures of the mountingbase 372, thebottom plate 374 and the lockingmember 373 are described in detail. Thebottom plate 374 is fixed relative to the mountingbase 372. Thebottom plate 374 and the mountingseat 372 may be assembled together. Alternatively, thebottom plate 374 can be manufactured integrally with the mountingbase 372 or riveted together after being manufactured separately. The lockingmember 373 is movably arranged relative to the mountingbase 372, meaning the lockingmember 373 can rotate, or move up and down. The following description takes thebottom plate 374 and the mountingseat 372 set separately as an example. -
FIG. 120 andFIG. 121 are schematic perspective views of the mountingbase 372. The mountingbase 372 can include atop wall 393 and anannular side wall 395 extending downward from the middle of thetop wall 393. Theannular side wall 395 and thetop wall 393 together form theaforementioned cavity 379. Thebottom plate 374 is installed on the bottom surface of theannular side wall 395, and the lockingmember 373 is accommodated in thecavity 379. Thetop wall 393 is substantially circular, and a throughhole 394 is provided at the center of thetop wall 393 for the lockingmember 373 to be partially exposed. The lower side of thetop wall 393 is provided with a pair of mountingposts 396, which are respectively located at opposite ends of thecavity 379 for fixingscrews 375 and mounting thebottom plate 374 to the bottom surface of the mountingbase 372. Theannular side wall 395 is provided with several protrudingribs 397 connected to thetop wall 393, the protrudingribs 397 can strengthen the strength of theannular side wall 395. -
FIG. 122 andFIG. 123 are schematic perspective views of the lockingmember 373. The lockingmember 373 can include acolumn 399 and anoperating part 400 on the top of thecolumn 399. Thecolumn 399 is approximately cylindrical with an open bottom. The operatingpart 400 is also cylindrical and located at the center of the top surface of thecolumn 399. A diameter of the operatingpart 400 is smaller than a diameter of thecolumn 399. - In combination with the illustration of
FIG. 124 , a diameter of the throughhole 394 of thetop wall 393 of the mountingbase 372 is larger than the diameter of the operatingpart 400, but smaller than the diameter of thecolumn 399, so that the operatingpart 400 can protrude into the throughhole 394 and expose at outside of the mountingbase 372. The movableupper cover 2 is provided with a hole (not labeled) to expose theoperating part 400 for consumers to operate. Thecolumn 399 is always restricted below the throughhole 394. The top of the operatingpart 400 is provided with agroove 401, and when the operator needs to turn the lockingmember 373, a screwdriver or other tool can be used to snap into thegroove 401 to drive the lockingmember 373. - Referring to
FIG. 122 andFIG. 123 , theannular cavity 380 with theinternal thread 404 is formed in thecolumn 399. Thecolumn 399 is also provided with the elastic connectingwalls 385 and the recessedcavity 381 formed by the elastic connectingwalls 385. A center line of the recessedcavity 381 overlaps with a center line of theoperation part 400, and when theoperation part 400 is rotated, the recessedcavity 381 will not move eccentrically. In the illustrated embodiment, there may be four elastic connectingwalls 385, with the adjacent ones of the elastic connectingwalls 385 having a gap therebetween, so that the connectingwalls 385 are elastic and can be deformed outwards. - Referring
FIG. 121 andFIG. 122 , the lockingmember 373 can further include apositioning member 402 beside thecolumn 399. The positioningmember 402 is roughly in the shape of an arc and surrounds thecolumn 399, and thepositioning member 402 and thecolumn 399 form a gap. One end of thepositioning member 402 is connected to thecolumn 399, so that thepositioning member 402 can include certain elasticity and can be deformed appropriately. Aprotrusion 403 is provided on an outer surface of thepositioning member 402. In combination with the illustration ofFIG. 124 , the inner wall of thecavity 379 is further provided with two vertical positioning grooves 398 spaced apart. - When the locking
member 373 rotates in thecavity 379, the positioningmember 402 drives theprotrusion 403 to rotate and thereby engage with corresponding positioning grooves 398 respectively in the releasing position and the locking position. An engaging force of the positioning grooves 398 of thepositioning member 402 can prevent the lockingmember 373 from rotating and shifting by itself when the consumer is not operating. Meanwhile, it is convenient for consumers to obtain a clear response whether the lockingmember 373 is turned into proper position during operation. - As illustrated in
FIG. 122 , a top surface of thetop wall 393 is provided with anindication mark 376 around the throughhole 394, theindication mark 376 can further tell the consumer whether the lockingmember 373 is turned into proper position. Theindication mark 376 can include “0” and “1”. In combination with the illustration ofFIG. 120 , the top surface of the operatingpart 400 of the lockingmember 373 is provided with an arrow used together with theindication mark 376. - In the illustrated embodiment, the arrow pointing to “0” indicates that the locking
member 373 is in the released position, and the arrow pointing to “1” indicates that the lockingmember 373 is in the locking position. In order to prevent mis-operation, a directional arrow 329 indicating a rotation direction of the lockingmember 373 can be arranged between “0” and “1”. When the lockingmember 373 is rotated to “0” or “1”, theprotrusion 403 is engaged with the positioning groove 398. As a simple alternative, “0” and “1” can be represented by other words or graphics, such as “release” or “lock”, “separation” or “connection”, unlock and unlock icons, etc., without being limited herein. -
FIG. 124 is a schematic perspective view of thebottom plate 374. Thebottom plate 374 is provided with abottom wall 406 and the protrudingpost 386 extending upward from the middle of thebottom wall 406. Thebottom wall 406 is substantially diamond-shaped, and two opposite corners are provided with mountingholes 407. Thescrews 375 pass through the mountingholes 407 respectively and are fixed to the mountingposts 396 of the mountingbase 372 to fix thebottom plate 374 to the mountingbase 372. -
FIG. 125 is a schematic cross-sectional view of thebottom plate 374. The inner side wall of theadjustment cavity 388 is provided with a step, so that different height positions of theadjustment cavity 388 have different inner diameters. The inner wall of theadjustment cavity 388 is divided into an upperinner wall 384 and a lowerinner wall 391 by the step. The step is located between the upperinner wall 384 and the upperinner wall 384 and the step is provided with a chamfer. - Referring to
FIG. 123 throughFIG. 125 , outer surfaces of the elastic connectingwalls 385 are located on one circle, and a diameter of the circle is defined as an outer diameter of the elastic connectingwalls 385. The inner diameter of the upperinner wall 384 is greater than the outer diameter of the elastic connectingwalls 385, and the inner diameter of the lowerinner wall 391 is equal to the outer diameter of the elastic connectingwalls 385. It is noted that the term “equal to” herein means substantially equal, that is, the difference in size between the inner diameter of the lowerinner wall 391 and the outer diameter of the elastic connectingwalls 385 is not enough to allow the elastic connectingwalls 385 to deform enough so that the connectinghead 378 can escape from the recessedcavity 381. - Therefore, when the elastic connecting
walls 385 are aligned with the upperinner wall 384 but staggered up and down with the lowerinner wall 391, the elastic connectingwalls 385 can be deformed outwards, which is corresponding to the releasing position of the lockingmember 373. When the elastic connectingwalls 385 are at least partially aligned with the lowerinner wall 391, the elastic connectingwalls 385 are restricted from deforming outwards, which is corresponding to the locking position of the lockingmember 373. - As shown in
FIG. 125 , theadjustment cavity 388 is further provided with another ring-shaped stopping step 392 below the lowerinner wall 391. An inner diameter of the stopping step 392 is smaller than the outer diameter of the elastic connectingwalls 385. When the lockingmember 373 is in the locking position, that is, when the elastic connectingwalls 385 are at a low position, bottom surfaces S2 of the elastic connectingwalls 385 may touch against the stopping step 392, and the stopping step 392 provides a stopping function. - Returning to
FIG. 117 , when the movableupper cover 2 is mounted on themower body 1, the operatingportion 400 of the lockingmember 373 is located in the throughhole 394 of the mountingbase 372, and the arrow on the operatingportion 400 points to “0” of the mountingbase 372. In this case, the lockingmember 373 is in the releasing position. As shown inFIG. 122 , the connectinghead 378 can be easily inserted into the recessedcavity 381 formed by the elastic connectingwalls 385, and themanipulation area 368 is movably connected to themower body 1 and the movableupper cover 2. Afterwards, the operatingportion 400 is rotated by a tool to rotate the lockingmember 373 until the arrow on the operatingportion 400 points to “1”, which indicates that the rotation is in place. The lockingmember 373 moves downwardly to the locking position while rotating, as shown inFIG. 123 , the connectinghead 378 is held in the recessedcavity 381, which can prevent the movableupper cover 2 from being easily separated from themower body 1. - As illustrated in
FIG. 116 throughFIG. 118 , when the intelligent mower is in normal use, the lockingmember 373 is always in the locking position to prevent the movableupper cover 2 from being separated from themower body 1. When the movableupper cover 2 needs to be removed for cleaning or maintenance, the lockingmember 373 is rotated in a reverse direction, which makes it moves from the locking position to the releasing position, the connectinghead 378 can be easily separated from the recessedcavity 381, and then the movableupper cover 2 can be removed simply and conveniently. - Please refer to
FIG. 126 throughFIG. 129 , according to an embodiment of the disclosure, aswitch 316 can include acasing 1 and a pressing device disposed above thecasing 1. Amagnet 319 is provided on the pressing device, and areed switch 320 that senses a magnetic field of themagnet 319 is provided in thecasing 1. Theswitch 316 is further provided with a fixingportion 322 fixed on the upper side of thecasing 1. The pressing device is pivotally connected to the top of the fixingportion 322 via apivot shaft 321 and can rotate above thecasing 1 with thepivot shaft 321 as a center. The fixingportion 322 connects thecasing 1 and the pressing device, and the fixingportion 322 may be separately provided and fixed to thecasing 1, or it may be integrally formed with thecasing 1. Positions of thereed switch 320 and themagnet 319 correspond to each other. A direction in which themagnet 319 and thereed switch 320 are oppositely arranged is defined as a first direction. When the pressing device is moved/triggered, a distance between themagnet 319 and thereed switch 320 in the first direction can be changed so as to switch on/off thereed switch 320. - Please refer to
FIG. 127 , in combination with the illustration ofFIG. 129 , the pressing device can include amain body portion 323. Themain body portion 323 is substantially in the shape of a horizontal plate. A middle portion of themain body portion 323 is extended to form a connectingportion 325. The connectingportion 325 is connected with apivot shaft 321, and is used for rotatably fixing the pressing device to the fixingportion 322. The pressing device can further include a protrudingportion 324 protruding from themain body portion 323 toward thereed switch 320. One end of the protrudingportion 324 close to thereed switch 320 can include a receiving groove (not labelled). The receiving groove can include an opening toward thereed switch 320 and is used for receiving themagnet 319. Themagnet 319 is fixed in the receiving groove which allows a side of themagnet 319 facing toward thereed switch 320 to be exposed. - As illustrated in
FIG. 127 , themain body portion 323 can include a firstpressing part 332 and a secondpressing part 333. For the convenience of description, from theFIG. 112 ’s viewing perspective, two sides of the connectingportion 325 are defined as right side and left side respectively. Themagnet 319 and thereed switch 320 are located on the right side, the firstpressing part 332 is located on the left side, and the secondpressing part 333 is located on the right side. The protrudingportion 324 protrudes from an end of the secondpressing part 333 toward thereed switch 320. The firstpressing part 332 is located away from themagnet 319. By pressing the secondpressing part 333, which would cause themain body portion 323 to rotate clockwise around thepivot shaft 321 and thereby reduce a distance between themagnet 319 and thereed switch 320, thereed switch 320 can sense a magnetic field of themagnet 319. In this case, two pieces of magnetic reeds of thereed switch 320 are contacted with each other, thereed switch 320 is in a switched-on state. By pressing the firstpressing part 332, which would cause themain body portion 323 to rotate counterclockwise around thepivot shaft 321 and thereby increase the distance between themagnet 319 and thereed switch 320, thereed switch 320 cannot sense the magnetic field of themagnet 319. In this case, the two pieces of magnetic reeds of thereed switch 320 will return to an original non-contact state, and thereed switch 320 is switched off. - Referring to
FIG. 127 , the pressing device can further include a firstabutting part 330 extending downwards from an end of the firstpressing part 332 and a secondabutting part 331 extending downwards from an end of the secondpressing part 333. Thecasing 1 is provided with afirst mating surface 327 for being touched against the firstabutting part 330 and a second mating surface 329 for being touched against the secondabutting part 331. Thefirst mating surface 327 and the second mating surface 329 are used to limit rotation ranges of the firstpressing part 332 and the secondabutting part 331. - As shown in
FIG. 127 , the pressing device can further include anabutting part 334 protruding downwards from a portion of the firstpressing part 332 near the connectingportion 325. In particular, theabutting part 334 protrudes downwards from the bottom side of themain body portion 323. Theabutting part 334 can include an arc-shaped abutting surface, and the fixingportion 322 also can include an arc-shaped contact surface, so as to facilitate theabutting part 334 and the fixingportion 322 to touch against each other and thereby limit a rotation range of the pressing device. - As illustrated in
FIG. 127 , the pressing device can further include afirst switch cap 326 and asecond switch cap 328 respectively provided on upper surfaces of the firstpressing part 332 and the secondpressing part 333. In the illustrated embodiment, thefirst switch cap 326 and themain body portion 323 are detachably connected, and thesecond switch cap 328 and themain body portion 323 are also detachably connected. In other embodiments, thefirst switch cap 326, thesecond switch cap 328, and themain body 323 may be integrally constructed to form a one-piece structure. - As shown in
FIG. 127 , theswitch 316 is installed on the mower. The mower can include a start-stop switch and a main switch. The start-stop switch may be theswitch 316, the main switch may be theswitch 316, or both the start-stop switch and the main switch are switches 316. In the illustrated embodiment, the mower is a robotic lawn mower. - As illustrated in
FIG. 127 , a working process of theswitch 316 will be described below. When pressing thefirst switch cap 326, themain body portion 323 rotates counterclockwise around thepivot shaft 321, themagnet 319 is moved far away from thereed switch 320. Sine thereed switch 320 cannot senses the magnetic field of themagnet 319, the two pieces of magnetic reeds of thereed switch 320 return to the original non-contact state, thereed switch 320 is at the switched-off state, theswitch 316 is turned off, and the mower stops working. Whereas, when pressing thesecond switch cap 328, themain body portion 323 rotates clockwise around thepivot shaft 321, themagnet 319 moves toward thereed switch 320, thereed switch 320 can sense the magnetic field of themagnet 319, the two pieces of magnetic reeds of thereed switch 320 are contacted with each other, thereed switch 320 is at a switched-on state, theswitch 316 is turned on, and the mower can resume working. - As shown in
FIG. 127 , taking the robotic mower as an example, theswitch 316 can be installed as an independent component on other garden tools or other control objects, especially as a control switch for products that require waterproofing. The solutions that are the same as or similar to the illustrated embodiment are all covered by the protection scope of the disclosure. - Therefore, regarding the
switch 316 of the disclosure, thereed switch 320 is arranged inside thecasing 1, and themagnet 319 is arranged outside thecasing 1, so that the distance between themagnet 319 and thereed switch 320 can be controlled to control on-off states of thereed switch 320, which may in turn control the turned-on and turned-off states of theswitch 316. This arrangement not only does not require an opening on thecasing 1, but also reduces the risk of water ingress to the switch and prolongs the service life of the switch. In addition, thereed switch 320 is controlled by a magnetic field and does not require an external power supply, which saves electrical energy. The lawn mower with theswitch 316 can provide a stable working state and a long battery life. - Referring to
FIGS. 130 through 134 , a charging station system can include a chargingstation 335 and aceiling 336. The chargingstation 335 can include abottom plate 338 laid on the ground and adocking pile 339 on a side of thebottom plate 338. Thedocking pile 339 is provided with a protruding chargingseat 340. The chargingseat 340 is matched with the intelligent mower and used for charging the battery pack in the intelligent mower. Theceiling 336 can include a connectingbase 337 detachably assembled on thedocking pile 339 of the chargingstation 335 and acover 342 pivotally connected to the connectingbase 337. A projection of theceiling 336 on the ground roughly covers thebottom plate 338, which effectively shields and protects the intelligent mower, including sun shading, rain sheltering, and avoiding external collisions. Theceiling 336 of the charging station system of the disclosure is detachably fixed, and when repairs are needed, theceiling 336 can be removed first and then repair is made, which makes the operation more convenient. - In combination with the illustration of
FIG. 132 andFIG. 133 , the connectingbase 337 can include a connectingportion 350 snapped on the periphery of thedocking pile 339 of the chargingstation 335 and a supportingportion 351 extending laterally from the connectingportion 350. The supportingportion 351 extends laterally from the top end of the connectingportion 350 toward thebottom plate 338 and is used to stably support thecover 342 assembled on the connectingbase 337. A cross section of the connectingportion 350 is roughly U-shaped and is arranged around the rear surface and opposite side surfaces of thedocking pile 339. - Moreover, the connecting
portion 350 covers the top of thedocking pile 339. The bottom of the connectingportion 350 is detachably mounted to the side surfaces of thedocking pile 339 by screws (not shown). The supportingportion 351 is provided with astorage space 352 with an opening upward, which is used for accommodating maintenance tools such as handles, screwdrivers, screws for repairing theceiling 336 or the chargingstation 335. The connectingbase 337 can further include multiple protrudingribs 353 arranged in thestorage space 352. The protrudingribs 353 divide thestorage space 352 into multiple areas, so that users can place tools of different types or sizes in different areas. - As shown in
FIG. 132 , thecover 342 is arranged roughly in the shape of a lid, which can include atop wall 356 and a side wall 357 extending downwards from the circumference of thetop wall 356. Thecover 342 can be used for shading sun and sheltering rain when the intelligent mower is parked at the chargingstation 335 for charging. Thecover 342 can also include a protrudingportion 343 bulging upwards and agroove 363 corresponding to the protrudingportion 343. The protrudingportion 343 is formed by a portion of thetop wall 356 of thecover 342 corresponding to thestorage space 352 of the connectingbase 337 bulging upwards. Thegroove 363 is correspondingly disposed below the protrudingportion 343 and directly above thestorage space 352 of the connectingbase 337. The protrudingportion 343 can reinforce the strength of thecover 342, and thegroove 363 can increase the volume of thestorage space 352. - As shown in
FIG. 132 , thecover 342 can further include atransparent observation window 344 buckled on thetop wall 356. Theobservation window 344 is set at a position of thetop wall 356 in front of the protrudingportion 343 to allow the user to observe a charging state of the intelligent lawn mower at the chargingstation 335. Theobservation window 344 can include a lid-shapedmain body 360 and a snappingportion 441 extending downwardly from the periphery of themain body 360. Thetop wall 356 of thecover 342 can include a throughhole 358 at a position corresponding to theobservation window 344. A side wall of the throughhole 358 is provided with afitting groove 401 that cooperates with the snappingportion 441 of theobservation window 344. In the illustrated embodiment, theobservation window 344 is made of a transparent material and is fitted into the throughhole 358 of thecover 342. Theobservation window 344 is substantially rectangular and located at the front of the protrudingportion 343 and further staggered from the supportingportion 351. A size of theobservation window 344 should be larger than a display area on the intelligent mower to facilitate observation. - Referring to
FIG. 133 andFIG. 134 , thecover 342 is pivotally assembled on the supportingportion 351, and can be opened or closed relative to the connectingbase 337. In order to prevent the user from accidentally opening thecover 342, theceiling 336 can further include aresilient buckle 345 for movably buckling thecover 342 onto the connectingbase 337. Thebuckle 345 can be fixed to one of the connectingbase 337 and thecover 342, and can be connected with the other resilient buckle. The setting of thebuckle 345 requires the user to apply a certain external force to open thecover 342, which can prevent thecover 342 from being blown over when the wind is strong, and can also improve the user’s operating feel. The buckle feeling can help the user to determine whether thecover 342 is in place. - As shown in
FIG. 132 andFIG. 133 , thebuckle 345 is an inverted U-shaped metal resilient piece, which can include a fixingpiece 346 fixed to thecover 342 by ascrew 348 and twobuckle arms 347 extending downwards from opposite ends of the fixingpiece 346 respectively. The fixingpiece 346 is fixed to ascrew post 367 on the bottom surface of thecover 342 by thescrew 348. The fixingpiece 346 is assembled on the bottom of the protrudingportion 343 of thecover 342. The fixingpiece 346 is located at an end of the protrudingportion 343 of thecover 342 close to theobservation window 344. The supportingportion 351 of the connectingbase 337 is provided with a bucklingportion 354 protruding forward at an end away from the connectingportion 350. The bucklingportion 354 can be matched with the bucklingarms 347 of thebuckle 345, to buckle the cover on the connectingbase 337. - When the
cover 342 is laid on the supportingportion 351, the bucklingportion 354 of the supportingportion 351 of the connectingbase 337 is accommodated in a space formed by the bucklingarms 347 of thebuckle 345. When the user needs to open thestorage space 352, he/she needs to overcome a buckling force of thebuckle 345, and then lift thecover 342 upwards. Referring toFIG. 134 , which shows a state in which thecover 342 is opened, thebuckle 345 is retained on the bucklingportion 354, and the matching manner of thebuckle 345 and the bucklingportion 354 is clearly illustrated. - Referring to
FIG. 131 throughFIG. 133 , an engagement between thecover 342 and the connectingbase 337 will be described below. A rear edge of thecover 342 is provided with anotch 362 and twopivot ports 365 located on opposite sides of thenotch 362. Thepivot portions 365 protrude downwards from thecover 342 and are provided with pivot holes 364. Twopivot shafts 349 are respectively fixed to two sides of the connectingbase 337 after passing through the twopivot holes 364, so as to pivotally connect thecover 342 to the connectingbase 337. As shown inFIG. 132 , thepivot 349 is similar to the structure of a tack, and an end thereof is provided with an elastic buckle structure. The elastic buckle structure is inserted into a corresponding hole (not labeled) of the connectingbase 337 and then buckles with an edge of the hole. The two sides of the connectingbase 337 are further provided withstoppers 366 for the openedcover 342 to bear against, which can limit an opened angle of thecover 342 and prevent thecover 342 from overturning and causing inconvenience in use. - Referring to
FIG. 131 throughFIG. 133 , thenotch 362 of thecover 342 is located in an area of the aforementioned protrudingportion 343, and the top of the connectingbase 337 is further provided with aconvex portion 355. After the connectingbase 337 and thecover 342 are assembled together, theconvex portion 355 is inserted into thenotch 362, a top surface of theconvex portion 355 and a top surface of the protrudingportion 343 are coplanar, which can improve the overall appearance of theceiling 336 and enhance the beauty of product. - As illustrated in
FIG. 131 throughFIG. 133 , to assemble, first fix thebuckle 345 to thecover 342, and then pivotally connect thecover 342 to the connectingbase 337 to form theceiling 336. Thebuckle 345 is fastened/buckled to the bucklingportion 354 of the connectingbase 337 to keep thecover 342 in a closed state, and then the assembledceiling 336 is fixed to the chargingstation 335. As a result, the installation of the charging station system with theceiling 336 is completed. - As shown in
FIG. 131 throughFIG. 133 , theceiling 336 can be sold separately as a spare part, and can be installed on an existing charging station after the user purchases it. If the existing charging station has been installed with a casing protecting thedocking pile 339, the casing can be removed first, and then the connectingbase 337 can be detachably installed on thedocking pile 339, so that theceiling 336 can be assembled to the chargingstation 335 to form a charging station system. Theceiling 336 of the disclosure is convenient to disassemble, easy to maintain, and can be adapted to existing charging stations, and thus has a wide range of applications and flexibility. -
FIG. 135 throughFIG. 137 show an embodiment of asafety switch 421 of the disclosure rotated to a first position. In this case, thesafety switch 421 is in a stopped state.FIG. 138 andFIG. 139 show a state of use when thesafety switch 421 is rotated to a second position. In this case, thesafety switch 421 is in an activated state. Furthermore, in the disclosure, thesafety switch 421 is installed on a casing 422 or a chassis of a garden tool. The garden tool can be a robotic mower or any other garden tool to which thesafety switch 421 can be applied. The garden tool is driven by an engine (not shown). Specifically, the engine may be an internal combustion engine or a driving engine. Optionally, the engine in the disclosure is an electric motor. - Please refer to
FIG. 135 , which is a schematic exploded view of thesafety switch 421 of the disclosure in the first position. Thesafety switch 421 is installed on the casing 422 of the garden tool. Thesafety switch 421 can include afirst button 423 and asecond button 438 arranged on thefirst button 423. Thesafety switch 421 can be used to start a power device (not shown) of the engine so as to provide power to the engine. - As illustrated in
FIG. 135 , thesafety switch 421 can further include apivot shaft 424 connected to the casing 422. Thefirst button 423 is pivotally connected to thepivot shaft 424. Thefirst button 423 can include afirst part 425 and asecond part 426. Thefirst part 425 and thesecond part 426 are respectively provided on two sides of thepivot shaft 424, and thesecond button 438 is provided on thesecond part 426. Furthermore, thefirst button 423 can rotate around thepivot shaft 424 and between a first position and a second position. When a tail end of thefirst part 425 is close to the casing 422, thefirst button 423 is in the first position; and when a tail end of thesecond part 426 is close to the casing 422, thefirst button 423 is in the second position. - As shown in
FIG. 135 , thesecond button 438 can include a first slidingbutton 427 and a second slidingbutton 428. When thesafety switch 421 is installed on ahorizontal surface 429 of the casing 422, the second slidingbutton 428 is located beside thefirst button 423, and the first slidingbutton 427 is located above the second slidingbutton 428. Furthermore, the first slidingbutton 427 and the second slidingbutton 428 are manufactured separately and subsequently assembled together. The first slidingbutton 427 is provided with aprotrusion 439 protruding toward the second sliding button 428 (downwardly). The second slidingbutton 428 is provided with acavity 430, and theprotrusion 439 is placed in thecavity 430 to connect the first slidingbutton 427 with the second slidingbutton 428. Such arrangement facilitates the assembly and disassembly of thesafety switch 421. - As illustrated
FIG. 135 , thesecond button 438 is further provided with abiasing device 431. Thebiasing device 431 is positioned and installed on the second slidingbutton 428 via a guidingpin 440. Specifically, the guidingpin 440 is disposed on the second slidingbutton 428 and extends in a direction substantially parallel to a firstupper surface 432 of the first slidingbutton 427. During the starting of thesafety switch 421, the guidingpin 440 can be used to fix and guide thebiasing device 431 to ensure that thebiasing device 431 is compressed and extended without deviating from its expansion and contraction direction. In this case, the expansion and contraction direction of thebiasing device 431 can be described as an axial direction of a central axis formed along a center of thebiasing device 431. Furthermore, thebiasing device 431 may be a coil spring or any other suitable spring device. - Referring to
FIG. 135 , thefirst button 423 can include afirst snapping portion 434 and asecond snapping portion 435. Thefirst snapping portion 434 is disposed above thesecond snapping portion 435. Thepivot shaft 424 is disposed on thesecond snapping portion 435. Alternately, thepivot shaft 424 may penetrate through thesecond snapping portion 435. Thesecond snapping portion 435 is provided with a slidinggroove 436 at an end close to the second slidingbutton 428. A side of the slidinggroove 436 facing toward the second slidingbutton 428 is opened, and the slidinggroove 436 is provided with a limiting surface 16 facing toward the opening. The second slidingbutton 428 is provided with aprotrusion 20 placed in the slidinggroove 436. When thesafety switch 421 is switched between the stopped and activated states, theprotrusion 20 can slide along the slidinggroove 436. Furthermore, thebiasing device 431 and the guidingpin 440 are fixedly housed in theprotrusion 20. Optionally, thebiasing device 431 is located in the slidinggroove 436, and two ends of thebiasing device 431 are pressed against the limiting surface 16 and the second slidingbutton 428 respectively. - As illustrated in
FIG. 135 , thefirst button 423 is provided with a secondupper surface 445 extending in a longitudinal direction, and thesecond button 438 is slidably disposed on the secondupper surface 445 along the longitudinal direction. Thesecond button 438 is slidable in the front and rear directions toward two opposite outer boundaries of the casing 422. Furthermore, thesecond button 438 can further include apressing portion 441 extending toward the casing 422. Specifically, thepressing portion 441 is disposed at an end of the second slidingbutton 428 facing away from thefirst button 423. The casing 422 can include an abuttingportion 442 extending toward thesafety switch 421 and the second sliding button 428 (i.e., extending upwards). - As shown in
FIG. 135 andFIG. 139 , the first slidingbutton 427 can include afirst protrusion 446 and asecond protrusion 447 protruding toward the casing 422. Thefirst protrusion 446 and thesecond protrusion 447 are disposed on a thirdlower surface 448 of the first slidingbutton 427. - As illustrated in
FIG. 135 ,FIG. 137 andFIG. 139 , thesecond part 426 of thefirst button 423 is provided with an accommodation chamber, the first slidingbutton 427 of thesecond button 438 covers the accommodation chamber, and theprotrusion 439 is inserted into the accommodation chamber to connect with the second slidingbutton 428. Thefirst button 423 is provided with afirst receiving portion 449 for receiving thefirst protrusion 446 and asecond receiving portion 450 for receiving thesecond protrusion 447. Specifically, the firstaccommodating portion 449 is provided with afirst wall portion 451 and asecond wall portion 452 extending toward the first slidingbutton 427; the secondaccommodating portion 450 is provided with a third wall portion 453 and a fourth wall portion 454 extending toward the first slidingbutton 427. - The
first receiving portion 449 and thesecond receiving portion 450 are both U-shaped. A distance between thefirst wall portion 451 and thesecond wall portion 452, and a distance between the third wall portion 453 and the fourth wall portion 454 can be used to define a moving/sliding distance of thesecond button 438 relative to thefirst button 423. Furthermore, the first receivingportion 449, thefirst wall portion 451, thesecond wall portion 452 and thefirst protrusion 446 are arranged in a labyrinth manner. Meanwhile, thesecond receiving portion 450, the third wall portion 453, the fourth wall portion 454, and thesecond protrusion 447 are also arranged in a labyrinth manner. Such arrangement can effectively prevent garbage and dirt from entering the interior of thesecond button 438 one the one hand, and can prevent garbage from entering a use area of thebiasing device 431 to cause abnormal use of thesecond button 438 on the other hand. - Referring to
FIG. 135 andFIG. 137 , thefirst button 423 can include thefirst part 425 and thesecond part 426. Thefirst part 425 and thesecond part 426 are respectively arranged on two sides of an axis in an extending direction of thepivot shaft 424. Thesecond button 438 is arranged on thesecond part 426. - Please refer to
FIG. 135 throughFIG. 137 , when thefirst button 423 is in the first position, the position in which thesecond button 438 is located shall be deemed the stopping position. When thefirst button 423 is in the second position, the position in which thesecond button 438 is located shall be deemed the starting/activated position. When thefirst button 423 is in the first position, a rotation of thefirst button 423 is restricted and cannot be rotated toward the second position. In this case, thefirst part 425 of thefirst button 423 is close to the casing 422, and theend 443 of thepressing portion 441 touches against the abuttingportion 442 on the casing 422. In the disclosure, thesecond button 438 is slidably connected to thesecond part 426, thesecond button 438 can slide along the secondupper surface 445 of thesecond part 426, so that thesecond button 438 can be slidably switched between the stopping position and the starting position. Furthermore, when thesecond button 438 is switched to the stopping position, the engine is in a power-off state; whereas, when thesecond button 438 is switched to the starting position, the engine is in the energized state. - Please refer to
FIG. 138 andFIG. 139 , in which schematic diagrams of thefirst button 423 being rotated to the second position are disclosed. When thefirst button 423 rotates around thepivot shaft 424 to the second position, an extending direction of the secondupper surface 445 located in a projection area of thesafety switch 421 is substantially parallel to an extending direction of the casing 422. Theend 443 of thepressing portion 441 touches against the casing 422. In this case, the first side surface 455 of thepressing portion 441 and thesecond side surface 456 of the abuttingportion 442 are arranged oppositely, and the first side surface 455 and thesecond side surface 456 are approximately parallel. Furthermore, when thesafety switch 421 is rotated to the second position, the restoring force of thebiasing device 431 acts on the abuttingportion 442 via thepressing portion 441, so that thesafety switch 421 is positioned at the activation/starting position. - As shown in
FIG. 137 , when thefirst button 423 is in the first position, the second slidingbutton 428 touches against thesecond snapping portion 435 through a buckling portion 38, and thesecond button 438 is in the stopping position. Whereas, when thefirst button 423 is in the second position (as shown inFIG. 37 ), thesecond button 438 moves toward thefirst button 423, thebiasing device 431 is compressed, the restoring force of thebiasing device 431 acts on thesecond button 438, thepressing portion 441 touches against the abuttingportion 442, so that thesecond button 438 is in the activation position. - Referring to
FIG. 137 , when thefirst button 423 rotates to the first position, that is, thefirst part 425 of thefirst button 423 rotates around thepivot shaft 424 and obliquely leans against the casing 422, thesafety switch 421 is in a disabled/deactivated state. When thesafety switch 421 is in a deactivated state before being activated, thesafety switch 421 is at a start/initial position. That is, at the first position shown inFIG. 133 throughFIG. 135 , thesecond button 438 is in the stopping position. - Referring to
FIG. 137 , when thesafety switch 421 of the disclosure is activated/started, thesafety switch 421 can be switched from the stopping position to the starting position. In this process, an external force is applied firstly onto thefirst button 423 in the first position, the first slidingbutton 427 slides toward thefirst part 425 of thefirst button 423 and compresses thebiasing device 431, and theend 443 of thepressing portion 441 is disengaged from the top end of the abuttingportion 442. Furthermore, an external force is applied to thesecond button 438, so that thesecond part 426 rotates around thepivot shaft 424 toward the casing 422 until a stoppingportion 458 of thesecond button 438 touches against the casing 422. In this case, thesafety switch 421 reaches the starting position. - Finally, the external force applied to the
second button 438 is stopped, thebiasing device 431 stretches on its own restoring force and drives thesecond button 438 to move away from thefirst part 425 and further drives the first side surface 455 of thepressing portion 441 to touch against thesecond side surface 456 of the abuttingportion 442. In this case, thesafety switch 421 is in the activated state, which can be used to activate the power device of the electric engine/motor and provide power to the electric engine. - Referring to
FIG. 137 andFIG. 138 , when stopping the motor, thefirst part 425 of thefirst button 423 is pushed to rotate around thepivot 424 toward the casing 422, the first side surface 455 and thesecond side surface 456 are separated, and thebiasing device 431 drives thesecond button 438 to move away from thefirst part 425. Finally, when theend 443 of thepressing portion 441 touches against the abuttingportion 442, thesafety switch 421 is in the stopping position and the motor stops working. - Therefore, the
safety switch 421 of the disclosure is provided with thefirst button 423 and thesecond button 438. Thesecond button 438 is controlled to slide during a using process to further control thefirst button 423 and thesecond button 438 to rotate with thepivot shaft 424 as an axis, so that thesafety switch 421 is in the activated state. Thesafety switch 421 of the disclosure is activated/started by performing two different continuous control actions. Such arrangement makes thesafety switch 421 of the disclosure to be fool-proof, and the accidental activation of the garden tool is avoided. Thus, garden tools using thesafety switch 421 of the disclosure can have relatively good safety. Thesafety switch 421 of the disclosure can be applied to a robotic mower, a power mower, or any other garden tools suitable for using thesafety switch 421. - In an embodiment of the disclosure, a method is provided for providing power to an engine of a garden tool. The garden tool is provided with the
safety switch 421. Thefirst button 423 can rotate between the first position and the second position with thepivot shaft 424 as an axis. Thesecond button 438 can slide between the stopping position and the starting position. Furthermore, the method of using thesafety switch 421 specifically can include the following steps. -
Step 1, press the first part of the first button of the safety switch to make it closer to the casing, in order to rotate the first button to the first position; Since the second button is located in the stopping position and touches against the casing, the rotation of the first button toward the second position is restricted. - Step 2: slide the second button to compress the biasing device, and separate the second button from the casing.
- Step 3: downwardly press the second button so that the first button rotates around the pivot shaft from the first position to the second position, and the second button slides from the stopping position to the starting position under the effect of an elastic force from the biasing device.
- Step 4: place the safety switch in the starting state, which allows the activation of the power plant/device and starting of the engine.
- Referring to
FIG. 140 throughFIG. 142 , alight guide member 690 is provided in the disclosure and used for guiding light. In the disclosure, thelight guide member 690 is substantially in a cylindrical shape, and can include alight guide portion 683, alight output portion 680, and alight incident portion 691 respectively provided at two ends of thelight guide portion 683 in an extending/lengthwise direction. - As illustrated in
FIG. 140 throughFIG. 142 , thelight output portion 680 is arranged at the front end of thelight guide portion 683 along the extending direction of thelight guide portion 683. Thelight incident portion 691 is arranged opposite to thelight output portion 680 and is located at the tail/rear end of thelight guide portion 683 in the extending direction. In an embodiment of the disclosure, thelight guide portion 683, thelight output portion 680, and thelight incident portion 691 are integrally constructed (i.e., one-piece structure). In other embodiments of the disclosure, thelight guide portion 683, thelight output portion 680, and thelight incident portion 691 can be separately manufactured. - Referring to
FIG. 140 throughFIG. 142 , thelight guide portion 683 is further provided with guidingparts 688 and a snappingpart 686 formed along the extending direction. The guidingparts 688 and the snappingpart 686 are staggered along the circumferential direction of thelight guide portion 683. In the disclosure, the guidingparts 688 are used to guide thelight guide member 690 to fit with other structure and used to prevent a relative rotation between thelight guide member 690 and the other structure, thereby ensuring the stability of thelight guide member 690 fitting with the other structure. - As illustrated in
FIG. 140 throughFIG. 142 , the guidingparts 688 are provided on an outer wall surface of thelight guide portion 683 and are formed extending outwards along a radial direction of thelight guide portion 683. Furthermore, the guidingpart 688 extends from the tail end of thelight guide portion 683 along the extending direction of thelight guide portion 683. In the extending direction of thelight guide portion 683, ends of the guidingpart 688 are located below thelight output portion 680. - As shown in
FIG. 140 throughFIG. 142 , the guidingpart 688 is provided with a guidingstructure 687 at an end of its extending direction, and the guidingstructure 687 is formed by inclined guidingsurfaces 685 arranged obliquely, so as to make thelight guide member 690 connecting with the other structure conveniently. In an embodiment of the disclosure, the guidingpart 688 is substantially rectangular, the guidingstructure 687 is formed by three inclined guidingsurfaces 685, and each the inclined guidingsurface 685 is a flat surface, so that the guidingstructure 687 is roughly in a pyramid shape. In other embodiments of the disclosure, theinclined guide surface 685 can be in an arc shape, so that the guidingstructure 687 is roughly in the shape of a bullet. That is, the specific setting form of the guidingstructure 687 in the disclosure can be selected according to actual needs, without limiting herein. - As illustrated in
FIG. 140 throughFIG. 142 , in an embodiment of the disclosure, there are two guidingparts 688 respectively provided on two sides of the extending direction of thelight guide portion 683. The two guidingparts 688 is symmetrically arranged relative to a central axis of thelight guide portion 683. In other embodiments of the disclosure, one or more than two guidingparts 688 may be provided instead, and when there are more than one guidingpart 688, these guidingparts 688 are evenly distributed on the outer circumferential wall of thelight guide portion 683. That is, the number and position of the guidingpart 688 in the disclosure can be selected according to actual needs, as long as it can ensure that the guiding part(s) 688 can facilitate the fitting of thelight guide member 690 with other structure and can prevent the occurrence of relative rotation between thelight guide member 690 and the other structure. - As illustrated in
FIG. 140 throughFIG. 142 , the snappingpart 686 is arranged close to the tail end of thelight guide portion 683 to limit a displacement of thelight guide part 690 in a connecting direction when thelight guide member 690 is connected to other structure, and to prevent thelight guide member 690 from detaching from the other structure. In an embodiment of the disclosure, there is asnapping gap 689 between the snappingpart 686 and the tail end of thelight guide portion 683. The setting of thesnapping gap 689 can facilitate the fitting of thelight guide member 690 with the other structure. Furthermore, the snappingpart 686 can include a guidingsurface 686 b arranged obliquely and anabutting surface 686 a arranged perpendicular to the extending direction. When thelight guide member 690 is connected to the other structure, the abuttingsurface 686 a touches against the other structure, so as to fix the connection position of thelight guide member 690 with the other structure. - Referring to
FIG. 140 throughFIG. 142 , thelight output portion 680 can include a light-emittingsurface 682 and alight blocking wall 681 disposed around the light-emittingsurface 682. Specifically, thelight output portion 680 is formed by being recessed from the front end of thelight guide portion 683 toward the tail end. In other words, thelight output portion 680 is formed by the outer circumferential surface of thelight guide portion 683 extending along the extending direction in a manner of facing away from the tail end of thelight guide portion 683, so that an edge of thelight blocking wall 681 is located above the light-emittingsurface 682. In the disclosure, the light-emittingsurface 682 is a flat surface to realize a linear transmission of light. Furthermore, when the light-emittingsurface 682 is configured as a concave/convex surface, the light-emittingsurface 682 can be used to realize the convergence/divergence of light, so as to transmit the light to a place that needs to be illuminated. - As shown in
FIG. 141 , thelight incident portion 691 is provided in a groove shape and is recessed from the tail end to the front end of thelight guide portion 683, and is further used for accommodating a light-emitting element. In the disclosure, the light-emitting element can be indicator lamp, an LED and other component used for light-emitting. Furthermore, thelight guide member 690 can conduct/guide the light emitted from the light-emitting element through thelight guide portion 683 and achieve the exporting and transmission of the light through thelight output portion 680. - As shown in
FIG. 140 throughFIG. 142 , thelight guide member 690 can further include a sealingmember 684 arranged at the front end of thelight guide portion 683, thelight guide portion 683 is provided with a receivinggroove 692 for receiving the sealingmember 684, and the receivinggroove 692 is located on the periphery of thelight output portion 680. Specifically, the sealingmember 684 and the receivinggroove 692 both are ring-shaped, and the receivinggroove 692 is recessed from a center line of thelight blocking wall 681 to the tail end of thelight guide portion 683. Such arrangement facilitates the connection of the sealingmember 684 with thelight output portion 680 on the one hand, and can improve the sealing performance when thelight guide member 690 is connected to other structure on the other hand. In one embodiment, an inner wall surface of the receivinggroove 692 is sloped so as to further improve the sealing performance of thelight guide member 690 connected with the other structure. - As illustrated in
FIG. 140 throughFIG. 142 , thelight guide member 690 is provided with the guiding part(s) 688 and the snappingpart 686 for positioning and connecting thelight guide member 690 with other structure, which effectively improves the stability of connection between thelight guide member 690 and the other structure. Meanwhile, the arrangement of the sealingmember 684 improves the sealing performance of thelight guide member 690 connected with the other structure, thereby effectively preventing rainwater from entering the other structure along a gap between thelight guide member 690 and the other structure when thelight guide member 690 is connected to the other structure. - Referring to
FIG. 143 , a mower provided by the disclosure can include afirst casing 641 and asecond casing 642 snapped/engaged with each other, adriving unit 695 and apower supply 693 housed between thefirst casing 641 and thesecond casing 642, and a workingunit 694 for performing garden work tasks. Thepower supply unit 693 is used to provide power to thedriving unit 695, and thedriving unit 695 is used to drive the workingunit 694 to complete corresponding garden work tasks. - Referring to
FIG. 144 throughFIG. 146 , thefirst casing 641 is provided with alamp receiving groove 696, anindicator lamp 697 corresponding to thelamp receiving groove 696, and thelight guide member 690 accommodated in thelamp receiving groove 696. Thelight guide member 690 guides light emitted from theindicator lamp 697 from inside of thefirst casing 641 to outside of thefirst casing 641. Further, thelamp receiving groove 696 can include guidingslots 696 a for holding thelight guide member 690 and a holdingslot 696 b for positioning a connection position of thelight guide member 690 with thelamp receiving groove 696. - Referring to
FIG. 144 throughFIG. 146 , the guidingparts 688 of thelight guide member 690 are received in the guidingslots 696 a and can slide along the guidingslots 696 a to realize the fitting between thelight guide member 690 and thelamp receiving groove 696, which facilitates thelight guide member 690 to be inserted into thefirst casing 641 on the one hand, and can prevent a relative rotation between thelight guide member 690 and thelamp receiving groove 696 on the other hand. The stability of the connection between thelight guide member 690 and thelamp receiving groove 696 is thereby ensured. - Referring to
FIG. 144 throughFIG. 146 , after thelight guide member 690 slides into thelamp receiving groove 696, the abuttingsurface 686 a of the snappingpart 686 touches in the holdingslot 696 b to prevent thelight guide member 690 from being separated from thelamp receiving groove 696. Further, the guidingparts 688 and the guidingslots 696 a correspond to each other, and the snappingpart 686 and the holdingslot 696 b are arranged in one-to-one correspondence. There are guidingparts 688 arranged corresponding to the guidingslots 696 a, and the snappingpart 686 arranged corresponding to the holdingslot 696 b. - As illustrated in
FIG. 144 throughFIG. 146 , the circumferential edge of thelamp receiving groove 696 is further provided with an abuttinggroove 696 c for accommodating thelight blocking wall 681. The sealingmember 684 is interposed between thelight blocking wall 681 and the abuttinggroove 696 c, and is accommodated between the abuttinggroove 696 c and the receivinggroove 692. Such arrangement can enable the sealingmember 684 to close a connection gap between thelamp receiving groove 696 and thelight guide member 690, thereby ensuring the airtightness of the mower. - Referring to
FIG. 143 throughFIG. 146 , theindicator lamp 697 is used for status indication. There may bemultiple indicator lamps 697, and themultiple indicator lamps 697 can independently emit lights. Further, thefirst casing 641 is provided with adisplay panel 695 covering thelamp receiving grooves 696, and thedisplay panel 695 is provided with display areas (not shown) set in one-to-one correspondence with thelamp receiving grooves 696 and theindicator lamps 697. By way of bright/dark states of the display areas, working states of the mower can be determined. - As illustrated in
FIG. 143 throughFIG. 146 , thelight guide member 690 of the disclosure is provided with the guiding part(s) 688 and the snappingpart 686, so that thelight guide member 690 can be firmly connected to thefirst casing 641 of the mower. The setting of the sealingmember 684 makes thelight guide member 690 be tightly connected with the upper casing of the mower, which prevents rainwater from entering the mower at the connection position of thelight guide member 690 with thefirst casing 641, and effectively improves waterproof performance and use safety of the mower which uses thelight guide member 690 to guide out the light emitted from theindicator lamp 697. - Referring to
FIG. 147 throughFIG. 152 , in the disclosure, alight guide member 700 is also provided to seal the indicator lamp on an equipment and guide out light emitted by the indicator lamp. A material of thelight guide member 700 may be a light conductive material. In an embodiment of the disclosure, the light conductive material may be a polycarbonate (PC) material. Thelight guide member 700 can include alight incident portion 701 matched with the indicator lamp, alight output portion 702, and alight guide portion 706 connected to thelight incident portion 701 and thelight output portion 702. In the illustrated embodiment, thelight incident portion 701, thelight output portion 702, and thelight guide portion 706 are integrally formed. In other embodiments, thelight incident portion 701, thelight output portion 702, and thelight guide portion 706 may be individual structures. - A top surface of the
light guide portion 706 is higher than a top surface of thelight output portion 702, and the top surface of thelight output portion 702 extends to the top surface of thelight guide portion 706 and thereby forms an upward slope. Such arrangement can effectively prevent rainwater from entering into the casing of equipment along thelight guide member 700, effectively seal the indicator lamp, and prevent the problem of damage to components inside the casing resulting from rainwater entering into the casing of equipment from a lamp receiving groove. In the illustrated embodiment, the top surface of thelight incident portion 701 is higher than the top surface of thelight guide portion 706; the top surface of thelight incident portion 701, the top surface of thelight guide portion 706 and the top surface of thelight output portion 702 are coplanar, so that the light emitted by the indicator lamp can be guided out with maximum efficiency. - In other embodiments, the top surface of the
light incident portion 701 can be set lower than the top surface of thelight guide portion 706. In the illustrated embodiment, a width of thelight guide member 700 along the B-B direction (as shown inFIG. 147 ) and a thickness along the A-A direction gradually increase along a direction from thelight incident portion 701 to thelight output portion 702. Such arrangement can effectively increase a light-emitting area of thelight output portion 702, so that the user can easily observe the state of the indicator lamp. In other embodiments, the width of thelight guide member 700 along the B-B direction and the thickness along the A-A direction can be set to be constant instead. - As shown in
FIG. 147 andFIG. 148 , an end of thelight incident portion 701 facing away from thelight guide portion 706 is matched with the indicator lamp, so as to collect light emitted from the indicator lamp. In one embodiment, an end of thelight incident portion 701 facing away from thelight guide portion 706 is disposed with a lighting cover (not shown), so as to improve light collection efficiency of thelight incident portion 701. Thelight guide portion 706 connects thelight incident portion 701 and thelight output portion 702 and is used for guiding the light collected by thelight incident portion 701 toward thelight output portion 702. Thelight guide portion 706 is further provided with a mountinghole 707, and thelight guide member 700 can be fixedly installed on the casing of equipment by a screw or a bolt. The mountinghole 707 may be a through hole or a blind hole. - The
light output portion 702 can include a light-emittingsurface 703 for guiding light out, and a side of the light-emittingsurface 703 facing away from thelight guide portion 706 protrudes outwards to form a convex surface. Such arrangement allows the user to observe the light emitted from thelight output portion 702 in a wide range, and thus facilitates the user to observe the state of the indicator lamp. An end of thelight output portion 702 facing away from thelight guide portion 706 extends outwards to form awaterproof cap 704 that is matched with the casing of equipment so as to prevent rainwater from entering into a lamp receiving groove provided on the casing of equipment along thelight guide member 700. - In the illustrated embodiment, the
waterproof cap 704 and the light-emittingsurface 703 are coplanar. In other embodiments, thewaterproof cap 704 and the light-emittingsurface 703 may not be coplanar. In additional embodiments, a diversion groove (not shown) may be provided on a side of thelight output portion 702 to guide a small amount of rainwater that may be fallen between thewaterproof cap 704 and the top surface of thelight output portion 702 to the outside of the casing of equipment. In one embodiment, a side of thelight output portion 702 is further provided with a limitingblock 705 that matches with the casing of equipment, so as to prevent thelight guide member 700 from being excessively inserted into the lamp receiving groove on the casing of equipment during an installation process, which would destroy the indicator lamp. The bottom of the limitingblock 705 is further provided with apositioning protrusion 708 that matches with the casing of equipment and facilitates a quick positioning during installation. - Referring to
FIG. 147 andFIG. 148 , thelight guide member 700 of the disclosure sets the top surface of thelight guide portion 706 higher than the top surface of thelight output portion 702, and an upward slope surface is formed from the top surface of thelight output portion 702 to the top surface of thelight guide portion 706. As a result, it can effectively prevent rainwater from entering the casing of equipment/device along thelight guide member 700 and thereby effectively seal the indicator lamp and prevent rainwater from entering the casing of equipment from the lamp receiving groove. - Referring to
FIG. 149 throughFIG. 152 , the disclosure also provides acharging device 709, which can include abottom plate 710, a chargingpart 712 mounted on thebottom plate 710, anindicator lamp 722, alight guide member 700, and a boundary line (not shown). - As illustrated in
FIG. 149 throughFIG. 152 , thebottom plate 710 is laid on the ground, and a number of fixingholes 711 are provided on thebottom plate 710, so that thebottom plate 710 can be fixedly installed on the ground by screws or bolts. The chargingpart 712 is fixedly installed on a side edge of thebottom plate 710 and is substantially perpendicular to thebottom plate 710. The chargingpart 712 can include afirst side wall 713 facing toward a center of thebottom plate 710, athird side wall 718 disposed opposite to thefirst side wall 713, and asecond sidewall 714 located on thefirst side wall 713 and thethird side wall 718. - The
first side wall 713, thesecond side wall 714, and thethird side wall 718 jointly define a receiving space for receiving electronic components and theindicator lamp 722 of thecharging device 709. Thefirst side wall 713 is provided with alamp receiving groove 719 and a charginginterface 720 matched with a device to be charged. Thelamp receiving groove 719 is recessed inwardly from thefirst side wall 713 and connects with the indicator lamp/light 722, so that theindicator lamp 722 is located at the bottom of thelamp receiving groove 719. The bottom wall of thelamp receiving groove 719 is provided with a water guide/diversion hole 721 to guide water in thelamp receiving groove 719 to the outside of thelamp receiving groove 719. - It can be understood that a groove side wall and a groove top wall of the
lamp receiving groove 719 can also be provided with water diversion holes as required. The side edge of thelamp receiving groove 719 is provided with a limiting groove 720 (as shown inFIG. 152 ) that matches with the limitingblock 705, and the groove bottom wall of the limitinggroove 720 is fitted with thepositioning protrusion 708. The top of the chargingpart 712 is further provided with arain shelter 715. Thelight guide member 700 is installed in thelamp receiving groove 719 and matches with theindicator lamp 722 to guide light emitted by theindicator lamp 722. - Meanwhile, the top surface of the
light guide portion 706 is higher than the top surface of thelight output portion 702, so that an upward slope is formed from the top surface of thelight output portion 702 to the top surface of thelight guide portion 706, and rainwater is effectively prevented from entering thelamp receiving groove 719 as well as the inside of the chargingpart 712 along thelight guide member 700. Thelight emitting surface 703 is partially located on thefirst side wall 713 and partially located on thesecond side wall 714. Such arrangement can facilitate the user to observe the state of theindicator lamp 722 in a wider range. - Please refer to
FIG. 150 , an intersection of thefirst side wall 713 and thesecond side wall 714 is provided with a fixinghole 716 connecting with the mountinghole 707, so that thescrew 717 passes through the fixinghole 716 and the mountinghole 707 and causing thelight guide member 700 to be fixedly installed on the chargingpart 712. In the illustrated embodiment, thewaterproof cap 704 directly touches against thefirst side wall 713 as well as thesecond side wall 714 and protrudes out of the chargingpart 712. In other embodiments, a receiving groove (not shown) for receiving thewaterproof cap 704 may be provided on the periphery of thelamp receiving groove 719. The boundary line is electrically connected to thecharging device 709, and theindicator lamp 722 is used to display whether the boundary line and thecharging device 709 are normally connected. In other embodiments, theindicator lamp 722 can also be used to display other states, for example, to display whether the device to be charged is fully charged. - Referring to
FIG. 147 throughFIG. 152 , the disclosure also discloses a charging system including an electronic device (not shown) and acharging device 709 for charging the electronic device. Thelight guide member 700 of the disclosure can seal the indicator lamp and guide the light emitted by the indicator lamp, thereby effectively preventing rainwater from entering the inside of the casing of device from the lamp receiving groove and causing damage to the components inside the casing. - In summary, the control assembly is for example but not limited to a single-chip microcomputer (also referred to MCU) or a processor module, and can control various mechanisms to perform different working processes through corresponding driving circuits. For example, the airtightness of the housing can be detected through the airtight nozzle on the housing, and then the air filter hood can be used to ensure that the mower maintaining the air pressure balance in the housing during the working process, and thereby ensures the normal working condition of mower. In another example, the height of the blade carrier disc is adjusted by the assisted height-adjustment assembly in the cutting mechanism, and the prime mover is controlled to rotate through the control assembly to drive the blade carrier disc to rotate correspondingly, which drives the blades for mowing.
- In still another example, during working or moving of the mower, the relative displacement between the movable upper cover and the housing in the vertical direction is detected by the suspension-lift detection assembly in the detecting mechanism, so that when a relative displacement in the vertical direction occurs between the movable upper cover and the housing, a current signal change is produced/generated and sent to a control module or its connected current sensor to regulate the working state of the mower (such as stopping the mowing action or stopping the moving action). When the mower is working or moving, a relative displacement between the movable upper cover and the housing in the horizontal direction is detected by the collision detection assembly in the detecting mechanism, so that when the relative displacement in the horizontal direction occurs between the movable upper cover and the housing, a current signal change is generated and delivered to a control module or its connected current sensor to regulate the working status of the mower (such as stopping the mowing action or stopping the moving action).
- The suspension-lift detection assembly and the collision detection assembly are set independently to respectively detect the relative displacement in the vertical direction and the relative displacement in the horizontal direction between the movable upper cover and the housing, which can effectively reduce false triggering. In even still another example, the wheel cover trim can be detached and replaced on the traveling/walking wheel, which can achieve the purpose of changing the color of the traveling wheel. In the disclosure, the above working processes can be implemented individually or in combination, so that the mower can meet different functional or design requirements.
- The above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solutions of the disclosure and not construed as limiting. Although the disclosure can include been described in detail with reference to the preferred embodiments, those of ordinary skill in the art should understand that the technical solutions of the disclosure can be modified or equivalently replaced without departing from the spirit and scope of the technical solution of the disclosure.
Claims (20)
1. A robotic mower comprising:
a housing;
a walking assembly configured for driving the robotic mower, the walking assembly further including at least one walking wheel;
at least one universal wheel disposed on the housing by a wheel shaft;
the walking wheel including a wheel hub, a wheel cover and a wheel cover trim;
wherein the wheel cover trim detachably mounted on the wheel cover.
2. A robotic mower according to claim 1 , wherein the wheel cover is disposed on the wheel hub.
3. A robotic mower according to claim 2 , wherein the wheel cover trim is located between the wheel hub and the wheel cover.
4. A robotic mower according to claim 1 , wherein more than one wheel cover mounting holes are arranged on the wheel cover.
5. A robotic mower according to claim 4 , wherein the wheel cover trim includes a middle portion and more than one protrusions extending outward in in the circumferential direction from the middle portion, the protrusions are embedded in corresponding wheel cover mounting holes.
6. A robotic mower according to claim 5 , wherein the middle portion has a ring-shaped body and coaxial with the wheel hub and the wheel cover.
7. A robotic mower according to claim 6 , wherein the protrusions include a decorative block adapted to the wheel cover mounting hole, and a flange located on one side of the decorative block and protruding from the decorative block, when the protrusion is embedded in the corresponding wheel cover mounting hole, the decorative block is fitted into the corresponding wheel cover mounting hole and exposed from the outer side of the wheel cover.
8. A robotic mower according to claim 7 , wherein the wheel cover includes a fitting head for engaging with the wheel hub.
9. A robotic mower according to claim 8 , wherein the wheel hub includes an inner sider and an outer sider, the inner side of the wheel hub is flat, the outer side of the wheel hub is provided with a wheel cover mounting location for installing the wheel cover.
10. A robotic mower according to claim 9 , wherein the wheel cover and the wheel hub are positioned and installed by at least two asymmetrically arranged positioning members.
11. A robotic mower according to claim 10 , wherein the positioning members includes a positioning rod and a wheel hub positioning hole.
12. A robotic mower according to claim 1 , wherein the universal wheel includes a first half-wheel and a second half-wheel, the first half-wheel and the second half-wheel are engaged with each other to form an accommodating cavity.
13. A robotic mower according to claim 12 , wherein the wheel shaft passes through the first half-wheel and enters the accommodating cavity.
14. A robotic mower according to claim 12 , wherein the accommodating cavity includes
a first fitting gap formed by the first half wheel and the wheel shaft, and
a second fitting gap formed by the first half wheel and the second half wheel.
15. A robotic mower according to claim 14 , wherein the first fitting gap and the second fitting gap are respectively located on two sides of the accommodating cavity.
16. A robotic mower according to claim 12 , wherein the first half-wheel is provided with a first cylindrical portion protruding toward the second half-wheel, and one side of the first cylindrical portion is provided with a through-hole allowing the wheel shaft to pass through.
17. A robotic mower according to claim 12 , wherein the second half-wheel is provided with a second cylindrical portion and a third cylindrical portion protruding toward the first half-wheel.
18. A robotic mower according to claim 17 , wherein a ring groove is formed between the second cylindrical portion and the third cylindrical portion.
19. A robotic mower according to claim 12 , wherein the first half wheel is provided with at least one mounting holes, and the second half wheel is provided with at least one mounting posts corresponding to the mounting holes.
20. A robotic mower according to claim 12 , wherein the universal wheel further includes a wheel shaft positioning assembly, the wheel shaft positioning assembly includes a bearing, a bearing pressing block, a washer, a bearing clamp, and a washer located outside the first half-wheel.
Applications Claiming Priority (49)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN202020441934.XU CN212087018U (en) | 2020-03-31 | 2020-03-31 | Grass cutter |
CN202020441934.X | 2020-03-31 | ||
CN202020701949.5U CN212028313U (en) | 2020-04-30 | 2020-04-30 | Connection structure and have this connection structure's lawn mower and garden instrument |
CN202020701949.5 | 2020-04-30 | ||
CN202020731685.8U CN212573548U (en) | 2020-05-07 | 2020-05-07 | Wheel assembly and electric equipment |
CN202020732348.0U CN212970834U (en) | 2020-05-07 | 2020-05-07 | Light guide member and garden tool |
CN202020731501.8 | 2020-05-07 | ||
CN202020731501.8U CN212573547U (en) | 2020-05-07 | 2020-05-07 | Lawn mower and electric tool |
CN202020731675.4U CN212573599U (en) | 2020-05-07 | 2020-05-07 | Electrically powered apparatus and assemblies |
CN202020731685.8 | 2020-05-07 | ||
CN202010376995.7 | 2020-05-07 | ||
CN202020732348.0 | 2020-05-07 | ||
CN202010384328.3 | 2020-05-07 | ||
CN202010376995.7A CN111406500A (en) | 2020-05-07 | 2020-05-07 | Lawn mower and electric tool |
CN202010384328.3A CN111418352A (en) | 2020-05-07 | 2020-05-07 | Electrically powered apparatus and assemblies |
CN202020731675.4 | 2020-05-07 | ||
CN202020800248.7U CN212207733U (en) | 2020-05-14 | 2020-05-14 | Light guide component, charging device and charging system |
CN202020799218.9U CN212573559U (en) | 2020-05-14 | 2020-05-14 | Cutter head assembly and mower |
CN202020800248.7 | 2020-05-14 | ||
CN202020799218.9 | 2020-05-14 | ||
CN202020991642.3 | 2020-06-03 | ||
CN202020991642.3U CN213214364U (en) | 2020-06-03 | 2020-06-03 | Shell assembly and intelligent mower |
CN202011518432.3A CN112616423A (en) | 2020-12-21 | 2020-12-21 | Machine shell and mower |
CN202011519837.9 | 2020-12-21 | ||
CN202023096201.6 | 2020-12-21 | ||
CN202011518322.7A CN112484756A (en) | 2020-12-21 | 2020-12-21 | Detection mechanism and mower |
CN202023096221.3 | 2020-12-21 | ||
CN202011519711.1A CN112449845A (en) | 2020-12-21 | 2020-12-21 | Supplementary subassembly and lawn mower of increaseing of blade disc |
CN202023096221.3U CN213960792U (en) | 2020-12-21 | 2020-12-21 | Supplementary subassembly and lawn mower of increaseing of blade disc |
CN202023096313.1U CN213991689U (en) | 2020-12-21 | 2020-12-21 | Grass cutter |
CN202023094544.9U CN213812331U (en) | 2020-12-21 | 2020-12-21 | Detection mechanism and mower |
CN202023094522.2U CN214252450U (en) | 2020-12-21 | 2020-12-21 | Suspension lifting detection assembly and mower |
CN202023096201.6U CN214430208U (en) | 2020-12-21 | 2020-12-21 | Machine shell and mower |
CN202023096114.0 | 2020-12-21 | ||
CN202011518419.8A CN112602440A (en) | 2020-12-21 | 2020-12-21 | Grass cutter |
CN202011533027.9A CN112537169A (en) | 2020-12-21 | 2020-12-21 | Walking wheel and mower |
CN202011533027.9 | 2020-12-21 | ||
CN202023096313.1 | 2020-12-21 | ||
CN202011519837.9A CN112540254A (en) | 2020-12-21 | 2020-12-21 | Suspension lifting detection assembly and mower |
CN202011518419.8 | 2020-12-21 | ||
CN202011518432.3 | 2020-12-21 | ||
CN202023096114.0U CN213973441U (en) | 2020-12-21 | 2020-12-21 | Walking wheel and mower |
CN202023091979.8 | 2020-12-21 | ||
CN202011519711.1 | 2020-12-21 | ||
CN202011518322.7 | 2020-12-21 | ||
CN202023094522.2 | 2020-12-21 | ||
CN202023094544.9 | 2020-12-21 | ||
CN202023091979.8U CN213960784U (en) | 2020-12-21 | 2020-12-21 | Magnet fixed knot constructs, collision sensor and garden instrument |
PCT/CN2021/084615 WO2021197390A1 (en) | 2020-03-31 | 2021-03-31 | A robotic mower with integrated assemblies |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2021/084615 Continuation WO2021197390A1 (en) | 2020-03-31 | 2021-03-31 | A robotic mower with integrated assemblies |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20230008169A1 true US20230008169A1 (en) | 2023-01-12 |
Family
ID=75339538
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US17/218,188 Pending US20210329841A1 (en) | 2020-03-31 | 2021-03-31 | Robotic Mower with Integrated Assemblies |
US17/948,249 Pending US20230008169A1 (en) | 2020-03-31 | 2022-09-20 | A Robotic Mower with Integrated Assemblies |
Family Applications Before (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US17/218,188 Pending US20210329841A1 (en) | 2020-03-31 | 2021-03-31 | Robotic Mower with Integrated Assemblies |
Country Status (3)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US20210329841A1 (en) |
EP (2) | EP4125321A4 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2021197390A1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
SE540586C2 (en) * | 2017-04-27 | 2018-10-02 | Husqvarna Ab | Switching mechanism for an outdoor robotic tool |
WO2020184756A1 (en) * | 2019-03-13 | 2020-09-17 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Robot |
US20210352842A1 (en) * | 2020-05-14 | 2021-11-18 | Globe (jiangsu) Co., Ltd. | Robotic Mower with Collision and Detection Assemblies |
CN116134996A (en) * | 2021-11-18 | 2023-05-19 | 苏州科瓴精密机械科技有限公司 | Start-stop device and garden tool |
USD1006851S1 (en) * | 2022-07-30 | 2023-12-05 | Wuxi Junchuangfei Satellite Technology Co., Ltd. | Robotic mower |
USD1029047S1 (en) * | 2022-08-11 | 2024-05-28 | Willand (Beijing) Technology Co., Ltd. | Vision module |
USD1012982S1 (en) * | 2023-10-25 | 2024-01-30 | Shenzhen Hua Xin Information Technology CO., Ltd. | Lawnmower robot |
Family Cites Families (34)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH0965752A (en) * | 1995-09-01 | 1997-03-11 | Makita Corp | Battery charger of battery type electrically powered equipment |
US8234848B2 (en) * | 2010-07-28 | 2012-08-07 | Deere & Company | Robotic mower height of cut adjustment assembly |
CN102934565B (en) * | 2011-07-16 | 2015-12-09 | 苏州宝时得电动工具有限公司 | Mower and docking charging system |
CN103125212A (en) * | 2011-11-29 | 2013-06-05 | 苏州宝时得电动工具有限公司 | Grass cutter and butt joint charging system |
CN104126211B (en) * | 2012-02-22 | 2017-03-01 | 胡斯华纳有限公司 | Automatic mower |
EP2656718B1 (en) * | 2012-04-24 | 2018-07-04 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | A ground care apparatus and a charging station apparatus therefor |
WO2014101840A1 (en) * | 2012-12-28 | 2014-07-03 | 苏州宝时得电动工具有限公司 | Auto mowing system |
EP3889717A1 (en) * | 2014-03-31 | 2021-10-06 | iRobot Corporation | Autonomous mobile robot |
US10440879B2 (en) * | 2014-04-25 | 2019-10-15 | Husqvarna Ab | Robotic work tool |
CN106163258B (en) * | 2014-04-29 | 2019-07-09 | 胡斯华纳有限公司 | Improved robot Work tool |
JP6080887B2 (en) * | 2015-03-27 | 2017-02-15 | 本田技研工業株式会社 | Charging station and unmanned work vehicle charging station guidance device |
US20180199506A1 (en) * | 2015-09-24 | 2018-07-19 | Hitachi Koki Co., Ltd. | Self-propelled grass mower and self-propelled wheeled apparatus |
US11252863B2 (en) * | 2015-12-06 | 2022-02-22 | Robotic Lawn Care Sweden Ab | System for mowing lawns with robotic lawn mowers and a charging mobile carrier |
JP6263567B2 (en) * | 2016-03-31 | 2018-01-17 | 本田技研工業株式会社 | Control device for autonomous vehicle |
CN106064549B (en) * | 2016-05-19 | 2021-01-12 | 宁波大叶园林设备股份有限公司 | Travelling wheel |
EP3469442A4 (en) * | 2016-06-30 | 2020-09-16 | TTI (Macao Commercial Offshore) Limited | An autonomous lawn mower and a system for navigating thereof |
DE102016219806A1 (en) * | 2016-10-12 | 2018-04-12 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Electric motor driven wheel device |
KR101915547B1 (en) * | 2017-01-02 | 2018-11-06 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Lawn mower robot |
CN107046942A (en) * | 2017-03-09 | 2017-08-18 | 宁波大叶园林设备股份有限公司 | Have the insertion of automatic charging pin and extract the intelligent grass-removing of the charging assembly of contact chip |
US10980173B2 (en) * | 2017-09-13 | 2021-04-20 | Black & Decker Inc. | Riding mower with removeable battery module |
CN108142085A (en) * | 2017-12-22 | 2018-06-12 | 宁波大叶园林设备股份有限公司 | The intelligent robot grass trimmer of control direction is assisted with compass with straight line moving |
KR101984926B1 (en) | 2018-01-19 | 2019-05-31 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mowing robot |
US11129330B2 (en) * | 2018-04-06 | 2021-09-28 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Lawn mower robot |
EP3560312B1 (en) * | 2018-04-06 | 2021-10-20 | LG Electronics Inc. | Lawn mower robot |
CN110786131A (en) * | 2018-08-03 | 2020-02-14 | 宝时得科技(中国)有限公司 | Intelligent mower |
CN110024549A (en) * | 2019-05-15 | 2019-07-19 | 浙江中坚科技股份有限公司 | Self-propelled mower |
EP3771392B1 (en) * | 2019-07-31 | 2023-11-22 | LG Electronics Inc. | Charging apparatus for mobile robot |
CN210436149U (en) * | 2019-09-04 | 2020-05-01 | 苏州科瓴精密机械科技有限公司 | Automatic walking robot |
US11469604B2 (en) * | 2019-09-13 | 2022-10-11 | Echo Incorporated | System for facilitating connection between a charging station and a rechargeable power supply on an operating unit |
CN212573548U (en) * | 2020-05-07 | 2021-02-23 | 格力博(江苏)股份有限公司 | Wheel assembly and electric equipment |
CN212573599U (en) * | 2020-05-07 | 2021-02-23 | 格力博(江苏)股份有限公司 | Electrically powered apparatus and assemblies |
CN111418352A (en) * | 2020-05-07 | 2020-07-17 | 常州格力博有限公司 | Electrically powered apparatus and assemblies |
IT202000029933A1 (en) * | 2020-12-04 | 2022-06-04 | Stiga S P A In Breve Anche St S P A | SELF-PROPULNED APPLIANCE, IN PARTICULAR SELF-DRIVEN LAWNMOWER, AND RELATED CHARGING DEVICE, IN PARTICULAR, CHARGING STATION FOR SELF-DRIVEN LAWNMOWER |
CN216546446U (en) * | 2021-07-06 | 2022-05-17 | 未岚大陆(北京)科技有限公司 | Wheel body assembly and movable equipment |
-
2021
- 2021-03-31 WO PCT/CN2021/084615 patent/WO2021197390A1/en unknown
- 2021-03-31 US US17/218,188 patent/US20210329841A1/en active Pending
- 2021-03-31 EP EP21781918.4A patent/EP4125321A4/en active Pending
- 2021-03-31 EP EP21166290.3A patent/EP3888440A1/en active Pending
-
2022
- 2022-09-20 US US17/948,249 patent/US20230008169A1/en active Pending
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
EP4125321A1 (en) | 2023-02-08 |
WO2021197390A9 (en) | 2023-01-26 |
WO2021197390A1 (en) | 2021-10-07 |
EP4125321A4 (en) | 2023-09-13 |
US20210329841A1 (en) | 2021-10-28 |
EP3888440A1 (en) | 2021-10-06 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20230008169A1 (en) | A Robotic Mower with Integrated Assemblies | |
US20230051150A1 (en) | Robotic Mower with Collision and Detection Assemblies | |
EP2412219B1 (en) | Robotic mower housing and robotic mower | |
CN211674024U (en) | Cleaning robot and walking wheel structure and mobile device thereof | |
EP2073088B1 (en) | Robot docking station and robot for use therewith | |
EP2412220B1 (en) | Robotic mower height of cut adjustment assembly and robotic mower | |
EP3069593B1 (en) | Charging equipment for moving robot | |
US11129327B2 (en) | Moving robot | |
WO2013125992A1 (en) | Robotic lawn mower with joystick sensor. | |
CA2968625A1 (en) | Remote-controlled brake for bicycles and other vehicles | |
CN115666221A (en) | Grass cutter | |
CN209268060U (en) | Grass trimmer | |
CN116325411A (en) | Robot mower with integrated component | |
US11129326B2 (en) | Moving robot | |
WO2024056066A1 (en) | Lawn mower | |
KR102218183B1 (en) | Lawn mower robot | |
CN219330066U (en) | Shell device and mower | |
CN220342874U (en) | Remote controller and automatic walking equipment | |
CN116058156A (en) | Floating housing device, self-moving equipment and mower | |
CN112715134A (en) | Grass cutter |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |